initial commit of ebook 15436HEADmain

13 files changed, 9997 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/15436-8.txt b/15436-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec9700e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3160 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast
+of Labrador, to Ungava Bay, Westward of Cape Chudleigh, by Benjamin
+Kohlmeister and George Kmoch
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast of Labrador, to Ungava Bay, Westward of Cape Chudleigh
+       Undertaken to Explore the Coast, and Visit the Esquimaux in That Unknown Region
+
+
+Author: Benjamin Kohlmeister and George Kmoch
+
+Release Date: March 22, 2005  [eBook #15436]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON
+THE COAST OF LABRADOR, TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Wallace McLean, Cluny, and the Project Gutenberg Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team from page images generously made available
+by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+(http://www.canadiana.org/)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this file which
+      includes a map of the region described.
+      See 15435-h.htm or 15435-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/4/3/15435/15435-h/15435-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/4/3/15435/15435-h.zip)
+
+      Images of the original pages are available through the Canadian
+      Institute for Historical Microreproductions. See
+      http://www.canadiana.org/ECO/ItemRecord/21002?id=fde620f29a76b4fe
+
+      Inconsistencies and irregularities in spelling in the original
+      text have been retained. The table of contents was created for
+      this eBook.
+
+
+
+
+JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON THE COAST OF LABRADOR,
+TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH;
+
+UNDERTAKEN to Explore the Coast, and Visit the ESQUIMAUX in that
+Unknown Region
+
+by
+
+BENJAMIN KOHLMEISTER and GEORGE KMOCH
+
+Missionaries of the Church of the Unitas Fratrum or United Brethren
+
+London:
+Printed by W. M'Dowall, Pemberton Row, Gough Square, Fleet Street,
+for the Brethren's Society for the Furtherance of the
+Gospel Among the Heathen.
+And Sold By J. Le Febvre, 2, Chapel-Place, Nevils-Court, Fetter-Lane;
+L. B. Seeley, 169, Fleet-Street; Hazard And Binns, Bath;
+and T. Bulgin, and T. Lambe, Bristol
+
+1814
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE,
+
+&c. &c.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+INTRODUCTION                                                   3
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+  Outfit. Opinions of the Esquimaux respecting the Voyage.
+  Description of the Company. Departure from Okkak. Arrival
+  at Nungorome.                                                6
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+  Departure from Nungorome Cove. Account of Solomon.
+  Drift-ice. Cape Mugford. Waterfalls from the Kaumayok
+  Mountains. Fruitless attempt to get out of the Ikkerasak,
+  or Straits.                                                 10
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+  Quit the Ikkerasak. Account of the Kaumayok Mountains, and
+  of Kangertluksoak. Public Worship on Sunday. Saeglek and
+  its Inhabitants described. The Missionaries visit the
+  Esquimaux at Kikkertarsoak.                                 14
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+  Departure from Saeglek. Fruitless attempt to reach
+  Nachvak. Retreat into Nullatartok Inlet. Slate Bay.
+  Detention on account of the Ice. Arrive at Nachvak.         20
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+  Reception at Nachvak. Description of the bay. The
+  Esquimaux manner of spearing salmon and trout. Christian
+  deportment of the Okkak and Hopedale Esquimaux. Jonas's
+  address to the Heathen. Love of music general among these
+  Indians. Departure from Nachvak. Danger in doubling the
+  North Cape. Arrival at Sangmiyok bay.                       27
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+  Pass Cape Nennoktok. Visit the Esquimaux families at
+  Kummaktorvik and Amitok. Description of an Esquimaux
+  travelling bed. Mountains seen at Ungava. Netsek seal
+  described. Greenland houses. Danger of being shipwrecked
+  near Kakkeviak.                                             33
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+  Arrival at Oppernavik. Account of Uttakiyok. His
+  perseverance in waiting for the arrival of the
+  Missionaries. Islands and bays between Kakkeviak and
+  Killinek. Danger in the ice at Ammitok. Want of fuel
+  supplied by robbing old graves.                             39
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+  Departure from Oppernavik. Pass the Ikkerasak of Killinek.
+  Whirlpools. The coast takes a southerly direction. Meeting
+  with Esquimaux from the Ungava country, who had never seen
+  an European. Anchor at Omanek. High tides. Drift-wood.
+  Double Cape Uibvaksoak. Distant view of Akpatok.            44
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+  Chain of black mountains. The Dragon's dwelling. Changes
+  occasioned by rise and fall of the tides, and dangers
+  attending them. Uttakiyok's superstitious customs.
+  Singular effect of the tide in the bay of Ittimnekoktok.
+  Arrive at Kangertlualuksoak bay and river. Its situation.
+  Transactions there.                                         50
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+  Further transactions in Kangertlualuksoak Bay. The
+  Esquimaux women frightened by reports of Indians. Ceremony
+  of taking possession of this new-explored country, as
+  belonging to the King of England, and of naming the river
+  George river. Leave the bay and proceed to Arvarvik.
+  Whales caught by the Esquimaux in the shallows. Storm at
+  Kernertut.                                                  56
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+  Doubts expressed by Jonathan and the other Esquimaux on
+  the expediency of continuing the voyage. Consultations.
+  Resolve to proceed. Thunder-storm at Pitsiolak. Account of
+  Indians. Esquimaux cookery and hunting feasts. Arrival in
+  the river Koksoak.                                          62
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+  Sail up the river Koksoak. Transactions in that region.
+  Dangerous eddy. Meet Esquimaux. Address to them. Their joy
+  and eagerness to have Missionaries, resident among them.
+  Find a suitable situation for a settlement. Description of
+  the country.                                                70
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+  Return to Okkak.                                            77
+
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+For these many years past, a considerable number of Esquimaux have been
+in the annual practice of visiting the three missionary establishments
+of the United Brethren on the coast of Labrador, OKKAK, NAIN, and
+HOPEDALE, chiefly with a view to barter, or to see those of their
+friends and acquaintance, who had become obedient to the gospel, and
+lived together in Christian fellowship, enjoying the instruction of the
+Missionaries.
+
+These people came mostly from the north, and some of them from a great
+distance. They reported, that the body of the Esquimaux nation lived
+near and beyond Cape Chudleigh, which they call Killinek, and having
+conceived much friendship for the Missionaries, never failed to request,
+that some of them would come to their country, and even urged the
+formation of a new settlement, considerably to the north of Okkak.
+
+To these repeated and earnest applications the Missionaries were the
+more disposed to listen, as it had been discovered, not many years after
+the establishment of the Mission in 1771, that that part of the coast on
+which, by the encouragement of the British government, the first
+settlement was made, was very thinly inhabited, and that the aim of the
+Mission, to convert the Esquimaux to Christianity, would be better
+obtained, if access could be had to the main body of the Indians, from
+which the roving inhabitants appeared to be mere stragglers.
+Circumstances, however, prevented more extensive plans from being put in
+execution; and the Missionaries, having gained the confidence and esteem
+of the Esquimaux in their neighbourhood, remained stationary on that
+coast, and, by degrees, formed three settlements, OKKAK, to the north,
+and HOPEDALE, to the south of NAIN, their first place of residence.
+
+In consequence of the abovementioned invitation, it became a subject of
+serious consideration, by what means a more correct idea of the extent
+and dwelling-places of the Esquimaux nation might be obtained, and a
+general wish was expressed, that one or more of the Missionaries would
+undertake the perilous task of visiting such places as were reported by
+the Esquimaux themselves to contain more inhabitants than the southern
+coast, but remained unknown to European navigators.
+
+The Synodal Committee, appointed for the management of the Missions of
+the United Brethren, having given their consent to the measure, and
+agreed with Brother Kohlmeister, by occasion of a visit paid by him to
+his relations and friends in Germany, as to the mode of putting it into
+execution, he returned to Labrador in 1810, and prepared to undertake
+the voyage early in the spring of 1811.
+
+For several years a correspondence had taken place between the
+Missionaries in Labrador and the Brethren's Society for the Furtherance
+of the Gospel, established in London, relating to the manner in which
+the voyage should be performed. Opinions were various on the subject;
+but it was at length determined, that a steady intelligent Christian
+Esquimaux, possessing a shallop, with two masts, and of sufficient
+dimensions, should be appointed to accompany one or two Missionaries,
+for a liberal recompence; and that the travellers should spend the
+winter at Okkak, to be ready to proceed on the voyage, without loss of
+time, as soon as the state of the ice would permit of it. Brother
+Kohlmeister proposed, in this view, the Esquimaux Jonathan, of Hopedale,
+and the brig employed to convey the annual supply of necessaries to the
+three settlements, was ordered to proceed first to Hopedale, partly with
+a view to this negociation. She arrived safe with Brother Kohlmeister at
+this place, on the 22d July, 1810. On the same day, he proposed to
+Jonathan the intended expedition, laid before him the whole plan, with
+all its difficulties and advantages, and found him immediately willing
+to undertake the voyage, and to forward its object by every means in his
+power.
+
+This was no small sacrifice on the part of Jonathan. An Esquimaux is
+naturally attached to the place of his birth; and, though he spends the
+summer, and indeed great part of the year, necessarily, and from
+inclination, in roving from one place to another in quest of food; yet
+in winter he settles, if possible, upon his native spot, where he is
+esteemed and beloved. This was eminently the case with Jonathan. He was
+a man of superior understanding and skill, possessed of uncommon
+presence of mind in difficulties and dangers, and at Hopedale considered
+as the principal person, or chief of his nation. But he was now ready to
+forsake all, and to go and reside at OKKAK, among strangers, having no
+authority or pre-eminence, and to undertake a voyage of unknown length
+and peril, from whence he could not be sure of a safe or speedy return,
+before the ice might set in, and confine him upon an unknown shore,
+during the whole of a second winter. There was, however, one
+consideration which outweighed every other in his mind, and made him,
+according to his own declaration, forget all difficulties and dangers.
+He hoped that the proposed voyage to visit his countrymen in the north
+would, in time, be a means of their becoming acquainted with the gospel
+of Christ, and partakers of the same blessings which he now enjoyed.
+This made him willing to accept of the call without any hesitation. Nor
+did he ever, during the whole voyage, forsake that generous principle,
+by which he was at first influenced, but his cheerful, firm, and
+faithful conduct proved, under all circumstances, most honourable to the
+character of a true convert to Christianity.
+
+Brother KOHLMEISTER being, after seventeen years residence in Labrador,
+complete master of the Esquimaux language, and deservedly beloved and
+respected both by Christians and heathens, and possessing an invincible
+zeal to promote their temporal and spiritual welfare, was a man
+eminently qualified to undertake the commission, and to conciliate the
+affections of unknown heathen. He had also previously made himself
+acquainted with the use of the quadrant, and with other branches of
+science, useful on such an occasion.
+
+Brother KMOCH, his companion, joined to other essential qualifications,
+great cheerfulness and intrepidity.
+
+All the parties having met at Okkak, in the autumn of 1810, the winter
+was partly spent in preparations for the intended expedition, and
+Jonathan's boat put into the best possible state of repair.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+  _Outfit. Opinions of the Esquimaux respecting the Voyage.
+  Description of the Company. Departure from Okkak. Arrival at
+  Nungorome._
+
+
+June 16, 1811.--The ice began to loosen in the bay of OKKAK, and to
+drive out to sea. On the 17th, the bay was quite cleared of it; but on
+the 18th, it returned, and seemed to preclude all possibility of setting
+out so soon as we intended. On the 19th, however, it left us entirely.
+
+20th. We were employed in hauling the boat to the edge of the water, and
+being floated by the tide, she came to anchor at six, P.M. She had been
+purchased by Jonathan, at Chateau-bay, and was about 45 feet long,
+twelve broad, and five deep, with two masts. We had furnished her with a
+complete deck, and divided her into three parts. The centre was our own
+cabin, into which all our baggage was stowed: the two other divisions
+were occupied by the Esquimaux. A small boat, brought from Lewis, was
+taken in tow.
+
+21st. We began to ship our provision and baggage: viz. six cwt. of
+ship's biscuit, sixteen bushels of pease, one cwt. of salt pork and best
+beef, (of which but a small portion was consumed, as we were generally
+well supplied with fresh provisions, procured by shooting), a firkin of
+butter, half cwt. of captain's biscuit, one cwt. of flour, two small
+barrels of gunpowder, one cwt. of large and small shot, half cwt. of
+tobacco, two eighteen-gallon barrels of ale, a few bottles of brandy,
+eighteen pounds of coffee, which was all consumed, coffee and biscuits
+being our usual repast; a case containing knives, wire, nails, &c. for
+barter, if necessary; kettles and other utensils. Besides that every man
+had his fowling-piece, we had four muskets in reserve. After bringing
+all on board, we had just room enough to sleep in our cabin.
+
+22d, was spent in conferring with our brethren, on various subjects
+relating to the voyage.
+
+23d. All the Esquimaux met at the chapel, and in the most affectionate
+manner, and with many tears, bid us and our company farewell. They were
+the more affected with grief on this occasion, as the greatest part of
+our own Esquimaux thought the voyage impracticable, and expected that we
+should all perish in doubling Cape Chudleigh, (Killinek) on account of
+the violence of the currents, setting round between the cape, and the
+many rocks and islands which stretch from it towards the north. Reports
+had likewise been circulated of the hostile disposition of the Esquimaux
+in the Ungava bay; and it was boldly asserted, that if we even got there
+alive, we should never return. An old conjuror, (Angekok), _Atsugarsuk_,
+had been particularly active in spreading these reports. We cannot deny
+but that they occasioned some apprehension in our own minds, but being
+fully determined to venture in the name of God, and trusting in His
+protection, we were thankful that they failed to produce the intended
+effect on Jonathan, our guide, and on the other Esquimaux, who were to
+go with us, and who all remained firm.
+
+When Jonathan was told that the Ungava Esquimaux would kill him, he
+generally answered: "Well, we will try, and shall know better when we
+get there:" and once, conversing with us on the subject, expressed
+himself thus: "When I hear people talking about the danger of being
+killed, I think: Jesus went to death out of love to us, what great
+matter would it be, if we were to be put to death in His service, should
+that be His good pleasure concerning us."
+
+24th. Having commended ourselves in prayer to the grace and protecting
+care of God our Saviour, and to the kind remembrance of our dear fellow
+missionaries, we set sail at two P.M.
+
+Our company consisted of four Esquimaux families: 1. _Jonathan_, and his
+wife _Sybilla_, both between fifty and sixty years old. He was esteemed
+one of the most skilful commanders on the whole coast of Labrador, and
+for many years has shown himself both able and willing to serve the
+missionaries in a variety of ways. The boat was his own property, and we
+considered him as the captain of the expedition. 2. _Jonas_, Jonathan's
+son, and his wife _Agnes_, about thirty years of age, both intelligent,
+clever Esquimaux; they had their five children with them; _Sophia_,
+twelve years old, _Susanna_, _Jonathan_, _Thamar_, and _Sybilla_, the
+youngest but half a year old. 3. _Paul_, and his wife _Mary_, very
+agreeable, sensible people, about twenty years of age. Paul is
+Jonathan's cousin, and a man of a very warm temper. In activity and
+skill, he was next to Jonathan. 4. _David_, and his mother _Rachel_, the
+first a hopeful young man of about twenty, and the latter a good-natured
+old woman, who had the care of our clothes and linen, and kept them
+clean and in good order. Besides these four families, we took with us a
+boy, _Okkiksuk_, an orphan, about sixteen, whom Jonathan had adopted,
+and who promised to reward the kindness of his guardian by his good
+behaviour. He was always ready to render us every service in his power.
+
+We were attended on the voyage by a skin-boat (or woman's boat) in which
+were _Thukkekina_ and his wife, and their adopted child _Mammak_, a boy
+twelve years old. Their age is about forty. The skin-boat was intended
+as a refuge, in case of any accident happening to our own boat, and was
+useful in landing, as we never brought the large boat close in shore.
+The first four families belong to Hopedale, Thukkekina and his wife to
+Okkak. They considered it as a great favour conferred on them to be
+permitted to accompany us. _Jonas_ and his family occupied the
+after-part, and the rest the fore-part of the boat. The wind was
+moderate, and due west. We lost sight of our habitations in about half
+an hour, behind the N.E. point of the island Okkak, called Sungolik.
+
+At three, passed Cape Uivak, a cape on the continent, forming a
+moderately high headland, and the nearest place to Okkak, where
+Esquimaux spend the winter. Two or three winter-houses were standing.
+
+The wind failing, we cast off the skin-boat, which rowed merrily a-head.
+Before us, between the islands to the east and the continent, we saw
+much drift-ice, and it required attention to avoid the large shoals, the
+wind coming round to the N.W. We cast anchor at NUNGOROME, a cove about
+ten English miles from Okkak, where we found several of our Esquimaux,
+who had here their summer-station. Several had come from Naujasiorvik
+and other places, on purpose to meet us, and once more to express their
+affection and best wishes for our safe voyage and return. Late in the
+evening, we met on a green spot, where Brother Kohlmeister delivered a
+short discourse and prayer, after which we retired to sleep on board the
+boat.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+  _Departure from Nungorome Cove. Account of Solomon. Drift-ice.
+  Cape Mugford. Waterfalls from the Kaumayok Mountains. Fruitless
+  attempt to get out of the Ikkerasak, or Straits._
+
+
+Nungorome is a cove on the south side of the Island Pacharvik. Between
+this island the main land is a narrow strait, so shallow that no whales
+can pass. The Esquimaux stretch their nets across, to catch seals,
+seeking shelter in it when the wind sets in from the open sea. They can
+only be taken in the night, and the greater part of those which frequent
+this coast are of the _Kairolik_ kind, a middle-sized animal, and of the
+_Ugsuk_, the largest species of the seal tribe, weighing sometimes from
+five to six cwt.
+
+The Esquimaux belonging to our congregation, who were at present
+stationed here, in tents, were _Moses_, _Samuel_, _Thomas_, _Isaac_,
+_Bammiuk_, and their families. _Solomon_, who has left our communion,
+was also here. He had formerly been a communicant member of Okkak
+congregation, but could not resist the temptation of going to the north
+to feast with the heathen Esquimaux, whenever they had caught a live, or
+found a dead whale. On such occasions he was seduced to commit many
+irregularities and sins, but always returned to us with a show of great
+contrition and repentance. After many relapses, he was informed, that
+this would do no longer, but that if he went again to these heathenish
+feasts, he would be excluded. He is a sensible, well-disposed man, and
+perceived the justice of the sentence; but his love of that species of
+amusement overcame all his good resolutions. He not only went again, but
+took also another wife; a step which, of course, excluded him from our
+fellowship. Yet he is very desirous that his children may receive a
+Christian education, and remain faithful to the precepts of the gospel.
+
+25th. Brother Kmoch rose at half past one in the morning, and suffering
+the rest to sleep on, got breakfast ready; he then fired his piece, by
+which Brother Kohlmeister and all the Esquimaux, young and old, were
+suddenly roused from their slumbers. Not one, however, regretted the
+unexpected interruption to their pleasant dreams, on beholding the sea
+quite free from ice, with a fine morning and fair wind; but after
+yawning, stretching, and shaking themselves as usual, the Esquimaux with
+great good humour got ready, and we set sail at half past three. Passed
+Pacharvik Island at four. Bammiuk and Solomon accompanied us as far as
+the North Ikkerasak (the Esquimaux name for a strait) between Cape
+Mugford Island, in 58° N. latitude, and the mountains of Kaumayok. Their
+being in company retarded our progress, but in the sequel proved no
+disadvantage.
+
+About nine, we entered the straits, and perceiving at a distance much
+drift-ice a-head, cast anchor, and Brother Kmoch and Jonas landed on
+Cape Mugford Island. An Esquimaux, called _Niakungetok_, accompanied
+them to the top of an eminence, from whence the outer opening of the
+Ikkerasak was seen. They perceived the ice driving into it from the sea
+in such quantities as to threaten to close it up. Cape Mugford is an
+high island, extending far into the ocean, and the northern land-mark in
+steering for Okkak, _Kiglapeit_ promontory bearing south, and the
+Saddle-island appearing right before the entrance of the bay. On their
+return to the boat, the wind veered to the north, and we steered for a
+dwelling-place of the Esquimaux, about twenty miles from Okkak, called
+_Ukkuararsuk_. To our great joy the ice began now to drive out again to
+sea, and we resolved to go with it. A gentle S.W. wind brought us to the
+place, where we had before anchored, but we were now beset with large
+fields of ice, among which we tacked, till we had nearly cleared the
+straits, when the great quantity of surrounding ice, pressing upon us,
+prevented our making further attempts, and we, were compelled to work
+our way back with oars and boat-hooks.
+
+On Cape Mugford island we now discovered more Esquimaux, who by signs
+directed our course towards a convenient harbour, near their dwellings,
+which we reached in safety.
+
+The Esquimaux pitched their tents on shore, but we slept on board.
+
+The situation of this place is remarkably beautiful. The strait is about
+an English mile broad, and four or five in length. Both shores are lined
+with precipitous rocks, which in many places rise to a tremendous
+height, particularly on the Kaumayok side, from whence several
+waterfalls rush into the sea, with a roar, which quite fills the air.
+The singular appearance of these cataracts is greatly increased when
+illuminated by the rising sun, the spray, exhibiting the most beautiful
+prismatic colours. Below them huge masses of ice are formed, which seem
+to lean against the sides of the rocks, and to be continually increasing
+during the winter, but when melted by the power of a summer's sun, and
+disengaged by their weight, are carried off by the tides, and help to
+form floating ice-mountains. The coast lies S.W. by N.E.
+
+26th. Being detained here by the state of the ice, and the weather fine
+and warm, Brother Kmoch and Ogiksuk rowed across the straits to the
+nearest great cataract, and were able, notwithstanding the steepness of
+the ascent, to get pretty close to it. It falls fifty or sixty feet
+perpendicular, and the noise is terrible. The spray ascending from it,
+like the steam of a huge cauldron, wetted the travellers completely.
+They amused themselves some time by rolling large stones into the fall,
+which by its force were carried along towards the sea, down the sloping
+torrent below. Our people meanwhile caught three seals, and made a
+hearty meal, of which we also partook, hunger, on this occasion,
+overcoming our dislike to seal's flesh. A sallad of scurvy-grass was
+made for supper.
+
+27th. We left this harbour about four A.M. with a favourable wind at
+West, but as it soon died away, we took to our oars, and reached the
+north point of Kaumayok, at the northern extremity of the strait. By an
+observation taken by Brother Kohlmeister, this point is situated in 57°
+59' N. latitude. Though calm, there was a great swell from the sea, and
+the rolling of the boat affected our brave captain not a little, to the
+diversion of the other Esquimaux. About two P.M. the wind shifted to the
+N.W. By tacking we got to Kupperlik, about the middle of Kaumayok, but
+having the skin-boat in tow, could not weather the point, and were at
+length obliged to return to our former anchorage in the strait.
+
+28th. The wind being North we could not proceed. We therefore ascended
+the mountain of Cape Mugford. It is a barren rock, though here and there
+a solitary plant or a tuft of moss clings to its steep sides, and is
+difficult of access. The numerous waterfalls on the Kaumayok, which
+still rose above us, were full in view, and we now discovered several
+small lakes which supply them. Some of them fall from a great height
+perpendicularly into the sea.
+
+We could here discern the island of Okkak, to the S.W. to the East, the
+boundless ocean, and to the N.E. three high, barren, and steep islands,
+called Nennoktuts by the Esquimaux, (White mountains.)
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+  _Quit the Ikkerasak. Account of the Kaumayok Mountains, and of
+  Kangertluksoak. Public Worship on Sunday. Saeglek and its
+  Inhabitants described. The Missionaries visit the Esquimaux at
+  Kikkertarsoak._
+
+
+June 29th.--We rose soon after two o'clock, and rowed out of the
+Ikkerasak, with a fair wind. The sea was perfectly calm and smooth.
+Brother Kmoch rowed in the small boat along the foot of the mountains of
+Kaumayok, sometimes going on shore, while the large boat was making but
+little way, keeping out at some distance, to avoid the rocks. The
+outline of this chain of mountains exhibits the most fanciful figures.
+At various points, the rocks descend abruptly into the sea, presenting
+horrid precipices. The strand is covered with a black sand. At the
+height of about fifty feet from the sea, the rocks have veins of red,
+yellow, and green stone, running horizontally and parallel; and
+sometimes in an undulated form. Above these, they present the appearance
+of a magnificent colonade, or rather of buttresses, supporting a gothic
+building, varying in height and thickness, and here and there
+intersected by wide and deep chasms and glens, running far inland
+between the mountains. Loose stones above, have in some places the
+appearance of statues, and the superior region exhibits all kind of
+grotesque shapes. It is by far the most singular and picturesque chain
+of mountains on this coast. To the highest part of it we gave the name
+of St. Pauls, as it is not unlike that cathedral when viewed at a
+distance, with its dome and two towers.
+
+Before we left the Kaumayok, Brother Kohlmeister landed, and found the
+beach covered with blocks of stone, in colour white and grey, like
+statuary marble, but very hard. We now steered for _Kangertluksoak_, a
+winter-station of the Esquimaux, where several of our people had pitched
+their tents.
+
+At noon, we were off an island, called _Eingosiarsuk_, (the Little Cup),
+opposite the _Ittiplek_, (a flat piece of ground joining two headlands)
+over which the northern Esquimaux pass in sledges to Okkak, round
+Kaumayok. Farther towards the N.W. lies _Tuppertalik_, a high ridge of
+mountains, which, from its appearance, we called the Table mountain,
+having nearly the shape of the mountain so called at the Cape of Good
+Hope.
+
+To the north lies _Nellekartok_, the outermost island on leaving the
+Ikkerasak, and the first of the _Kangertluksoak_ islands. Behind
+_Tuppertalik_, a bay opens called _Nappartok_ (a wood), a
+winter-habitation, with a little wood higher up the country, about eight
+or ten hours drive from Okkak. A good harbour for large vessels is said
+to be here, called _Umiakovitannak_, (Broad boat-harbour). Before the
+entrance to _Nappartok_, lies an island, _Naujartsit_ (the Little
+Sea-gull island). Seven or eight miles, north of Nappertok, a long flat
+point runs out, terminated by a small island. On approaching towards
+Kangertluksoak, a long island runs parallel with the coast called
+_Illuektulik_, (a burial-place), between which and the main land is a
+strait, affording good shelter for boats. Into this Jonathan intended to
+run, but the wind being favourable, we kept on our course, and passed
+two islands, _Kingmiktok_, (Dog island), and farther north,
+_Kikkertarsoak_ a great island which defends the entrance into the
+harbour of _Kangertluksoak_, from the sea. At ten P.M. we came to an
+anchor in the harbour, and were received by our Esquimaux, of whom
+several families were stationed here, as well as by the other
+inhabitants, with demonstrations of great joy. Both the heathen who kept
+on the right side of the great bay, and our own Christian Esquimaux, on
+the left, fired numberless shots to welcome us. Several boats were here
+from _Kittinek_ and _Nachvak_ bound to Okkak.
+
+_Kangertluksoak_ lies about sixty miles north of Okkak, is an agreeable
+place, and has a good strand, and safe anchorage.
+
+30th. Being Sunday, the Missionaries went on shore, and visited all the
+Christian families, by whom they were received with the most lively
+expressions of affection and gratitude. Many strangers from the opposite
+coast had joined them, and they all seated themselves in a large circle
+on the grass.
+
+_Nikupsuk's_ wife, Louisa, who had long ago forsaken the believers, was
+here, and said, with much apparent contrition, that she was unworthy to
+be numbered with them. She then seated herself at a little distance from
+the rest.
+
+The number of the congregation, including our boat's company, amounted
+to about fifty. Brother Kohlmeister first addressed them, by greeting
+them from their brethren at Okkak, and expressing our joy at finding
+them well in health, and our hopes, that they were all walking worthy of
+their Christian profession, as a good example to their heathen
+neighbours. Then the Litany was read, and a spirit of true devotion
+pervaded the whole assembly.
+
+Our very hearts rejoiced in this place, which had but lately been a den
+of murderers, dedicated, as it were, by the angekoks, or sorcerers, to
+the service of the devil, to hear the cheerful voices of converted
+heathen, most melodiously sounding forth the praises of God, and giving
+glory to the name of Jesus their Redeemer. Peace, and cheerful
+countenances dwelt in the tents of the believing Esquimaux.
+
+Our people had caught a large white-fish, and pressed us much to be
+their guests, which we should have accepted of with pleasure, but we
+thought it prudent to avail ourselves of the favourable wind and
+weather, to proceed. Instead, therefore, of dining with them, we
+presented to each tent a quart of pease, which is considered by the
+Esquimaux as a great luxury, and was received with unbounded
+thankfulness.
+
+About noon we set sail, with a brisk wind at S.E. for _Saeglek_. The
+coast presents here, moderately high, barren mountains, without bays or
+islands. The wind becoming more violent, the rope, by which we kept the
+skin-boat in tow, suddenly snapt, and set her adrift. She was frequently
+hid from our view by the height of the waves, but we were in no
+apprehension about her, as these kind of boats are much safer in a high
+sea, than a European one.
+
+At seven P.M. we arrived at _Saeglek_, and were saluted by the firing of
+muskets and bonfires on the hills. The Esquimaux have their dwellings on
+a small flat island, between two of larger size, but the strand is bad,
+and full of sharp shingles. There are about five or six winter-houses at
+Saeglek, containing each about two or three families.
+
+July 1st. Early, two Esquimaux men, _Joas_ and _Uiverunna_, came in
+their kayaks to pay us a visit. They, with their families, inhabited
+some tents we had seen yesterday. Brother Kohlmeister spoke seriously to
+them on the necessity of conversion, especially to Joas, who had
+Christian parents, and as a child, was baptized at Okkak. He reminded
+him of his having been devoted to Jesus from his birth; that he
+therefore ought not to belong to the unbelievers, but to Him who had
+created and redeemed him; and that the greatest of all the sins he now
+committed, was his persisting in his determination not to return. He
+seemed to listen with some humility to the loving and earnest reproof
+and exhortations of the Missionary, but at last excused himself by
+laying the blame upon his mother, who kept him back, adding, that he
+still intended to be converted.
+
+Our people had meanwhile made a fire, and put the pot on to boil pease;
+but the wind changing, Jonathan determined immediately to proceed. The
+pease had just begun to swell, and as the two Esquimaux had presented us
+with some fresh meat, they had been asked to partake of our meal; but
+finding themselves thus disappointed, they fell to, and having greedily
+devoured a quantity of the half-boiled pease, and filled their gloves
+with the rest, they took leave, and set sail about 11, A.M.
+
+Hearing from some Esquimaux who made towards us in their kayaks, that
+the Saeglek people were all on the north side of the island of
+Kikkertarsoak, we proceeded thither, and having doubled the point, saw
+seven tents full of people. Two of them contained families from
+Killinek. But the violence of the wind was such, that we could not stay
+in this unsheltered place with safety. We therefore worked our way, with
+the help of the Esquimaux, round another point, into a roadstead, rather
+more sheltered than the former, though open to the sea. A little tobacco
+is the reward expected and given for such assistance.
+
+The beach is composed of numberless black pebbles, polished by the sea,
+and each about the size of an hen's egg.
+
+Brother Kohlmeister immediately landed, and visited the Esquimaux in
+their tents. Many heathen were at this place, to whom he preached the
+gospel, and invited them to believe in Jesus, as the Saviour of men, who
+would deliver them from the love, power, and curse of sin, having shed
+His blood, and died on the cross, to redeem their souls. He was heard
+with great attention. A venerable old man, with hair as white as wool,
+particularly attracted our notice. He called Brother Kohlmeister by
+name, took hold of both his hands, and begged him to sit down by him.
+Brother Kohlmeister inquired, whether he knew him. The old man replied:
+"Thou art Benjamin, often have I heard thy name at Okkak. I therefore
+rejoice to see thee." He seemed quite at a loss, what way to express his
+affection; and at length delivered a strap of seals'-leather to Mr.
+Kohlmeister, with these words: "I am poor, and have nothing else to give
+thee, yet I wish to give thee some token of my love." Brother
+Kohlmeister accepted of his present, and inwardly cried to the Lord, to
+show mercy to this poor ignorant heathen. "You are old," said he, "and
+have not much more time to live in this world, will you not turn to that
+Jesus, who has died for your sins also? It is not His desire that you
+should perish, and be lost in everlasting darkness, but that you should
+live with Him in the place of light and immortal bliss." The old man
+replied: "What shall I do? thy words are very pleasant, and I would fain
+hear much more of Jesus. I do not wish to be lost in the place of
+darkness." Brother Kohlmeister answered, that if he sincerely wished to
+be saved, and was troubled on account of his sinful life he should
+believe in, and call on the name of Jesus, who would certainly hear and
+reveal Himself unto him. Many people were present in the tent, who
+behaved with great decency, and whom Brother Kohlmeister earnestly
+addressed on the necessity of conversion. He wished to prolong the
+conversation especially with the old man, who promised, that he would
+never forget the words spoken to him, but it was growing late, and we
+returned to our cabin. The poor old man having sore legs, some medicine
+was left for him.
+
+The passage from Kangertluksoak to Saeglek is about twenty English
+miles. Saeglek is a considerable promontory, open to the south.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+  _Departure from Saeglek. Fruitless attempt to reach Nachvak.
+  Retreat into Nullatartok Inlet. Slate Bay. Detention on account
+  of the Ice. Arrive at Nachvak._
+
+
+July 2d.--At one A.M. we set sail, steering for _Nachvak_, a distance of
+about thirty miles. Here a chain of mountains runs north and south,
+nearly parallel with the coast. The coast itself is of moderate height,
+but very steep, and not being defended by any island, the approach to it
+as a lee-shore, is very dangerous. It runs generally in a pretty strait
+line about forty miles, when a wide bay opens, in which lies, towards
+the north, an island called _Karngalersiorvik_, where there is said to
+be a good harbour for boats. The rocks, of which the mountains are
+composed, are of a white grey colour, streaked almost perpendicularly
+with veins of black stone, about two feet broad. The intermediate strata
+may be about eight times as broad. We had hoped to reach Nachvak in the
+morning, by continuing our course through the following night, though
+the wind was weak and variable, but in the evening we got into
+drift-ice: yet as the shoals were not close together, we worked our way
+through them; and stood on with the little wind we had at S.E.
+
+3d. At dawn of day, and being still four miles distant from Nachvak, we
+perceived both in the open sea, and all along the shore, that our
+passage was completely occupied with floating ice, which drove towards
+us, and forced us back. We then endeavoured to find shelter in a bay
+bounded by high mountains, but found none, the wind driving the ice
+after us into it, and soon filling it. Jonathan frequently cried out
+with a plaintive voice: "Alas, alas, we shall soon be without a boat!"
+We now hastened to the opposite shore to find some cove or inlet, but
+getting more and more entangled among the ice, were at last obliged,
+some to land, and haul the boat with ropes round the points, and others
+with boat-hooks and spars, to keep her off the rocks. Two or three times
+she stuck fast on sunken rocks, but by God's mercy always got off again
+without damage. At length we discovered three narrow inlets, the
+middlemost forming a bay, being the estuary of a river, which runs
+W.S.W. about eight or ten miles up the country, and is called
+Nullatartok. Into this we pushed, when shortly after our entrance, the
+ice entirely filled up the passage, and we were compelled to retreat to
+the uppermost part, choosing the shallowest possible spot to anchor in.
+The bay itself is about two miles in breadth, and only in the middle
+deep enough to admit the larger fields of drift ice to float into it.
+The strand is broad, and slopes off gently. It is covered with large
+tables of slate. The mountains on each side are high, and seem to
+consist of ferruginous slate, the lamina or plates of which are of such
+immense size, that they might serve for entire walls. Towards the sea,
+there exudes from these rocks, a yellowish white substance, which has a
+strong sulphureous smell. It was so powerful, that if a drop fell on a
+piece of tinned iron, it removed the tin in a few minutes.
+
+The vallies in the neighbourhood were green and full of flowers.
+
+Not far from the spot where we had pitched our tents, (which rested upon
+a carpet of _potentilla aurea_, in full bloom, bringing to our minds the
+European meadows, full of butter-cups), the river, which is of
+considerable breadth, falls into the bay. It abounds with fine
+salmon-trout. Farther to the westward, two other rivers flow into it,
+one of which is much broader than the other, and has a large cataract at
+some distance from its mouth. The upper parts of the mountains are
+covered partly with moss, and partly with low brush-wood, birch, and
+alder, and many berry-bearing shrubs and plants, but no high trees. We
+found here both arnica and colts-foot in great plenty. Brother
+Kohlmeister gathered and dried a quantity of each, as they are used in
+medical cases, and the former cannot be procured from England.
+
+The slate is extremely shivery, and is found in slabs, either lying or
+standing upright from four to eight feet square, most easily splitting
+into thin plates. Ascending the mountain, they are soon dislodged, by
+the tread of a man's foot, and glide down towards the beach with a
+rattling, tinkling noise. At low water, we noticed a bed of stone
+resembling cast iron, of a reddish hue, and polished by the friction of
+the water. After supping on salmon-trout, caught in the first-mentioned
+river, we retired to rest; but had some fears even here for the safety
+of our boat, the ice pushing in towards us, and our people being
+employed day and night in warding off the large shoals with their
+boat-hooks.
+
+4th. The weather being fair, Brother Kmoch ascended to the top of the
+highest part of the mountain near us, from whence he could see nothing
+but drift-ice, powerfully in motion towards the bay. Four of our
+Esquimaux went up the country to hunt reindeer; saw eight head and two
+fawns; but got none.
+
+Perceiving that our abode in this place might be of some duration, we
+for the first time pitched our tents on shore. Our morning and evening
+devotion was attended by the whole party; and on Sundays we read the
+Litany, and conducted the service in the usual way, which proved to us
+and our Esquimaux of great comfort and encouragement in all
+difficulties. We were detained here, by the ice, from the 3d to the
+15th, and our faith and patience were frequently put to the trial.
+Meanwhile we found much pleasure in walking up the declivities of the
+hills, and into the fine green and flowery vallies around us.
+
+5th. We went up the western extremity of the bay, but found nothing
+worth notice. Here the rocks appeared to be of a species of freestone.
+
+6th. In the evening we met in Jonathan's tent. Brother Kohlmeister
+addressed the company, and reminded them, that to-day the holy communion
+would be celebrated in our congregations, which we could not do in this
+place, under present circumstances. Then kneeling down, he offered up a
+fervent prayer, entreating the Lord not to forget us in this wilderness,
+but to give us to feel His all-reviving presence, and to feed our hungry
+and thirsty souls, out of the fulness of His grace. A comfortable sense
+of His love and peace filled all our hearts on this occasion.
+
+In the evening, Paul began to read out of the Harmony of the four
+Evangelists, which we shall continue as often as circumstances will
+admit of it. Jonathan and Jonas generally conduct the daily morning and
+evening worship.
+
+7th. We were so hard pressed by the ice driving towards us, that we were
+obliged in part to unload the boat, to be able to bring it into a safer
+situation in shallow water; and took our turns, three relieving three,
+to watch and guard off the larger shoals with boat-hooks, by day and
+night. We were glad to have reached a place, sheltered on all sides from
+the wind.
+
+8th. Our people went out to look for reindeer, and no prospect of our
+proceeding to sea appearing, they resolved to stay out all night.
+
+9th. Jonas returned and reported, that they had seen reindeer, but were
+not able to shoot any. Paul and Thukkekina went to-day to the western
+mountains, and staid over night.
+
+10th. Brother Kmoch went to the westward to look for birds. He saw a
+large flight of sea-fowl, but they were extremely shy, and would not
+permit him to get near them. From the hills around us, we perceived that
+the entrance into the bay was completely blocked up with ice; and
+towards the sea, nothing but one continued field of ice appeared. We
+sighed and prayed to the Lord to help us in this time of need. Jonas
+went out in his kayak, and shot an _ugsuk_, not far from our tent.
+Towards evening, we saw a fire made by our reindeer-hunters, at the
+western extremity of the bay, and they fired their pieces to give us
+notice, that they had got some game, and that we should fetch it with
+the small boat.
+
+Okkiksuk therefore went, and found them completely overcome with
+fatigue, having dragged their game, across the mountains for a
+considerable distance. The Esquimaux are indeed able to carry burdens up
+and down hill, under which most Europeans would sink, but when they kill
+a deer far inland, it is hard-earned food, by the trouble of carrying it
+home. Paul had shot two reindeer, of which we received a portion.
+Brother Kohlmeister had been on the other side of the bay, and returned
+with a large parcel of plants and flowers, the examination of which
+afforded him much amusement.
+
+The Esquimaux now boiled a large kettle full of seal's flesh, of which
+we were invited to partake. This we did, and thought it a very palatable
+mess, particularly as we had tasted no fresh meat since we had left the
+North Ikkerasak. The prejudice of the Europeans against seal's flesh,
+consists mostly in imagination. The dirty kettle in which the Esquimaux
+boil it, is indeed not calculated to excite an appetite, but the meat,
+when eaten fresh, tastes much like beef; when cold, it acquires an oily
+taste; nor durst a person, not accustomed to it from his childhood, make
+a practice of eating it, as it is of a very heating nature, and would
+soon bring on serious disorders. It generally prevents sleep, if eaten
+at supper.
+
+12th. The wind became West, and cleared the bay of the ice. Brother
+Kmoch and Jonathan went to the opposite shore and found winter-houses,
+one of which had been inhabited last winter; two others were in ruins.
+They climbed the highest eminence towards Nachvak, but saw nothing but
+drift-ice, covering the sea, with but few spots of open water, to the
+north.
+
+13th. It blew hard from the West. David and Okkiksuk crossed the bay to
+explore the state of the ice from the hills. In the evening they
+returned with intelligence, that the sea was cleared of ice to the
+northward. David had caught a netsek, (a small species of seal), and we
+had taken a good draught of trout in the net before our tent.
+
+14th. Jonathan roused us at four in the morning, the wind being in our
+favour, and we immediately made preparations to depart. After breakfast,
+as we were praying the Litany, a sudden storm arose. We were assembled
+in Jonathan's tent, and the stones and pegs, with which it had been
+fastened down to the ground, being already removed, the tent-skins were
+soon blown about our heads by the violence of the wind, and we were now
+obliged patiently to wait till the storm abated. In the midst of our
+deliberations, accompanied with expressions of our disappointment,
+Thukkekina gravely observed, that we might very likely get away this
+summer, and need not be dismayed. Towards evening, it fell calm, and the
+musquitoes teazed us unmercifully. We supped on fresh salmon, filled our
+tents with smoke, to keep off our winged tormentors, shut ourselves in,
+and forgot our grievances and Thukkekina's consolations in sound sleep.
+
+15th. In the morning at three o'clock, we took a final leave of
+Nullatartok bay, and got under way with a favourable, though rather
+boisterous wind at S.W. having been detained here for twelve days by the
+ice. After about an hour's sail, we were near the entrance of the inlet,
+when a sudden gust from the mountains carried away our after-top-mast,
+with sail and tackle. It fell with great noise on the deck, and into the
+sea. By God's mercy no one was hurt, and we were more particularly
+thankful, that of the five children on board, none were just then on
+deck.
+
+It once happened, that the main-yard fell down, and but narrowly missed
+striking two children, who with a third were sitting and playing
+together. They must inevitably have lost their lives, had it fallen upon
+them. We praised God for their preservation during the whole voyage. By
+the above-mentioned disaster, we were obliged to run into a small cove,
+where we repaired the mast with all speed, and proceeded with a gentle
+wind towards Nachvak. A calm ensued, and as there is no anchorage
+between Nullatartok and Nachvak, we rowed all night, and felt the
+advantage of the great length of days, at this season of the year.
+
+16th. The view we had of the magnificent mountains of Nachvak,
+especially about sun-rise, afforded us and our Esquimaux great
+gratification. Their south-east extremity much resembles Saddle island
+near Okkak, being high, steep, and of singular shape. These mountains in
+general are not unlike those of Kaumayok for picturesque outline. In one
+place, tremendous precipices form a vast amphitheatre, surmounted by a
+ledge of green sod, which seemed to be the resort of an immense number
+of sea-gulls and other fowls, never interrupted by the intrusion of man.
+They flew with loud screams backwards and forwards over our heads, as if
+to warn off such unwelcome visitors. In another place, a narrow chasm
+opens into the mountain, widening into a lagoon, the surrounding rocks
+resembling the ruins of a large Gothic building, with the green ocean
+for its pavement, and the sky for its dome. The weather being fine, and
+the sun cheering us with his bright rays, after a cold and sleepless
+night, we seemed to acquire new vigour, by the contemplation of the
+grand features of nature around us. We now perceived some Esquimaux with
+a woman's boat, in a small bay, preparing to steer for Nachvak. They
+fired their pieces, and called to us to join them, as they had
+discovered a stranded whale. Going on shore to survey the remains of
+this huge animal, we found it by no means a pleasant sight. It lay upon
+the rocks, occupying a space about thirty feet in diameter, but was much
+shattered, and in a decaying state. Our people, however, cut off a
+quantity of blubber from its lips. The greater part of the blubber of
+this fish was lost, as the Esquimaux had no means of conveying it to
+Okkak.
+
+The Esquimaux stationed here showed great willingness to assist us; and
+as our party was much fatigued with rowing all night, they towed us into
+Nachvak, where we arrived about 2 P.M. Old Kayaluk and a young man,
+Parnguna, and his wife, were here. The latter called on Brother
+Kohlmeister, and thanked him for having saved her life. He had forgotten
+that he had once given her medicine at Okkak in a dangerous illness, but
+her gratitude was still unbounded.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+  _Reception at Nachvak. Description of the bay. The Esquimaux
+  manner of spearing salmon and trout. Christian deportment of
+  the Okkak and Hopedale Esquimaux. Jonas's address to the
+  Heathen. Love of music general among these Indians. Departure
+  from Nachvak. Danger in doubling the North Cape. Arrival at
+  Sangmiyok bay._
+
+
+July 16th.--After two or three hours sleep in our cabin, we went on
+shore. The Esquimaux, who had here a temporary station, about fifty in
+number, received us with every mark of attention. Loud shouts of joy
+resounded from all quarters, and muskets were fired in every direction.
+They could scarcely wait with patience for our landing, and when we
+pitched our tent, were all eager to assist; thus we were soon at home
+among them. Seven tents were standing on the strand, and we found the
+people here differing much in their manners from the people at Saeglek.
+Their behaviour was modest and rather bashful, nor were we assailed by
+beggars and importunate intruders, as at the latter place, where beggary
+seemed quite the fashion, and proved very troublesome to us. But we had
+no instance of stealing. Thieves are considered by the Esquimaux in
+general with abhorrence, and with a thief no one is willing to trade. We
+have discovered, however, that that propensity is not altogether wanting
+in the northern Esquimaux, who, now and then, if they think that they
+can do it without detection, will make a little free with their
+neighbour's property.
+
+The Esquimaux not only gave us a most hearty welcome, but attended our
+morning and evening prayers with great silence and apparent devotion.
+Indeed, to our great surprise, they behaved altogether with uncommon
+decorum and regularity during our stay.
+
+17th. Being detained with drift-ice at the mouth of the bay, we pitched
+our tent on shore. We examined the bay more minutely. It extends to the
+West to a considerable depth, and is not protected by any islands,
+except a few rocks, at some distance in the sea. The surrounding
+mountains are very high, steep, and barren, and verdure is found only in
+the vallies. Here the _arnica montana_, which the Missionaries have
+found of great use among the Esquimaux, grows in great abundance.
+Salmon-trout are caught in every creek and inlet.
+
+Like the salmon, they remain in the rivers and fresh-water lakes during
+the winter, and return to the sea in spring. The Esquimaux about Okkak
+and Saeglek, catch them in winter under the ice by spearing. For this
+purpose, they make two holes in the ice, about eight inches in diameter,
+and six feet asunder, in a direction from north to south. The northern
+hole they screen from the sun, by a bank of snow about four feet in
+height, raised in a semicircle round its southern edge, and form another
+similar bank on the north-side of the southern hole, sloped in such a
+manner as to reflect the rays of the sun into it. The Esquimaux then
+lies down, with his face close to the northern aperture, beneath which
+the water is strongly illuminated by the sunbeams entering at the
+southern. In his left hand he holds a red string, with which he plays in
+the water, to allure the fish, and in his right a spear, ready to strike
+them as they approach. In this manner they soon take as many as they
+want.
+
+The salmon-trout on this coast are from twelve to eighteen inches long,
+and in August and September so fat, that the Esquimaux collect from them
+a sufficient quantity of oil for their lamps. The immense abundance of
+these fish on all parts of the coast, would almost at any time save the
+Esquimaux from starving with hunger; but as seals furnish them both with
+food and clothing, it is of most consequence to them to attend to this
+branch of supply. At Hopedale and Nain, however, salmon-trout are caught
+only in the summer.
+
+We were much pleased with the behaviour of our own Esquimaux, during
+their stay at Nachvak. In every respect they conducted themselves, in
+word and deed, as true Christian people. Their conversation with their
+heathen countrymen, was free and unreserved, and "to the use of
+edifying." Jonathan and Jonas in particular, gave us great satisfaction.
+
+The people having assembled in Jonathan's tent, those who had no room in
+it, standing without and listening with great order and stillness,
+Brother Kohlmeister addressed them, explaining the aim of our voyage;
+that we were going, out of love to their nation, to the northern
+Esquimaux, and to those of Ungava bay, to make known to them the love of
+God our Saviour; and, by the gospel, to point out to them the way to
+obtain life everlasting. We knew that they were heathen, who, being
+ignorant of the way to God, were in bondage to the devil, and would be
+lost for ever, unless God had mercy upon them and sent them his word, to
+lead them to Jesus Christ their only Saviour, who shed His blood, and
+died on the cross to redeem their souls.
+
+They received the discourses and exhortations of the Missionary with
+reverential attention, but those of their own countrymen, with still
+greater eagerness, and we hope not without benefit. Jonas once addressed
+them thus; "We were but lately as ignorant as you are now: we were long
+unable to understand the comfortable words of the gospel: we had neither
+ears to hear, nor hearts to receive them, till Jesus, by his power,
+opened our hearts and ears. Now we know what Jesus has done for us, and
+how great the happiness of those souls is, who come unto Him, love Him
+as their Saviour, and know, that they shall not be lost, when this life
+is past. Without this we live in constant fear of death. You will enjoy
+the same happiness, if you turn to and believe in Jesus. We are not
+surprised that you do not yet understand us. We were once like you, but
+now thank Jesus our Redeemer, with tears of joy, that He has revealed
+Himself unto us," Thus, with cheerful countenances and great energy, did
+these Christian Esquimaux praise and glorify the name of Christ our
+Saviour, and declare, what he had done for their souls, exhorting the
+heathen likewise to believe.
+
+The above address seemed to make a deep impression on the minds of all
+present. One of their leaders, or captains, exclaimed with great
+eagerness, in presence of them all: "I am determined to be converted to
+Jesus." His name is _Onalik_. He afterwards called upon Brother
+Kohlmeister, and inquired, whether it was the same, to which of the
+three settlements he removed, as it was his firm determination to become
+a true believer. Brother Kohlmeister answered: "That it was indifferent
+where he lived, if he were only converted and became a child of God, and
+an heir of life eternal." Another, named _Tullugaksoak_, made the same
+declaration, and added: "That he would no longer live among the
+heathen."
+
+Though the very fickle disposition of the heathen Esquimaux, might cause
+some doubts to arise in our minds, as to their putting these good
+resolutions into practice, yet we hope, that the seed of the word of
+God, sown in this place, may not have altogether fallen upon barren
+ground.
+
+In the evening, our people met in Jonathan's tent, and sang hymns.
+Almost all the inhabitants were present. They afterwards spent a long
+time in pleasant and edifying conversation. It may here be observed,
+that the Esquimaux delight in singing and music. As to national songs,
+they have nothing deserving of that name; and the various collectors of
+these precious morsels in our day, would find their labour lost in
+endeavouring to harmonize the incantations of their sorcerers and
+witches, which more resemble the howlings of wolves and growlings of
+bears, than any thing human. But though the hymn and psalm-tunes of the
+Brethren's Church are mostly of antient construction, and, though rich
+in harmony, have no airy melodies to make them easily understood by
+unmusical ears, yet the Esquimaux soon learn to sing them correctly; and
+the voices of the women are remarkably sweet and well-tuned. Brother
+Kohlmeister having given one of the children a toy-flute, Paul took it,
+and immediately picked out the proper stops in playing several
+psalm-tunes upon it, as well as the imperfect state of the instrument
+would admit. Brother Kmoch having taken a violin with him, the same
+Esquimaux likewise took it up, and it was not long before he found out
+the manner of producing the different notes.
+
+18th. At 8 A.M. Brother Kohlmeister having delivered a
+farewell-discourse to the Esquimaux, (during which they were much
+affected), we took leave of these goodnatured people, and set sail with
+a fair and strong West-wind, but met with much drift-ice at the entrance
+of the bay. It made less way than our boat, and the wind becoming more
+violent, we found ourselves in an unpleasant situation. After tacking
+all day, and a great part of the night, the ice preventing our
+proceeding, and the wind, our returning to our former station, we were
+obliged to make for the Eastern point of the bay, where we at length
+succeeded in gaining a small cove, and cast anchor.
+
+Our situation was singular; the rocks rose in a semicircle around us,
+towering perpendicularly to an amazing height, like an immense wall.
+
+After a few hours stay, two Nachvak Esquimaux joined us, and prevailed
+on Jonathan to return to the tents, but we had scarcely reached the
+centre of the bay, before the violence of the wind drove us out to sea,
+and we were compelled to push for the northern promontory, from which
+all the ice had now retreated. Under the mountains we found shelter from
+the wind, which had by this time risen to a storm. It was late, and as
+it appeared dangerous to remain here, we rowed towards the point, but
+there beheld, with terror, the raging of the sea and dashing of the
+waves against the rocks, the spray flying like clouds into the air, and
+returned into smooth water, where, however, we were long in finding a
+place to anchor in. The night was spent quietly under shelter of the
+high rocks. They form the base of mountains higher than the _Kiglapeyd_,
+rise perpendicularly, in some places impending, with fragments,
+apparently loose, hanging over their edge, and forming all kinds of
+grotesque figures.
+
+19th. At sun-rise we still saw and heard the storm which threatened us
+with destruction, if we ventured to double the cape.
+
+At nine the wind abated, and we set sail, got safe round the point, and
+glided, with a gentle wind, into a broad, shallow bay, called Sangmiyok,
+full both of hidden and visible rocks, in which we cast anchor about
+five P.M. While Brother Kmoch superintended the concerns of the kitchen,
+Brother Kohlmeister and Jonathan went on shore, and to the highest
+mountain on the promontory. From the top of this mountain they could
+plainly discern the four principal headlands between Cape Mugford and
+Cape Chudleigh. The former situated in latitude 58° N. the latter in
+61°. Between these are four promontories, in a line from S.E. to N.W.
+The first is _Uivak_, at the entrance into Saeglek Bay, outside of which
+a small island lies, in form of a pyramid or sugar-loaf. Next follow the
+two forming Nachvak Bay, another _Uivak_ to the south of _Nennoktok_,
+upon which we stood. The fourth is _Kakkeviak_, not far from Killinek,
+or Cape Chudleigh, in form of a tent, called in the charts _Blackhead_.
+_Nennoktok_ is called _False Blackhead_.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+  _Pass Cape Nennoktok. Visit the Esquimaux families at
+  Kummaktorvik and Amitok. Description of an Esquimaux travelling
+  bed. Mountains seen at Ungava. Netsek seal described. Greenland
+  houses. Danger of being shipwrecked near Kakkeviak._
+
+
+July 20th.--We proceeded with little or no wind, and taking to our oars,
+doubled the great Cape of Nennoktok. Here a strong swell from the sea
+met us, and tossed our boat violently about, and, having no wind, it
+drove us nearer to the shore than was perfectly safe. We remained about
+an hour in this unpleasant situation, when a breeze sprung up, which
+carried us out to the open sea among islands. It now began to rain very
+hard, and the wind rose. While Brother Kmoch was assisting the people on
+deck, Brother Kohlmeister had enough to do below, to keep peace among
+the furniture of our cabin, and sometimes found himself defeated in his
+attempts, pots and pans, and boxes, and every thing that was not a
+fixture, tumbling upon him. Several of our people were in the skin-boat,
+and the fury of the wind and sea would not permit them to come to our
+assistance. The weather also became so thick and foggy between the
+islands, that we were unable to see to any distance. Jonathan was
+therefore glad to have been yesterday on shore, when from the mountain
+he discovered the situation of the promontory, the coast, and the
+islands before us, and now contrived to steer in the proper direction.
+We soon found ourselves in smoother water, and among islands, where a
+vast number of seals and birds made their appearance. At six in the
+evening we reached _Kummaktorvik_, and came to an anchor.
+
+Having landed, Brother Kmoch shot a hare, close to the beach. These
+creatures are white in winter, and grey in summer, and in winter so
+numerous, that though, when roasted, they are excellent food, we were
+almost tired of them last year at Okkak.
+
+The rain continuing during the whole of the night and forenoon of the
+21st, we found it necessary by sufficient rest to strengthen ourselves
+for future watchfulness.
+
+An Esquimaux travelling bed consists of a large bag of reindeer-skin,
+with the hair turned inward, covered with seal-skin, the hair turned
+outward. It is furnished with a broad flap to cover the mouth, and a
+strap to fasten down the flap. This bag comprehends the whole apparatus
+and furniture of an Esquimaux bed-room. Having undressed, the traveller
+creeps into it, and a kind neighbour having shut him up close by
+fastening the strap, he leaves him to sleep on till morning, when he
+helps him out again. In summer the flap is dispensed with. The
+invention, however, is of European origin, and a luxury introduced by
+the Missionaries; for an Esquimaux lies down in his clothes, without
+further preparation.
+
+In the morning we landed, and had the usual Sunday's service with our
+people on shore; after which Brother Kohlmeister visited the Esquimaux
+in their tents, and had some religious conversation with them, to which
+they seemed to pay attention. Afterwards Kuttaktok, John, Nukkapiak, and
+Kajulik, with their wives, came to see us on board. They are the winter
+inhabitants of this bay. John was baptized in infancy at Okkak, but
+afterwards left the settlement, and not only associates with the heathen
+Esquimaux, but has even been guilty of murder. All of them, however,
+come occasionally to Okkak. They had two tents about four miles from our
+landing place.
+
+22d. The contrary wind forbidding our departure, Brother Kohlmeister,
+accompanied by Jonathan, Jonas, and Thukkekina, walked across the
+country to the N.W. bay, to return their visit. When they saw them
+coming at a distance, they fired their pieces, to direct them to the
+tents, and came joyfully to meet the Missionary and his party. Nothing
+could exceed the cordiality with which they received them. A kettle was
+immediately put on the fire to cook salmon-trout, and all were invited
+to partake, which was the more readily accepted, as the length of the
+walk had created an appetite, the keenness of which overcame all
+squeamishness. To do these good people justice, their kettle was rather
+cleaner than usual, the dogs having licked it well, and the fish were
+fresh and well dressed. To honour the Missionary, a box was placed for
+him to sit upon, and the fish were served up to each upon a flat stone
+instead of a plate. After dinner, Brother Kohlmeister, in acknowledgment
+for their civility, gave to each of the women two needles, and a small
+portion of tobacco to each man, with which they were highly delighted.
+
+All of them being seated, a very lively and unreserved conversation took
+place concerning the only way of salvation, through Jesus Christ, and
+the necessity of conversion. With John and his mother Mary, Brother
+Kohlmeister spoke very seriously, and represented to them the danger of
+their state, as apostates from the faith; but they seem blinded by
+Satan, and determined to persist in their heathenish life. The Esquimaux
+now offered to convey the party across the bay in their skin-boat, which
+was accepted. Almost all of them accompanied the boat, and met with a
+very friendly reception from our boat's company. In the evening, after
+some hymns had been sung by our people, Jonas addressed them and the
+heathen Esquimaux in a short, nervous discourse, on the blessedness of
+being reconciled unto God.
+
+Kummaktorvik bay runs N.E. and S.W. and is defended by some islands from
+the sea. It is about four or five miles long, and surrounded by high
+mountains, with some pleasant plains at their foot, covered with
+verdure. It's distance from Nachvak is about twelve miles. This chain of
+mountains, as will be hereafter mentioned, may be seen from
+Kangertlualuksoak, in Ungava Bay, which is a collateral proof, that the
+neck of land, terminated to the N. by Cape Chudleigh, is of no great
+width. Both the Nain and Okkak Esquimaux frequently penetrate far enough
+inland to find the rivers taking a westerly direction, consequently
+towards the Ungava country. They even now and then have reached the
+woods skirting the estuaries of George and South rivers.
+
+23d. We set sail at sun-rise, but the wind being too high to suffer us
+to proceed with safety, we again anchored in a commodious harbour in
+_Amitok_ island. Our people were here busily employed in repairing the
+damaged rigging and sails. Towards evening Jonas caught a seal, to the
+great gratification of our party. It was dressed immediately, and we
+joined them in their repast with a good appetite.
+
+The _Netsek_ is the only species of seal which remains during the winter
+under the ice. They form in it large caverns, in which they bring forth
+their young, two at a time, in March. More than one cavern belongs to
+one seal, that he may, if disturbed in the first, take shelter in the
+second. No other kind of seal is caught in winter by the Esquimaux.
+
+24th. Brother Kmoch rose at two, and went on shore to examine the island
+more minutely. The morning was beautiful, and the sun rose with great
+splendour. _Amitok_ lies N.W. from Kummaktorvik, is of an oblong shape,
+and stretches out pretty far towards the sea. The hills are of moderate
+height, the land is in many places flat, but in general destitute of
+grass. On the other side are some ruins of Greenland houses.
+
+The Esquimaux have a tradition, that the Greenlanders came originally
+from Canada, and settled on the outermost islands of this coast, but
+never penetrated into the country, before they were driven eastward to
+Greenland. This report gains some credit, from the state in which the
+abovementioned ruins are found. They consist in remains of walls and
+graves, with a low stone enclosure round the tomb, covered with a slab
+of the same material. They have been discovered on islands near Nain,
+and though sparingly, all along the whole eastern coast, but we saw none
+in Ungava bay. The rocks on Amitok contain large masses of a crumbly,
+semi-transparent garnet, of a reddish hue. (From some specimens sent
+out, it rather appears to be a rose red quartz, or beryllite).
+
+As it appeared as if we should be detained here, Brother Kmoch had made
+a fire, and was leisurely cooking a savoury mess of birds for breakfast,
+when Jonathan returned from the hills, with intelligence that the wind
+was abating in violence, and he therefore would proceed. The tent was
+struck, and all hurried on board: yet we had long to combat both an
+unfavourable wind and a strong current, which compelled us to double the
+East point of the island, and seek shelter among some small islands,
+steering for _Niakungu_ point. From hence we got the first sight of
+_Tikkerarsuk_, (the Esquimaux name for a low point stretching from the
+continent into the sea), of the island _Aulatzevik_, and the high
+promontory of _Kakkeviak_. The whole country to the west of _Niakungu_
+is called _Serliarutsit_. It fell calm as we doubled the point, and we
+took to our oars, and came to an anchor in an open bay, south of
+Tikkerarsuk.
+
+25th. At 6 P.M. we got under weigh with a fine S.E. wind, and made for
+the island of _Aulatzevik_, which is about the same size as an island of
+the same name, near Kiglapeyd. The passage between the island and the
+main is too shallow for an European boat like ours. The wind rising we
+sailed towards Kakkeviak at a great rate. To the right lay a chain of
+small islands called by the Esquimaux Pikkiulits, (the habitation of
+young eider-ducks). Having nearly doubled _Kakkeviak_ cape, we perceived
+two tents on shore, which occasioned loud rejoicings on board. They
+belonged to _Kumiganna_ of _Saeglek_, with his party, who being bound to
+Killinek, had promised to accompany us thither. The wind was very high,
+and the Cape encircled with numerous visible and invisible rocks, but
+there was a clear passage to the shore, keeping outside of the breakers.
+But whether from the violence of the wind, or from the eagerness with
+which our trusty captain wished soon to join his countrymen, he steered
+right through the midst of them, when suddenly the boat struck with
+great violence upon a sunken rock. The shock was so great, that all on
+board were thrown down, and every thing tumbled about. Poor Agnes,
+Jonas's wife, got a severe wound in her head. We immediately took in all
+our sails, and after hard labour, succeeded in pushing the boat off the
+rock. On examination we found that all was safe, and thanked God, with
+hearts filled with humble acknowledgments of His mercy, for preserving
+us from danger and death. The boat had struck in such a manner, that the
+keel, which was new and strong, being constructed of one solid piece of
+timber, sustained the whole shock. Had she taken the rock with her
+bottom, she would most likely have bilged, or upset, and it is a great
+question, whether our lives, but particularly the lives of the little
+children, could have been saved, the sea running very high. The
+skin-boat was thrown right over the rocks on shore, by the violence of
+the surf.
+
+Kumiganna soon came off in his kayak, and advised us to steer for the
+land right before us, where he thought we should find _Uttakiyok_; nor
+was there any safe anchorage in this place. We therefore took a young
+Esquimaux on board as pilot, and steered between the main land and the
+islands, for _Oppernavik_, twenty English miles off. Having left the
+skin-boat to follow us, we cut swiftly through the water, and soon
+reached the place of our destination.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+  _Arrival at Oppernavik. Account of Uttakiyok. His perseverance
+  in waiting for the arrival of the Missionaries. Islands and
+  bays between Kakkeviak and Killinek. Danger in the ice at
+  Ammitok. Want of fuel supplied by robbing old graves._
+
+
+When we arrived at Oppernavik, we found _Uttakiyok_, with his two wives
+and youngest brother, waiting to receive us. He and his family are from
+the Ungava bay, and had been upon the watch in this place during the
+whole spring. They welcomed us with shouts of joy, and firing of their
+pieces, and we had indeed the greatest reason to thank God, that he had
+sent us this man, to conduct us on our way to an unknown country, and
+through unfrequented seas.
+
+For this service Uttakiyok was eminently qualified, and without such a
+steady, faithful guide, we should have been wandering in the most
+painful and dangerous uncertainty in the desert regions to the West of
+Cape Chudleigh, where, on a coast of 100 miles in length, we did not
+meet with a single inhabitant. He was so anxiously intent upon meeting
+us, that he had erected signals on all the heights surrounding his tent,
+to prevent our missing him. Among his countrymen he is much respected,
+on account of his superior sense, and skill in all Esquimaux arts, and
+possesses great influence among them.
+
+_Uttakiyok_ was one of the two Esquimaux, from whom, in the year 1800,
+we received the first distinct information respecting the Ungava country
+and its inhabitants, by which the desire, excited both at home and here
+in Labrador, to visit the northern Esquimaux, was greatly strengthened,
+and led to a resolution, if possible, to take early steps to accomplish
+this object, (See page 3).
+
+Two years ago, he had been on a trading voyage to Okkak, from Killinek,
+where he then dwelt, and intended to return, in the summer following, to
+Ungava, his native country, but an illness, which befel his son,
+detained him. This intelligence was received at Okkak during last
+winter, when we sent him word, that as we purposed paying his countrymen
+a visit, we wished him to wait for us, that he might conduct us through
+the straits of Killinek. But having heard nothing further concerning
+him, we remained in uncertainty respecting his intentions. We were the
+more thankful to God, who had disposed the heart of this man cheerfully
+to accept of the commission, and wait to be our guide, an office which
+he performed with a degree of faithfulness and disinterested kindness,
+which claims our admiration and gratitude.
+
+While we were here waiting for a favourable opportunity to pass the
+straits, which were yet filled with ice, he behaved in the kindest
+manner to us and our Esquimaux. Though a heathen, he regularly attended
+our morning and evening worship, and declared to Jonathan, that he also
+intended to be converted to Jesus, and if we would form a settlement in
+his country, would come and live with us, and was sure, that many of his
+countrymen would do the same.
+
+Around his tent, a considerable extent of rock was covered with seal's
+flesh, and in the hollows were pools of oil. Ten bags of blubber were
+standing ready for sale; and with a view to shew him our good-will,
+Brother Kohlmeister bartered with him for three of them, which were hid
+under the stones, to take them with us, if practicable, on our return.
+
+26th. We put up our three tents; Uttakiyok's people had three more. Wind
+N.W. We were now near the entrance into the Ikkerasak, (or straits),
+which separate the island of Killinek and two or three other large
+islands from the continent. They stretch to the N. to the distance of
+about 12 or 15 English miles, the outer one forming Cape Chudleigh. To
+the N.W. of the cape lie some other small islands, called by the
+Esquimaux _Tutsaets_, and N.N.E. of these, the great island
+_Resolution_, called _Igloarsuk_, on which, as we were informed, many
+Esquimaux reside. The Tutsaets were discernible from this place, but not
+the latter, which however, as the Esquimaux say, may be seen from the
+Tutsaets. We guessed at its situation, from the clouds hanging over it
+in the North quarter. The weather was, as might be expected on the
+northern coast of America, foggy, rainy, and cold, and our small stove,
+which we brought into the tent, was of great use to us during our stay
+in this place.
+
+27th. Rain and wind violent, and prevented our proceeding. We caught
+some _Pitsiolaks_, (awks), and a brace of young puffins, which, with the
+addition of some salt meat, made excellent broth.
+
+28th. The weather was fair, but the wind still blowing hard at N.W.
+Brother Kmoch went to Uttakiyok's tent, and sitting down with him at the
+point of Oppernavik, and looking down the coast as far as Kakkeviak, got
+him to name all the bays, points, and islands, from Kakkeviak to
+Oppernavik, of which he made minutes. The distance between the two
+points or headlands may be guessed at, by the time of sailing with a
+strong leading wind, namely three hours and a half. Coming up from
+Kakkeviak, to the E. lie three islands, _Kikkertorsoak_, _Imilialuk_,
+rather less in view, and _Nessetservik_. Having passed these, there
+follows a chain of small, naked islands, not very high, stretching
+towards Killinek. To the W. near Kakkeviak lies _Uglek_; then a bay,
+_Nulluk_, and farther to the left another bay, _Tellek_, (right arm).
+The country along these bays is called _Attanarsuk_. Now follow the bay
+_Ikkorliarsuk_, the lower point of _Tikkerarsuk_, the bay _Annivagtok_,
+and _Kakkeviak_, a high promontory, (not to be confounded with the other
+Kakkeviak, where we struck on the rock. This promontory is only about
+four miles from Oppernavik to the S.E.). Then follow two small bays,
+_Anniovariktok_ and _Sangmiyok_, then the promontory _Ukkuliakartok_,
+(meaning a headland between two bays), and the bay _Tunnusuksoak_. Next,
+the last point on the continent, forming the south entrance to the
+Ikkerasak. The abovementioned chain of barren islands is called by the
+Esquimaux _Naviarutsit_, and besides them some low rocks, _Nuvurutsit_.
+The island of Killinek is about nine miles long, and five broad, high,
+and forming the north side of the straits. Another Ikkerasak, (or
+strait), divides it from an island called Kikkertorsoak, (a common name
+for an island), of considerable height, but not so long as _Killinek_:
+one, or perhaps more islands follow, narrowing E. and W. and forming
+Cape Chudleigh.
+
+To-day there was much ice both in the strait and at sea. We went to the
+nearest island, where Brother Kohlmeister took an observation, and found
+our situation to be 60° 16'.
+
+30th. It blew a hard gale from the N.E., rained hard, and as the ice now
+began to enter our harbour, we were busily engaged in keeping it off the
+boat.
+
+31st. Imagining to-day that the straits would be free from ice, we
+resolved to attempt to pass them, and set sail. But it soon became
+evident, that there was still plenty of ice in the neighbourhood, and
+the wind setting to the N.E. with fogs, we were obliged to return.
+Suspecting also that the easterly wind would again drive the ice into
+our former harbour at Oppernavik, we ran into a short pass, between that
+and a small island called Ammitok, where we anchored under shelter of
+the island. The sequel proved, that we had for once acted with sound
+judgment and foresight, for our former anchoring-ground was soon filled
+with ice; and during the night large flakes entered even into our
+present place of refuge.
+
+_August_ 1st. At day break we found ourselves completely surrounded by
+floating ice, a strong N.W. wind driving the large shoals from the W.
+side of the little pass in which we lay, with much force towards us,
+insomuch that our boat was in the greatest danger of being crushed to
+pieces by them. We were all day long hard at work with poles,
+boat-hooks, and hatchets, to ward off the larger shoals, but when the
+tide fell, they hung upon our cables and anchors, of which we had three
+out, closing in also on all sides of the boat, so that we were every
+moment in fearful expectation of her being carried away, and our anchors
+lost, which would have reduced us to the most distressing situation.
+Indeed we all cried to the Lord to help us in this dangerous situation,
+and not to suffer us to perish here, but by His almighty aid, to save us
+and our boat. With great and unremitting exertions we had laboured all
+day, from the morning early, till seven in the evening, when the Lord
+heard our prayers, and sent relief. We now succeeded in working the boat
+out of the ice, the rising of the tide having opened a passage through
+it, just as we were almost exhausted with fatigue. It also became quite
+calm, and we felt as if we had passed from death to life.
+
+Having anchored again on the opposite side of the little pass or strait,
+we gave thanks to God, for the deliverance we had experienced through
+His mercy, in which our Esquimaux, young and old, most fervently joined.
+
+During our stay at Oppernavik, our whole stock of fire-wood was
+expended, and we were obliged to purchase of our companions, what they
+had to spare. We likewise robbed some old Esquimaux graves of the wooden
+utensils, which it is the superstitious practice of the heathen to lay
+beside the corpses of their owners, with old tent-poles, &c. and thus
+obtained fuel sufficient for our cookery.
+
+Wood will not decay by mere exposure to the air in Labrador, but wastes
+away gradually; and after forty or more years, the wood found at the
+graves is still fit for use.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+  _Departure from Oppernavik. Pass the Ikkerasak of Killinek.
+  Whirlpools. The coast takes a southerly direction. Meeting with
+  Esquimaux from the Ungava country, who had never seen an
+  European. Anchor at Omanek. High tides. Drift-wood. Double Cape
+  Uibvaksoak. Distant view of Akpatok._
+
+
+August 2d.--Having made all needful preparations for the voyage, a
+gentle but favourable wind, and occasional rowing, brought us, about
+nine in the morning, to the entrance of the much dreaded Ikkerasak. The
+weather was pleasant and warm, not a flake of ice was to be seen, and
+all our fear and anxiety had subsided. Our minds were attuned to praise
+and thanksgiving for the providential preservation we had experienced
+yesterday. We performed our morning devotions on deck, and all joined in
+a joyful hallelujah to God our Saviour, which was sweetly repeated by
+echoes among the mountains and precipices on either side. The
+scripture-text appointed in the Church of the United Brethren for this
+day being read, it seemed as if addressed particularly to us, separated
+as we felt ourselves, in these lonely regions, from the rest of the
+inhabitants of the earth: "_See now that I, even I, am He, and there is
+no God with me: I kill, and I make alive; I wound, and I heal._" Deut.
+32, 39. We rejoiced, that we were in the hands of a gracious and
+merciful God and Father, who would not forsake us, but deal with us
+according to his wonted mercy and favour.
+
+The Ikkerasak, (or strait), is about ten miles in length; the land on
+each side high and rocky, and in some places precipitous, but there
+appeared no rocks in the strait itself. The water is deep and clear. Its
+mouth is wide, and soon after entering, a bay opens to the left, which
+by an inlet only just wide enough to admit a boat, communicates with a
+lagoon of considerable magnitude, in which lies an island on its western
+bank. Beyond this bay, the passage narrows and consequently the stream,
+always setting from N. to S. grows more rapid. Here the mountains on
+both sides rise to a great height. Having proceeded for two miles in a
+narrow channel, the strait opens again, but afterwards contracts to
+about 1000 yards across; immediately beyond which, the left coast turns
+to the south. As the tide ebbs regularly with the current from N. to S.
+along the whole coast of Labrador, the current through the strait is
+most violent during its fall, and less, when resisted by its influx on
+rising.
+
+We were taught to expect much danger in passing certain eddies or
+whirlpools in the narrow parts of the straits, and were therefore
+continually upon the look-out for them. When we passed the first narrow
+channel, at 12 P.M. it being low water, no whirlpool was perceptible.
+Having sailed on for little more than half an hour, with wind and tide
+in our favour, we reached the second. Here, indeed, we discovered a
+whirlpool, but of no great magnitude at this state of the tide. Near the
+north-shore the water was, indeed, whirled round in the manner of a
+boiling cauldron of ten or twelve feet diameter, with considerable noise
+and much foam; but we passed without the smallest inconvenience, within
+thirty or forty feet of the outer circle. Our skin-boat, however, which
+we had in tow, with a man in it, was seized by the vortex, and received
+a rapid twist; but as the towing-rope did not break, she was immediately
+rescued from danger by the swiftness of our course, and the affair
+afforded us more diversion than anxiety. The motion of the water in
+these eddies is so great, that they never freeze in the severest winter.
+The ice being drawn towards them with great force, the largest shoals
+are carried under water, and thrown up again, broken into numerous
+fragments. The Ikkerasak is at that season utterly impassable for boats.
+The Killinek people inhabit an island to the right, after leaving the
+strait.
+
+When we quitted the Ikkerasak, and entered the ocean on the western side
+of Cape Chudleigh, it seemed as if we were transported to a new world.
+Hitherto the coast to our left had always taken a northerly direction.
+It now turned to the S.S.W. and is low, with gently sloping hills, the
+sea being full of small islands, abounding in sea-fowl.
+
+To the N. and N.W. we saw the open sea in Hudson's Straits, which,
+compared to the turbulent Atlantic, seemed calm and peaceful. We sailed
+briskly amidst the islands, and overtook the inhabitants of Saeglek,
+whom we had seen at Kakkeviak, where they had got the start of us. The
+wind being favourable, we did not hail them, but kept on our course. We
+now saw with pleasure the Ungava country to the South before us, but had
+first to pass the low point of _Uivarsuk_, the bay of _Arvavik_, in
+which the people from Saeglek had their summer stations, and the
+mountain _Omanek_, of moderate height, and surrounded by many small
+islets, called by the Esquimaux _Erngavinget_, (bowels). We now
+discovered three skin-boats full of people standing towards us from the
+shore. They were inhabitants of Ungava, and welcomed our approach with
+loud shouts of joy and firing their pieces, which was answered by our
+party. They followed us to Omanek, a round island rising like a loaf
+among the rest, where they pitched their tents on shore.
+
+Some of them had formerly dwelt in different places north of Okkak, and
+were known to the Missionaries in former times, the rest were perfect
+strangers. They declared their intention of coming over to the North of
+Okkak, to remain some time in that country, for the sake of trade. It
+has been mentioned, that some of the Ungava people have come to Okkak,
+and carry on a trade between their countrymen and that place. They are a
+kind of middle men, bring fox and bear-skins, and exchange them for
+European goods. These they carry back, and sell at a very advanced price
+in the Ungava country. They spend two years on such a trading voyage.
+
+Brother Kohlmeister visited the people in their tents. They were about
+fifty in number, men, women, and children. He informed them, that
+nothing could induce the Missionaries to come into this country, but
+love to the poor heathen, and an ardent desire to make them acquainted
+with their Creator and Redeemer, that through Him they might attain to
+happiness in time and eternity. Some seemed to listen with great
+attention, but the greater part understood nothing of what was said.
+This, of course, did not surprise us, as most of them were quite
+ignorant heathen, who had never before seen an European. They, however,
+raised a shout of joy, when we informed them, that we would come and
+visit them in their own country. Many were not satisfied with viewing
+us on every side with marks of great astonishment, but came close up to
+us, and pawed us all over. At taking leave we presented them with a few
+trifles, which excited among them the greatest pleasure and
+thankfulness.
+
+We recommend these heathen to the mercy of God, and pray, that the day
+may soon dawn, when the light of the saving gospel of Jesus may shine
+into their hearts.
+
+3d. Several of them came on board, once more to see us, and, in their
+way, to express their regard and gratitude. They also got some useful
+articles from our people, in exchange for their goods. We now set sail,
+passed a point called _Oglarvik_, and the bay _Takpangayok_, and arrived
+at _Tuktusiovik_, (a place where reindeer are seen), where we cast
+anchor for the night. Already at Omanek we had discovered a great
+difference between the rise and fall of the tides there and about
+Killinek. In the latter place it rose to four fathoms, but here still
+higher. The country looked pleasant, with many berry-bearing plants and
+bushes. There was, likewise, plenty of drift-wood all along the coast;
+not the large Greenland timber, but small trees and roots, evidently
+carried out of the great rivers of the Ungava by the ice. We had, of
+course, fire-wood enough, without robbing the graves of their
+superstitious furniture. Our Esquimaux pitched their tent on shore, and
+we supped with them on a mess of seal's flesh and eider-ducks. The
+musquitoes were extremely troublesome during our repast, after which we
+retired to sleep on board the boat.
+
+4th. Wind fair. We passed numerous low rocks; a point, by name unknown
+to Uttakiyok; the bay _Ikpigitok_, two miles broad, and the cape called
+_Uibvaksoak_, the northern boundary of the great bay or gulf of
+_Abloriak_. This cape is surrounded by many bare and sunken rocks, which
+caused us to stand out pretty far to the westward. While we were off the
+point, we descried, at a very great distance to the N.W. a large island,
+called by the Esquimaux _Akpatok_. They say, that it encloses the whole
+bay or gulf towards the sea, and consists of high land: also, that it is
+connected with the western continent at low water by an isthmus. The
+north coast of this island appears to be the line laid down in maps and
+charts as the coast of America, to the south of Hudson's Straits. But
+the district of Ungava is separated from the island by a large inland
+bay, extending southward to the 58° N.L. North of Akpatok, the Esquimaux
+speak of islands well peopled by their countrymen, who have never seen
+Europeans.
+
+Having safely doubled the point or cape of _Uibvaksoak_, we came to an
+anchor near a small island to the south, where we spent the night.
+
+5th. Calm weather, and proceeded gently. About 9 A.M. the wind turned
+against us, and we ran into a small bay, about five miles from our
+former anchoring-place. Here we found the _Andromeda tetragona_ growing
+in tolerable quantity, on the banks of a lagoon of fresh water. The face
+of the country was unpleasant, with many steep rocks. On a precipice
+behind our tent we perceived nests of birds of prey. The naked rocks had
+singular shapes, and presented to the imagination the ruins of a
+destroyed town. In the vallies we saw many small lagoons, but little
+grass, and the excrements of geese. It was about full moon, and the tide
+rising here five or six fathom, occasioned the most strange alterations
+in the prospect towards the sea, which, being smooth and clear of rocks
+at high water, exhibited, after its fall, an archipelago of rugged
+islands and black flats.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+  _Chain of black mountains. The Dragon's dwelling. Changes
+  occasioned by rise and fall of the tides, and dangers attending
+  them. Uttakiyok's superstitious customs. Singular effect of the
+  tide in the bay of Ittimnekoktok. Arrive at Kangertlualuksoak
+  bay and river. Its situation. Transactions there._
+
+
+August 6th.--We crossed the bay _Abloriak_, which is large and wide,
+with many small islands and rocks towards the sea, and high black
+mountains inland, called _Torngaets_. Uttakiyok, who was always very
+eager to make us attentive to every object and its name, shewed us here
+a wide and deep cavern, in shape like the gable end of an house,
+situated at the top of a precipice, in a black mountain, of a very
+horrid and dark appearance. This, he informed us, was the dwelling place
+of Torngak, the evil spirit. The scenery was, indeed, extremely wild and
+terrible, and the beforementioned prospect of the rocks and islands at
+low water gave to the whole country a most singularly gloomy character.
+Nor is this change, occasioned by the tide in the state of the sea,
+merely in appearance terrific, it is so in reality: for we never durst
+cast anchor in less than eight or nine fathoms water, lest at ebb-tide
+we should find ourselves aground, or even high and dry.
+
+The cavern just spoken of, connected with the chain of black mountains
+in which it is situated, we called the Dragon's dwelling, but had no
+time to examine the place, though it did not appear inaccessible.
+Whether Uttakiyok would have ventured to accompany us into it, is
+another question, for he was, with all his good sense, strongly attached
+to the superstitious notions and ceremonies of his countrymen. Thus, on
+passing dangerous places he always hung the claw of a raven to his
+breast, and carried the blown paunch of a seal upon a tent-pole fixed to
+one side of his boat. The latter is a common practice among the northern
+Esquimaux, and probably considered by them all as a very efficient
+charm.
+
+We passed _Sioralik_, and many small and flat rocky islands: the bay
+_Issorkitok_, (a grassy place), a nameless headland; and the larger bay
+_Nappartolik_, (a woody country). The wood is said to commence at the
+interior point of this bay, and to continue throughout the whole of the
+Ungava country, which, as we afterwards discovered, extends to a
+considerable distance to the southward. Then follows _Tunnuyalik_, a
+point, or perhaps an island, on which lies a huge white stone, twenty or
+thirty feet high, by which it is distinguished from other similar
+headlands. A chain of low, flat islands, runs out into the sea to a
+considerable distance, and appearing at a distance as continued land,
+they are mistaken for a cape. Farther on is the bay _Ittimnekoktok_,
+where it grew dark before we found a suitable anchorage. The wind was
+high, and some of our company went on shore in the skin-boat, in order
+to pitch their tent, and spend the night.
+
+7th. On rising, to our great surprise, we found ourselves left by the
+tide in a shallow pool of water, surrounded by rocky hills; nor could we
+at all discover the situation of our skin-boat, till after the water had
+begun to rise, and raised us above the banks of our watery dungeon,
+when, with great astonishment, not having been able to find it on the
+surface of the sea, and accidentally directing our eyes upwards, we saw
+it perched upon the top of a considerable eminence, and apparently on
+shore. We then landed, and ascending a rising ground, beheld with some
+terror, the wonderful changes occasioned by the tides. Our course was
+visible to the extent of two or three English miles, but the sea had
+left it, and we were obliged to remain in this dismal place, till about
+noon, before the water had risen sufficiently to carry us out. We now
+began to entertain fears, lest we might not always be able to find
+proper harbours, so as to avoid being left high and dry at low water;
+for having anchored in nine fathoms last night, we were left in one and
+a half this morning. Uttakiyok and Thukkekina were with us on shore. The
+eminence on which we stood was overgrown with vaccinia and other plants,
+and we saw among them marks of its being visited by hares. Near the
+summit was a spot, covered with red sand, which stained one's fingers,
+and among it were fragments of a substance resembling cast iron. We
+seemed here to stand on a peninsula connected by an isthmus with another
+island, or with the continent; but probably at high water it may be a
+separate island.
+
+As soon as the tide would permit, we set out, and proceeded towards a
+cape called _Kattaktok_, surrounded by small islands. Between the cape
+and our anchoring place, we passed, on the left, the following objects;
+_Keglo_, a broad deep bay; _Katarusialik_, a headland, probably of the
+continent; _Ukkasiksalik_, (meaning a place where soap stone is found),
+a peninsula; and to the right of the latter place, an island,
+_Kikkertarsoak_, which lies at the entrance of the _Great Bay_, or
+estuary of the great river _Kangertlualuksoak_. We sailed with a strong,
+but favourable wind, with some rain, between the peninsula and the
+island; and not trusting to the depth of the water at ebb-tide, sent two
+kayaks forward to sound. They soon brought us into a good harbour, where
+we cast anchor about half past five P.M.
+
+_Kangertlualuksoak_ river was the spot to which we had principally
+directed our views. It lies about 140 miles S.S.W. of Cape Chudleigh. By
+an observation at its mouth its latitude appeared to be 58° 57'. But we
+had no means of finding the longitude. At its entrance the bay runs
+rather S.S.E. for about ten or twelve English miles, then turns due S.E.
+for six or eight more, and after that S.W. At the second turn towards
+the S.E. there is the greatest quantity of wood, chiefly Larch, but of
+moderate size. We particularly noticed a fine slope facing the south,
+which appeared the most pleasant part of the bay, to which a vessel
+might approach and anchor with convenience, there being from 24 to 30
+fathoms water. We also imagined that the entrance from the sea would be
+free from obstructions, as no islands are seen in that direction.
+Uttakiyok likewise declared, that there was no bar or sunken rocks near
+the mouth of the bay.
+
+We found no inhabitants on our arrival, but on the 13th, a whole company
+of people from Killinek joined us.
+
+Our transactions in the bay of _Kangertlualuksoak_, from the 7th, are
+here noticed more in detail.
+
+_August_ 8th. We landed, and went in search of our people, who had spent
+the night in tents on shore. Okkiksuk accompanied us to the top of a
+hill, overlooking the bay _Ittimnekoktok_, where we had anchored the day
+before. We saw it quite dry, and full of large fragments of rock.
+Turning towards the land, we discovered some wood at a distance. The
+weather being calm and warm, the musquitoes were excessively
+troublesome. The vallies here are overgrown with verdure, and the hills
+pretty well clothed with moss, and berry-bearing plants; but we could
+not continue our walk, on account of the musquitoes, which persecuted us
+unmercifully, and drove us back to our tents. All our men were out, two
+on that side on which we had landed, and the others having crossed the
+bay in their kayaks, were employed in hunting reindeer. Jonathan only
+remained at home. In the afternoon he accompanied us in the small boat,
+to a hill, situated to the South of our station, at about two miles
+distant, where we landed, and went up the country, but found nothing
+much worth notice. We observed, that round the headland near us, the
+water was very rough, with eddies and whirlpools, occasioned by the
+rising of the high tides. On returning to our little boat, we found it
+aground. We therefore gathered some drift-wood, of which there was
+plenty, and made a good fire, at which we sat down and regaled ourselves
+with some biscuit and beer. Having pushed the boat into the water, we
+set out, but owing to the violence of the current had hard work to get
+to the great boat, and did not arrive till dark. Jonas saluted us from
+on board, by firing off his piece in token of success, and we found that
+he had got two, and his companion three reindeer, and a small black
+bear. The carcases were left at the tents, where part was cooked, and a
+mess brought to us on board, which proved an agreeable repast after our
+fatigue. Jonas and his family spent the night on board, the rest of the
+Esquimaux in their tents on shore.
+
+9th. Jonas having found a good harbour on the other side of the bay, and
+the current being here very strong, we sailed across and anchored there.
+The strand was even, and full of smooth rocks, above high water mark.
+The bottom of the bay is mud, and a slimy substance, covering all the
+stones and pebbles, left by the tide, makes walking very troublesome.
+
+The land is not high, but pleasant, covered with moss, with many small
+ponds, and marks of being frequented by reindeer.
+
+10th. We went farther up the bay in the skin-boat, with Jonathan,
+Uttakiyok, Thukkekina, Paul, David, and Okkiksuk. At a short distance
+from the place where we had landed yesterday, we came to a fine green
+terrace, overgrown with low shrubs and bushes, which delighted us much.
+From hence, a woody valley, extending to the left, seemed to invite us
+to take that course into the country, but we would not waste our time by
+examining it. On sailing farther up the bay, and turning round the
+abovementioned terrace, we came to a small inlet, dry at low water, on
+the left shore. Its banks were pleasantly covered with low bushes,
+interspersed with higher trees, and the place seemed to us very suitable
+for a settlement. From hence we perceived, at a short distance, on the
+opposite coast, a cape or headland, over which the tops of trees made
+their appearance. We sailed towards it, and found behind it a tract
+covered with low wood, chiefly larch and pine: on landing we saw the
+tracks of rein-deer, which had just left the spot. Jonathan, in an
+instant, ran like a young man for his gun, and with it into the wood. We
+followed him for two or three miles, but saw nothing but the track of
+the deer. The country inland seems in general level, with some low
+hills, and many ponds; without wood, but overgrown with rein-deer moss.
+No success attended our huntsman, and in the evening we met again in the
+boat. Brother Kmoch had kept up with Jonathan, and saw, among the
+bushes, the same kind of large partridge, or American wild pheasant,
+which is found about Okkak, but seems only to live in woods. It was a
+hen, with a covey of young birds, one of which which he caught,
+examined, and let go again, nor would he take or shoot the hen, out of
+compassion to the young brood.
+
+Brother Kohlmeister had meanwhile gone farther up the bay, and thought
+he had discovered the entrance of the river, but no fresh water
+appearing, we must still have been a great way off its influx into the
+bay.
+
+We now lighted a fire, boiled coffee, and cooked a dish of reindeer
+venison. The weather was warm, and the night fine and clear, but frosty.
+Having brought our travelling-beds with us on shore, (see page 34), we
+crept into them, and spent the night at the fire-side, the Esquimaux
+lying down anywhere about us. In the morning, the whole country was
+covered with hoar-frost, and the straw we had lain upon was frozen fast
+to the ground.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+  _Further transactions in Kangertlualuksoak Bay. The Esquimaux
+  women frightened by reports of Indians. Ceremony of taking
+  possession of this new-explored country, as belonging to the
+  King of England, and of naming the river George river. Leave
+  the bay and proceed to Arvarvik. Whales caught by the Esquimaux
+  in the shallows. Storm at Kernertut._
+
+
+August 11th.--We rose by break of day, and after breakfast, sailed
+across the bay, and landed at the second small inlet, with an intention
+of penetrating into the country, but the returning warmth of the weather
+by day, and the myriads of musquitoes we had to contend with, rendered
+us unable to execute our purpose.
+
+The Missionaries and Jonathan ascended a hill, from which a great tract
+of country might be overlooked. It was full of wood, as far as the eye
+could reach. Near the inlet some places seemed boggy, or covered with
+grass. From hence a valley stretched into the country, with a small lake
+in it, about two or three miles distant. Berries were every where in
+abundance. The summits of the hills had no wood upon them, but much
+reindeer-moss.
+
+On our return, being about a mile from our landing-place, we saw our
+skin-boat in the middle of the bay, and fired a gun as a signal for it
+to come to us. The Esquimaux had five rein-deer in the boat, which
+Uttakiyok had perceived on the opposite bank. He had followed them in
+his kayak, driven them into the water, and killed them there. When hard
+pressed, reindeer soon take to the water, and swim so well, that a
+four-oared boat can scarcely come up with them, but an Esquimaux, in his
+kayak will overtake them. They therefore, if possible, drive them into
+the water, being then sure of their game.
+
+After dining on part of the venison, we returned to the great boat. On
+the passage, we thought we perceived at a considerable distance a black
+bear, and Uttakiyok, elated with his recent success, hoped to gain new
+laurels. He entered his kayak and proceeded as cautiously as possible
+along the shore, towards the spot, landed, climbed the hill, so as not
+to be observed, but when he had got just within gun-shot, perceived,
+that his bear was a black stone. This adventure furnished the company
+with merriment for the remainder of the voyage to the boat, which we
+reached about six P.M.
+
+When we got on board the boat, we found that all the women had taken
+refuge in it, thinking that they had seen Indians onshore. The men
+therefore immediately landed, to take care of the forsaken tents. This
+was no doubt a false alarm, for we never discovered any traces of them
+during our stay. To the south of Hopedale the Indians and Esquimaux
+sometimes meet, but as the Hopedale Esquimaux seek to cultivate their
+friendship, quarrels and bloodshed seldom occur. In Ungava, however,
+though they often exchange tokens of friendship, they are apt to give
+way to their national jealousies; and provocations being aggravated,
+their meetings now and then terminate in murder. The Esquimaux are much
+afraid of the Indians, who are a more nimble and active race.
+
+12th. Having finished reconnoitring the neighbourhood, and gathered all
+the information concerning it, which our means would permit, and
+likewise fixed upon the green slope or terrace above described, as the
+most suitable place for a settlement, on account of the abundance of
+wood in its neighbourhood, we made preparations to proceed. Uttakiyok,
+who had spent more than one winter in the Ungava country, assured us,
+that there was here an ample supply of provisions, both in summer and
+winter, which Jonathan also credited, from his own observation. The
+former likewise expressed himself convinced, that if we would form a
+settlement here, many Esquimaux would come to us from all parts. We
+ourselves were satisfied that Europeans might find the means of
+existence in this place, as it was accessible for ships, and had wood
+and water in plenty. As for Esquimaux, there appeared no want of those
+things upon which they live, the sea abounding with whitefish, seals,
+sea fowl, &c. and the land with reindeer, hares, bears, and other
+animals. The people from Killinek declared their intention of removing
+hither, if we would come and dwell among them, and are even now in the
+habit of visiting this place every summer. Our own company even
+expressed a wish to spend the winter here.
+
+This being the day before our departure, we erected, on two opposite
+hills, at the entrance of the bay, high marks of stones, and on the
+declivity of a hill to the right, a board, into which we had cut an
+inscription, thus--
+
+[Illustration: In front,
+Georgius III. Rex.
+Societas
+Unitatis Fratrum.]
+
+[Illustration: At the back.
+Benjamin Kohlmeister,
+George Kmoch,
+Aug. 7, 1811.
+The day of our arrival.]
+
+We raised and fixed this tablet with some solemnity, in presence of
+Uttakiyok and his family, as representatives of the people of Ungava,
+and of our own company, and hoisted the British flag alongside of it,
+while another was displayed at the same time in the boat. We explained
+the cause of this ceremony to all present, to the following effect--
+
+"That we, on this day, raised this sign, in the name of our king, George
+III. the great monarch of all these territories, in testimony of our
+having explored it, and made choice of it, in case we or our Brethren
+should think proper to settle here. To which we called upon all present
+to bear witness." We then proclaimed the name of the Kangertlualuksoak
+to be henceforth _George River_, upon which every man fired his piece
+three times, the vollies being answered from the boat.
+
+The texts of scripture appointed for this day were then read, and we
+remarked how encouraging they were, as relating to the purpose, for
+which we visited these unknown regions:
+
+_From the rising of the sun, even to the going down of the same, my name
+shall be great among the Gentiles, saith the Lord of Hosts!_ Mal. 11, 1.
+
+_At the name of Jesus every knee shall bow, of things in heaven, and
+things in earth, and things under the earth; and every tongue shall
+confess, that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God the Father!_
+Philippians, 2, 10, 11.
+
+After the ceremony was over, we distributed some pease, bread, and beer
+among the Esquimaux, which enabled them to make a splendid feast, and the
+day was spent in the most agreeable manner.
+
+13th. We set sail, about six A.M. with a gentle breeze, which however
+soon fell away entirely, and obliged us to take to our oars. Near the
+mouth of the bay, we met several kayaks, coming towards us. They were
+Esquimaux from Killinek, who expressed regret at not having sooner heard
+of our being here; some came on board, and traded with our people. We
+presented them with a little tobacco, for which they were very thankful.
+
+In order to get well out of the bay, we first steered North, and then
+passed to the S.W. between a peninsula _Nauyat_, lying to the left of
+the entrance, and seven small islands and rocks on the right, towards
+the island of _Arvarvik_, about six or seven miles distant, where we
+were obliged to cast anchor in an exposed situation, the wind having
+become contrary. There was a strong swell during the night, which
+violently agitated our boat.
+
+_Arvarvik_ is about five miles in circumference. It is covered with the
+bones of whales, which the Esquimaux catch here in their kayaks. The
+coast is surrounded by a great number of small low islands, with deep
+pools between them. Into these the whales stray at high water, and at
+the ebbing of the tide, are prevented finding their way back again. The
+Esquimaux then pursue and kill them with harpoons. In the island are
+ponds of fresh water, and some low hills, overgrown with moss. A great
+number of sea-fowl, and also reindeer, are found upon it.
+
+On the shore we found great quantities of a red jasper, or iron-stone,
+the same which occurs throughout the coast, from _Killinek_ to South
+river, not as a stratum, but in lumps, and generally below high water
+mark.
+
+The Esquimaux who landed on the continent reported, that about two miles
+inland, there was much low wood.
+
+14th. We left our unpleasant anchorage, and returned to a place where
+the skin-boat had lain during the night, as it was sheltered from the
+South wind, which had risen considerably.
+
+15th. Our people went out to hunt reindeer, and returned in the evening
+with two. The wind shifted to the west, and blew with violence. We spent
+again an uneasy night.
+
+16th. Brother Kmoch went on shore and returned with a parcel of stones
+for examination. We now began to feel some anxiety on account of the
+great loss of time we were suffering here by contrary winds.
+
+17th. About eight o'clock we set sail, the wind having come round to the
+S.E. with a cloudy sky. We passed several nameless islands, at the
+distance of about a mile from the shore. In the afternoon, it began to
+rain hard, and after having sailed about twelve miles, we cast anchor
+near a long point of land, called _Kernertut_, by which we were
+sheltered from the wind, which had again turned to the South-west. The
+sky however was clear, and the beginning of the night pleasant, with
+beautiful appearances of the Aurora Borealis. Most of our people, and
+with them Uttakiyok, had gone in the skin-boat higher up the bay, but it
+was too shallow to admit of our following them. Only Jonas and his
+children, and the two boys Okkiksuk and Mammak, were left with us on
+board.
+
+During the night the wind veered round to the N.E. and blew a gale,
+which increased in violence till day-break.
+
+18th. The sea now rose to a tremendous height, such as we had never
+before experienced, and by the change of wind, we were exposed to the
+whole of its fury. The rain fell in torrents. We lay at three anchors,
+and the boat was tossed about terribly, the sea frequently breaking
+quite over her, insomuch that we expected every moment to be swallowed
+up in the abyss. With much difficulty we succeeded in lowering our
+after-mast. Jonathan and the rest of our company on shore, were obliged
+to be passive spectators of the dreadful scene, waiting the event in
+silent anguish. They quitted their tents, and came forward to some
+eminences near the beach, where, by lifting up their hands, and other
+gestures, they expressed terror, bordering on despair. Frequently the
+boat was hid from their view by the waves, which ran mountains high.
+They expected every moment that we should break loose from our anchors,
+and the boat be driven on the rocks. The length of our cables was here
+of the greatest advantage to us. About noon, the rope by which the small
+boat was fastened, broke. She was immediately carried up the bay, and
+thrown, by the violence of the surf, on the top of a rock, where she
+stuck fast, keel upwards. It was impossible to render us any assistance,
+till the tide turned, when the raging of the sea, and the wind, began to
+abate. As soon as it was practicable, Jonathan and the other men came to
+us in the skin-boat. He seemed quite overcome with joy, and, not able to
+utter a word, held out his hand, and shed tears of gratitude that he met
+us again alive, for he had given us up for lost.
+
+We now endeavoured to bring the great boat closer to the shore, landed,
+pitched our tent, and gave thanks to God for the merciful deliverance we
+had just experienced. Indeed all our people most fervently joined in
+praise to Him for the preservation of our lives. A warm dinner was soon
+prepared, by which we were much refreshed.
+
+As soon as the tide had ebbed sufficiently for it, our people went to
+the rock, on which the small boat lay, and got her into the water. To
+our great surprize we found, that she had received no material injury.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+  _Doubts expressed by Jonathan and the other Esquimaux on the
+  expediency of continuing the voyage. Consultations. Resolve to
+  proceed. Thunder-storm at Pitsiolak. Account of Indians.
+  Esquimaux cookery and hunting feasts. Arrival in the river
+  Koksoak._
+
+
+Jonathan and Jonas now became more and more anxious about our situation.
+They represented to us, that, if we attempted to proceed farther, we
+might probably be compelled to remain here the whole winter, as the
+stormy season was fast approaching. They added, that to _them_, it would
+be of little consequence, but that they were concerned on _our_ account.
+
+Though we had not said any thing as yet that might tend to shake the
+confidence of our party, yet we felt no small degree of perplexity
+concerning present appearances. During the six days since we left
+George's River, we had made little more than fourteen or fifteen miles,
+and were at least, as far as we could judge, seventy or eighty from the
+river _Koksoak_, which we had fixed upon as the final object of the
+voyage, being the outermost western boundary of the Ungava country.
+Insurmountable difficulties seemed now to present themselves, owing
+partly to contrary winds and cold weather, and partly to loss of time,
+for we had been already two months on the voyage, and had not yet
+obtained our aim: so that our return might be unseasonably late, if we
+proceeded. We could not possibly make up our minds to spend the winter
+here, as we had not a sufficient supply of provisions, and knew what
+distress it would occasion to our Brethren at Okkak.
+
+We felt quite at a loss what to do in this dilemma, and our path seemed
+enveloped in obscurity. We remembered, that "_to the upright there
+ariseth a light in the darkness_," (Ps. 112, 4): that is, to them who
+fear and trust in the Lord, and sincerely desire to know and do His
+will, He will reveal it. In His name we had entered upon this voyage,
+the only ultimate object of which was, the conversion of a benighted,
+neglected nation, in one of the remotest corners of the earth. We were,
+therefore, sure that He would not forsake us, nor leave us in
+uncertainty as to His will concerning us, but that He, "_whose eyes run
+to and fro throughout the whole earth, to shew Himself strong in the
+behalf of them whose heart is perfect towards Him_," (2 Chron. 16, 9.)
+was, even in this desolate region, present with us, and would hear and
+answer our prayers. Many comfortable texts of scripture occurred to our
+minds on this occasion, filling us with an extraordinary degree of faith
+and confidence in Him, particularly such as, "_He will be very gracious
+unto thee at the voice of thy cry; when He shall hear it, He will answer
+thee_," Isa. 30, 19. Also, Dan. 10, 19; Jer. 16, 21; Isa. 43, 2, &c. The
+mercies, also, which we had already experienced, excited within us a
+sense of the deepest gratitude and most firm trust; and we therefore
+told our people, that we indeed participated in their concern, would
+take the subject into serious consideration, and acquaint them with our
+determination on the morrow.
+
+19th. In the morning we met in our tent, where we were safe from the
+intrusion of the Esquimaux, to confer together upon this most important
+subject. We weighed all the circumstances connected with it, maturely
+and impartially, as in the presence of God, and, not being able to come
+to any decision, where reasons for and against the question seemed to
+hold such an even balance, we determined to commit our case to Him, who
+has promised, that "_if two of His people shall agree on earth, as
+touching any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them_,"
+(Matth. 18, 19.) and, kneeling down, entreated Him to hear our prayers
+and supplications in this our distressed and embarrassing situation, and
+to make known to us His will concerning our future proceedings, whether
+we should persevere in fulfilling the whole aim of our voyage, or,
+prevented by circumstances, give up a part, and return home from this
+place.
+
+The peace of God which filled our hearts on this memorable occasion, and
+the strong conviction wrought in us both, that we should persevere, in
+His name, to fulfil the whole of our commission, relying without fear on
+His help and preservation, no words can describe; but those who believe
+in the fulfilment of the gracious promises of Jesus, given to His poor
+followers and disciples, will understand us, when we declare, that we
+were assured, that it was the will of God our Saviour, that we should
+not now return and leave our work unfinished, but proceed to the end of
+our proposed voyage. Each of us communicated to his brother the
+conviction of his heart, all fears and doubts vanished, and we were
+filled anew with courage and willingness to act in obedience to it, in
+the strength of the Lord. O that all men knew the comfort and happiness
+of a mind devoted unto, and firmly trusting in God in all things!
+
+When we made known our determination to Jonathan and his son Jonas, and
+told them, that we had maturely considered the subject committed by them
+to us, and that, in answer to our prayers, the Lord had convinced us,
+that, not having obtained the aim of our voyage, we should proceed,
+Jonas, at first, seemed not quite satisfied, but our excellent captain,
+Jonathan, without hesitation replied: "Yes, that is also my conviction!
+We will go whither Jesus directs us. He will bring us safe to our
+journey's end, and safe home again." We were, indeed, glad and thankful
+that the Lord had inclined the heart of this man, who but yesterday
+seemed to be quite dispirited, to take this resolution, for much
+depended upon him, and the rest followed him without difficulty. Indeed
+they all submitted to our determination with a willing mind, and their
+expressions of resignation affected us much.
+
+During the day, the men had been out a-hunting, when Uttakiyok killed
+three reindeer, which occasioned great rejoicing, and helped to make our
+people forget the frightful scenes of yesterday. The country is full of
+black looking rocks, between which reindeer-moss and berries grow in
+plenty. The shore exhibited still many marks of the violence of the
+storm.
+
+20th. We proceeded with a favourable wind at N.E. Our course lay S.W.
+across a broad bay, then, after doubling a point, across another bay of
+about the same breadth, to an island _Allukpaluk_, which we passed on
+the right, and on the left, another island, _Nipkotok_. At a
+considerable distance a-head lay the islands _Pitsiolak_, opposite a
+headland of the continent called _Tuktutok_.
+
+The sky had been from the morning cloudy, the wind became unfavourable
+and violent, and about noon heavy rain came on. Not being well able to
+proceed, on account of the violence of the wind, we cast anchor on the
+west side of _Pitsiolak_, about 2 P.M. but perceiving a thunderstorm
+rising from the western horizon, with very black clouds, threatening to
+drive us on shore if we remained at this anchorage, we weighed as
+quickly as possible, and endeavoured to get to the other side of the
+island.
+
+Meanwhile a most tremendous storm of thunder, lightning, and rain
+overtook us. The claps of thunder followed the flashes without interval,
+and the lightning seemed to strike into the water close to our boat,
+while the wind carried the spray into the air like smoke. Providentially
+we had doubled the northern point before the worst came on, and got to
+an anchor under shelter of the land. The storm passed by swiftly, it
+grew calm, the sun broke out, and the weather became uncommonly fine
+with us, though at a distance we saw the black clouds, and heard the
+hollow murmuring of the thunder for a long time.
+
+We now expected to have a comfortable night's rest, but it grew
+intensely cold, and again began to blow violently from the west. The
+strong current and heavy swell brought us into some danger, and the poor
+people, who were obliged to remain on deck all night, suffered much from
+cold and wet. When the tide was full, about midnight, the island we had
+seen to the west nearly vanished, the greater part being covered with
+water.
+
+21st. In the morning we again saw the skin-boat lying upon a pretty high
+rock, and a tent pitched close to it. The weather was calm, but the wind
+contrary. Our Esquimaux made good use of this respite to refresh
+themselves after the fatigues of the night with a hearty meal and a
+sound nap.
+
+In the afternoon we landed. The island Pitsiolak, which forms two at
+high water, is low and flat, overgrown with Empetrum and Rubus
+Chamoemorus, (_Akpik_-berries). Quantities of driftwood float about the
+shores. The jasper occurred here again. This island may be about four or
+five miles long, and, at low water, is connected with other islands to
+the north. By the help of our glasses we could perceive woods on the
+continent, and the Esquimaux thought they discovered the smoke of Indian
+fires. They are much afraid of meeting these people. Bloody encounters
+occasionally occur between them. The Indians come from the interior, and
+from Hudson's Bay, and are frequently seen near the two principal
+rivers, George river and South river, towards which we were going; but
+we met with none. Brother Kohlmeister rather wished for it, as some of
+them are said to understand English, and he was desirous of endeavouring
+to bring them to a more peaceable disposition towards the Esquimaux, by
+friendly conversation.
+
+22d. We found the skin-boat a great hindrance to us. Without being
+obliged to take that in tow, we might have kept at a greater distance
+from the shore, which would have enabled us to get on more rapidly, and
+with greater safety. On shore we found a great quantity of cubical
+pyrites in a grey matrix. The Esquimaux are attentive to this mineral,
+and have before now brought it to Okkak.
+
+23d. We proceeded at 6 A.M. and steered for the island of _Saeglorsoak_.
+The islands called _Nocharutsit_ lay on our left. They are a group of
+numerous small islands, many of which are overflowed at high water,
+extending W. and E. towards the entrance of South river. Between these
+islands and Akpatok, the sea is said to be clear of rocks, and the water
+of sufficient depth for any ship entering from Hudson's Straits, and
+bound to the Koksoak, or South river; but no ship durst, in our opinion,
+venture to approach the coast of Ungava within twenty or thirty miles.
+
+In the afternoon, the tide turning against us, and the wind
+unfavourable, we were obliged to come to an anchor among the islands. We
+had left the skin-boat behind, with Thukkekina, Uttakiyok's brother
+Annoray, and one of his wives, to whom he had given his baggage in
+charge. The Esquimaux wives are very punctilious, the first always
+maintains the highest dignity, regulates the housekeeping, distributes
+the provisions, and directs everything, as mistress of the family.
+
+Jonas went out in his kayak, and shot a seal. We saw many, and fired at
+them, but got none. Whitefish were likewise seen at a distance.
+Uttakiyok and David were out in their kayaks, and joined us in the
+evening loaded with geese.
+
+On the turn of the tide we proceeded, and at ten P.M. cast anchor among
+the Nocharutsits, under a pretty high island, about three or four miles
+in circumference. All our people remained on board during the night,
+which was calm and pleasant.
+
+24th. David roused us about five o'clock, by firing at a seal, which he
+killed. The women went on shore to cook it with some geese. When they
+returned, we all breakfasted on the contents of their pot.
+
+The Esquimaux want no books of cookery to manage their kitchen affairs.
+The meat is boiled with the blood in it, and the addition of some water.
+When it is sufficiently done, that is, according the Ungava custom, when
+half warm, the women take it out of the pot, and serve it up on a piece
+of stone, if on shore, and on a piece of board, if at sea. Then the
+person, who has caught the seal or game, proclaims with great
+vociferation, that the _men_ may come and sit down to eat. Such exertion
+of voice, however, seems hardly necessary, as the Esquimaux are very
+acute at hearing, when they are invited to dinner. When the men have
+done, the women sit down, having taken good care, beforehand, that their
+share is secured. The Esquimaux customs never permit men and women to
+sit down together at a meal.
+
+It sometimes happens among the heathen Esquimaux, that several having
+had good success, one huntsman's feast is hardly over, before another
+proclaims the invitation to his banquet. This is never suffered to pass
+unnoticed, while the power of cramming down another morsel remains. Thus
+they will continue eating, till they are scarcely able to breathe, and
+then lie down to sleep off the effects of their gluttony. Indeed their
+excessive voraciousness on such occasions produces, especially after
+long fasting, all the symptoms of drunkenness. They forget, under its
+sensual influence, all moderation, and abandon themselves to the most
+disgusting abominations.
+
+In the afternoon we steered W. by N. (wind N.E.), for the cape of
+_Kernerauyak_, at the east side of the entrance of the river _Koksoak_,
+(Sand river). Before we arrived at the cape, we left some islands to the
+South, the largest of which is again called _Kikkertarsoak.
+Saeglorsoak_, is a large flat island, about eight or ten miles long, and
+its neighbourhood very dangerous, on account of many sunken rocks. The
+continent hereabouts is well wooded, and Indians are said to be
+frequently seen in the interior. The mouth of the Koksoak is seven or
+eight English miles broad: its shores steep, but the rocks in general
+low, and covered with moss. The Esquimaux say, that in the middle there
+is water enough for any large ship, though the tides prevent any near
+approach to the land. At sunset we came to an anchor at the mouth of the
+river.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+  _Sail up the river Koksoak. Transactions in that region.
+  Dangerous eddy. Meet Esquimaux. Address to them. Their joy and
+  eagerness to have Missionaries, resident among them. Find a
+  suitable situation for a settlement. Description of the
+  country._
+
+
+August 25th.--This was the joyful day on which at last we saw our hopes
+realized, and the principal aim of our journey obtained. The sun rose
+beautifully, and announced a delightful day. We were obliged to wait
+till seven A.M. for the turn of the tide, before we could proceed up the
+river. The estuary of the _Koksoak_ lies, according to an observation
+taken, in 58° 36' N. latitude, nearly the same as Okkak. To the west the
+country is called by the Esquimaux _Assokak_, the coast turning again
+W.N.W. This river, therefore, seems to be at the most southern point of
+the coast, George's river entering the sea at 58° 52', consequently more
+North.
+
+The Koksoak appeared to us to be about as broad as the Thames at
+Gravesend, or the Elbe near Hamburg, and the whole river, with its
+various windings, much resembles the Thames for twenty-four miles
+upwards. Its depth is sufficient for a ship thus far. Its general
+direction is from the South. We reckoned it to be about 600 or 700 miles
+from Okkak, and Killinek or Cape Chudleigh half way.
+
+Having proceeded five or six miles up the river, we came to a small
+island, which we left on our right.
+
+We saw several sacks of blubber, a sledge, and some other, articles
+lying on the beach, and Jonathan and Brother Kmoch went in the small
+boat to discover the proprietors, but found nobody there, to guard the
+goods.
+
+A little farther on is a point of land running out into nearly the
+middle of the stream. The current sets very rapidly round it, so as to
+form a dangerous eddy. Our boat was seized, and twice turned quite
+round; the small boat was whirled about several times, as she pushed
+through it. The women on board our boat, on seeing this, set up a loud
+scream; but Jonathan only laughed at their fears, and we afterwards saw
+kayaks passing the eddy in perfect safety.
+
+Having doubled the point, we perceived several kayaks approaching. The
+people in them shouted aloud for joy, exclaiming, _Innuit, Innuit_! Men,
+Men! Some guns were also fired in the boat, which were soon answered by
+some fowling-pieces from the shore.
+
+We now saw three tents pitched on the bank, and hoisted our colours,
+when we were incessantly hailed by the inhabitants. There was a general
+cry of _Kuvè, Kuvè, Kablunaet, Kablunaet!_ Europeans, Europeans! from
+the men in the kayaks, who, by all manner of gesticulations, expressed
+their pleasure, brandishing their pautiks, (oars), and shouting
+continually as they rowed alongside the boat. The women on shore
+answered with loud acclamations.
+
+About one P.M. we cast anchor close to their habitations. Fourteen
+families were here, among whom were some from a distant district, called
+_Eivektok_. These had pitched their tents farther up the river.
+_Arnauyak_ was with them, a man, with whom Brother Kohlmeister had
+become acquainted some years ago, exceedingly regretted, that he had but
+a few days ago left the place, to hunt reindeer on George's river. The
+children expressed their joy by running to and fro on the strand, like
+wild creatures.
+
+At first, the people in the tents appeared rather shy, but after
+accepting of some trifling presents, they became quite communicative,
+and gave us some of their toys in exchange; then walking round us,
+surveyed us narrowly, as if we were a new species of animals. Most of
+them had never before seen an European. Uttakiyok's brother had joined
+them, and already informed them of our arrival, without which they would
+probably have been yet more alarmed at seeing strangers, and hearing the
+report of fire-arms.
+
+They now invited all our people to dine with them, and having heard that
+Brother Kohlmeister would like to taste the flesh of a whitefish, a
+kettle was immediately placed on the fire, and a large piece put in to
+boil. Brother Kmoch meanwhile cooked a savoury soup of birds, and
+reindeer-flesh, more fit for an European stomach. While dinner was
+preparing, Brother Kohlmeister took a walk up the bank of the river, and
+across some hills. As the families belonging to _Eivektok_ had their
+summer dwelling in that neighbourhood, the Esquimaux, on perceiving that
+he had walked in that direction, and fearing that the Eivektok people,
+seeing him alone, might mistake him for an Indian, and shoot at him,
+dispatched two men to bring him back. They missed him, and he returned
+before them. He found our people very pleasantly conversing with the
+heathen concerning the aim of our journey, and the way of salvation.
+Even Uttakiyok was thus engaged, explaining, as well as he could, the
+cause of our living in Labrador: he exclaimed, "let us, my friends, all
+be converted to Jesus." He was heard with peculiar attention, being
+considered as a captain among them. In the evening we sang hymns in
+Jonathan's tent. The people all came and listened with much seriousness.
+
+26th. To-day the Eivektok families came in a skin-boat down the river, to
+see us. They were full of astonishment, but soon took courage, and
+handled us, to discover whether we were made of the same materials with
+themselves. An old man, _Netsiak_, addressed Brother Kohlmeister: "Are
+you Benjamin? I have never seen you with my eyes, but at Eivektok have
+heard your name often mentioned." He seemed to be a sensible man, and a
+captain among his tribe.
+
+We could not help remarking the difference between these Esquimaux and
+their countrymen living on the same coasts with our settlements. The
+former are very poor, and miserably equipped, whereas the latter, by
+their intercourse with us and other Europeans, have acquired many
+conveniences, and are, by barter, well provided with what they want.
+
+27th. We proceeded farther up the river, accompanied by most of the men,
+and some women, in their skin-boat, and arrived at a bay, which, by the
+winding of the stream, appears like a lake, surrounded on all sides with
+gently rising grounds, well planted with wood of moderate size, chiefly
+larch. Behind the wood are some low hills. We named this place _Unity's
+Bay_. There is here a very good place for a Missionary settlement. A
+fine slope extends for about half an English mile, bounded on each
+extremity by a hill, on each of which we erected high signals. The land
+is even and dry. Juniper, currants, and other berries, grow here in
+abundance, and rivulets run out of the wood at a distance of a few
+hundred paces from each other. The slope faces the S.S.E. and we named
+it _Pilgerruh_, (Pilgrim's rest). Brother Kohlmeister made drawings of
+the situation.
+
+From our first arrival we had improved every opportunity of making the
+Esquimaux acquainted with the chief aim of our visit to this country,
+and addressed them both singly and in companies. Nor were Jonathan and
+Jonas remiss in conversing with them about the concerns of their
+immortal souls, declaring to them the love of God our Saviour towards
+them. We once met with Sybilla, Jonathan's wife, seated with a company
+of women, under the shadow of a skin-boat, set on edge, exhorting them,
+with great simplicity and fervour, to hear and believe the gospel.
+
+28th. Brother Kmoch landed with Jonathan, and spent some hours in
+examining the banks of the river. On ascending the first eminence, the
+view of the interior is in general flat, with a few low hills, and ponds
+in some places, full of wild geese. The timber in the woods hereabouts
+is not large: we found none fit for masts. The largest trees were not
+more than eight inches in diameter, and fifteen or twenty feet high.
+They are chiefly larch and pines. In some places we found them burnt or
+withered, and were informed by the Esquimaux, that it was the effect of
+the Indian's fires. Indeed we saw several places where the Indians had
+put up huts, and left sufficient vestiges of their abode. Berries grow
+everywhere, and between the river and the wood, the plain is chiefly
+covered with willows, high grass growing between them, but these and the
+various shrubs are so low, that a man can easily look over them. In all
+directions we saw the tracks of reindeer, and there is every appearance
+of its being a place much frequented by these animals. Deeper in the
+wood, we found great quantities of sorrel and other European plants. The
+woods appeared very thick, and extended as far as the eye could reach,
+often coming down to the edge of the river. The Esquimaux say, that
+higher up, large timber is found. On our return to the skin-boat we
+found ourselves pretty much fatigued, and ready to partake of a supper,
+cooked by the Esquimaux, consisting of ship's biscuit, dried fish, and
+raw whitefish blubber. The Esquimaux prevailed upon Brother Kmoch to
+taste the latter, and he reported, that having once overcome his
+aversion to it, its taste was sweet, like the kernel of a nut, but
+heated his stomach like a hot posset.
+
+29th. Changeable and rainy weather prevented us from going out much.
+
+30th. Our people, and with them the strange Esquimaux, met for public
+worship. Brother Kohlmeister once more explained to them our intention
+in coming thus far to visit them. He addressed them to the following
+effect: "That already, many years ago, many excellent people in the
+country beyond the great ocean, had thought of them with much love, and
+felt desirous that the inhabitants of the Ungava country also might hear
+the comfortable word of God, and be instructed in it: for they had heard
+that the Esquimaux here were heathen, who, through ignorance, served the
+Torngak, or evil spirit, and were led by him into the commission of all
+manner of sin, that they might hereafter be lost, and go to the place of
+eternal darkness and misery. Out of love, therefore," continued the
+missionary, "they have sent us to you, and out of love we have come to
+you, to tell you how you may be saved, and become happy, peaceful
+children of God, being delivered from the fear of death, which is now
+upon you all, and have the prospect of everlasting joy and peace
+hereafter, even by receiving the gospel, and turning to Jesus, who is
+the only Creator and Saviour of all men. He died for _your_ sins, for
+_our_ sins, and for the sins of all mankind, as our surety, suffering
+the punishment we deserved, that _you_, by receiving Him, and believing
+on Him, might be saved, and not go to the place of eternal darkness and
+pain, but to the place of bliss and eternal rest. You cannot yet
+understand these comfortable words of the gospel, but if it is your
+sincere wish to know the truth of them, Jesus will open your ears and
+hearts, to hear and understand them. These my companions were as
+ignorant as you, but they now thank God, that they know Jesus as their
+Saviour, and are assured that through His death they shall inherit
+everlasting life."
+
+During this address all were silent and very attentive. Some exclaimed:
+"O we desire to hear more about it!" Old Netsiak, from Eivektok, said:
+"I am indeed old, but if you come to live here, I will certainly remove
+hither also; and live with you and be converted."
+
+When we put the question to them, whether they were willing, that we
+should come and dwell with them, and instruct them, they all answered
+with a loud and cheerful voice. "_Kaititse tok, Kaititse tok!_ O do come
+soon, and live with us, we will all gladly be converted, and live with
+you." Jonathan and Jonas also bore ample testimony to the truth of what
+we had spoken, and their words seemed to make a deep impression on all
+their countrymen. Uttakiyok was above others eager to express his wish
+that we might soon make a settlement in the Ungava country. Five of the
+fourteen families who mean to reside here next winter, are from
+Eivektok.
+
+Farther inland, the river Koksoak widens considerably, but consequently
+grows more shallow. The country is pleasant, with wood, grassy plains,
+and gentle hills.
+
+31st. Having finished all our observations here, we dropped down the
+stream to the place, where we had discovered the first tents.
+
+In descending, as well as ascending the river, we saw a great number of
+whitefish, and many seals. Reindeer are numerous on both shores, both in
+summer and winter. All the Esquimaux declared, that this was the best
+provision-place in the whole country, and they consequently flock to it
+from all parts every summer, frequently protracting their stay during
+the winter. The greater number of those we found here, purposed spending
+next winter in this neighbourhood. The Esquimaux are prevented from
+making this place their constant residence by their fear of the
+land-Indians, which cause them to quit it sooner than they otherwise
+would wish to do.
+
+We spared no pains to collect all the information we possibly could
+obtain, on every subject relating to this situation, both as to itself,
+and in reference to the possibility of approaching it with a ship, as
+likewise respecting the inhabitants of the Ungava country in general. It
+appeared evident, that the place above described is the most eligible
+for forming a missionary-settlement.
+
+We found it unnecessary to proceed to the Westward, by the account given
+us by our worthy conductor Uttakiyok, whose information hitherto we had
+always found correct, and confidently to be relied on.
+
+He reported: 1. That farther West no wood is to be found on the coast.
+
+2. That besides the two rivers Kangertlualuksoak and Koksoak, they knew
+of no place where a ship might with safety approach the land.
+
+3. That at this time we should probably find no inhabitants, as they had
+all gone into the interior to hunt reindeer.
+
+We therefore now considered the business committed to us to be
+accomplished, and determined to return to Okkak, thankful to God our
+Saviour for the many proofs of His favour, and protection, experienced
+in the execution of our commission.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+_Return to Okkak._
+
+
+September 1st.--At ten A.M. we fell down the river with the ebb-tide,
+and about noon anchored near its mouth. The Esquimaux showed great
+attachment to us, and could hardly resolve to take a final leave. They
+called after us, "Come soon again, we shall always be wishing for you."
+Several of them, and among them our friend Uttakiyok, followed us in
+their kayaks to the mouth of the river.
+
+We erected here, on the promontory Kernerauyak, a board with an
+inscription similar to that put up at George river, but with the day of
+our departure inserted, viz. Sept. 1st, instead of the day of our
+arrival, Aug. 7th. The same solemnities took place as on the former
+occasion. Our faithful pilot Uttakiyok, who had rendered us such
+important and essential services, now took leave of us, as he intends to
+spend the winter in this neighbourhood. He repeated his assurance, that
+if we settled here, he would be the first to join us, and to turn with
+his whole heart to God. Not willing to be any longer incumbered with the
+skin-boat, we added it to other useful articles given to Uttakiyok, as a
+reward for his faithful attention to us. He was very highly gratified,
+and thankful for this species of remuneration.
+
+2d. Left the Koksoak, called by us, _South river_, and steered to the N.
+of _Kernerauyak_ and _Kikkertorsoak_. In the evening we cast anchor in
+an open road, among the _Nachorutsit_ islands, with fine weather.
+
+3d. Set sail at sun-rise, wind and tide in our favour, and proceeded
+rapidly. About noon, however, a fog came on, which obliged us to come to
+an anchor at _Pitsiolak_. When it cleared up, we proceeded, steering
+between _Allukpalak_ and _Nipkotok_, and cast anchor in the open sea,
+near _Kernertut_, where, on our first arrival, we encountered such a
+tremendous storm. The night proved quite calm and fair.
+
+4th. A gentle breeze brought us pleasantly as far as the island
+_Nauyet_, at the mouth of the _Kangertlualuksoak_, where we cast anchor,
+having performed the same voyage in three days, which took us twelve on
+our former passage. The distance may be about 100 English miles.
+
+5th. Landed, and erected a species of landmark, on the highest point of
+_Nauyet_, as a ship entering the river must keep near this island, the
+shore on the other side being very foul. Contrary winds now obliged us
+to enter the bay, and cast anchor in the same place where we had lain on
+the 9th of August.
+
+6th. Storm and rain prevented our proceeding. The Esquimaux went on
+shore, and pitched their tent. Of late they generally spent the night on
+board the boat.
+
+7th. Wind at W. but a heavy swell from the sea prevented our sailing.
+Our men went out to hunt, and Paul returned in the evening with a deer.
+
+8th. Snow had fallen during the night, and the whole country had the
+appearance of the middle of winter. We dropped down with the ebb-tide,
+but were obliged to anchor again near the entrance of the bay. When the
+tide turned we proceeded, and, leaving _Kikkertorsoak_ to the right,
+made for cape _Kattaktok_, where we spent the night at anchor among some
+low islands. The night was clear, and a comet appeared N. by W.
+
+9th. Wind favourable and strong. We set sail at sun-rise, and steered
+for _Uibvaksoak_, and so rapidly did our boat make way through the
+waves, that we arrived there already at four in the afternoon, passing
+swiftly by the Dragon's dwelling, (_Torngets_). A thunder-storm was
+approaching. The wind, which felt quite warm, was in our rear, and
+violent gusts assailed us now and then, which made us shorten sail; yet
+the boat seemed to fly from island to island. We were unable to find a
+safe anchorage till 8 P.M. when it was already dark. We had sailed, in
+fourteen hours, about 100 English miles, and were all completely wet
+with the spray of the sea and frequent showers. Our Esquimaux were
+obliged, in this condition, to lie down either on deck or on shore.
+
+10th. Reached _Omanek_, about 40 or 50 miles sail.
+
+11th. Wind contrary, with much rain. We were confined to our narrow
+cabin, and shut in all day, with a lamp burning.
+
+12th. Clear weather: set sail at noon. In the afternoon we were saluted
+by some shots from _Killinek_ Esquimaux, who were halting not far from
+the Ikkerasak, or straits, at the entrance of which we cast anchor about
+7 P.M.
+
+13th. Though we wished to have some conversation with the _Killinek_
+people, as they cannot often come to Okkak, yet we thought it adviseable
+to lose no time, and, with the ebb-tide, passed through the _Ikkerasak_
+in perfect safety. When, about 1 P.M. the tide turned, we ran into a
+cove on the south side, and at 5 P.M. anchored in the lagoon above
+described, (See page 43), the entrance to which will only admit a boat.
+
+14th. Reached _Oppernavik_, where we first met Uttakiyok.
+
+15th. Set sail with a gentle breeze, which permitted us to have our
+Sunday's service on deck. The wind, however, soon turning against us, we
+were compelled to return to our former anchorage.
+
+16th and 17th. We were unpleasantly detained by wind and rain, and on
+the latter day much snow fell.
+
+18th. Reached _Kikkertarsoak_ about 1 P.M. Our men went out in their
+kayaks, and returned in the evening with three seals. The night was
+fair, with beautiful appearances of the Aurora Borealis.
+
+19th. The morning was calm: some indications of approaching storm made
+us anxious to proceed. We set out early; but a fog coming on, we came
+again to an anchor off a barren island. After staying here two hours,
+hoping for a favourable change, Jonathan proposed to proceed, and
+steered S.W. not knowing rightly where we were. On this occasion, we
+could not help admiring the composure of the Esquimaux. But having last
+night made a hearty meal of the provisions they had acquired, they
+seemed to take things easy, and thought it would all be right in the
+end. So it turned out; for by and by we saw the continent, and kept
+along shore, till we got to the promontory _Kakkeviak_, where, on our
+passage, we had nearly suffered shipwreck. (See page 38). Here we cast
+anchor in a wide shallow bay, and spent a quiet night.
+
+20th. The fog had dispersed, and the wind was favourable, though
+shifting from W. to N.W.N. and N.E. At 7 P.M. we reached _Kumaktorvik_
+and found good anchorage close to the Esquimaux winter-houses; but we
+were disappointed by finding them empty, the people being probably out
+on the reindeer-hunt. There were four houses standing, apparently not
+old, and the traces of eight others, situated on a low point of land,
+well covered with grass, and surrounded by high mountains.
+
+21st. Wind N.W. set sail by break of day; reached _Nennoktok_ about
+noon, and steered across _Sangmiyok_ bay, for the northern promontory in
+_Nachvak_ bay. Sangmiyok bay is full of breakers, and the sea running
+pretty high, they appeared very distinctly. The wind dying away in the
+afternoon, we got no farther than the steep rocks under which we had
+spent the night of July the 18th, where we came to an anchor. A heavy
+swell from the sea, and violent gusts of wind assailing us in all
+directions from the mountains gave us much uneasiness; but, by the
+protecting care of God, we suffered no harm.
+
+22d. It blew hard from the N.W. and prevented our running into Nachvak
+bay. Our situation being highly dangerous, and the wind favouring our
+proceeding, we determined to pass by Nachvak. But having sailed across
+the bay, our captain found it impossible to proceed, and thought proper
+to come to an anchor. The truth was, that he had left some articles here
+in a cove, which he wished to secure. We therefore went on shore, and
+found many fragments of the bones of whales, whence we inferred that
+whales are sometimes cast on shore in this place.
+
+23d. A heavy storm came on from the N.W. To-day we caught the first
+cod-fish, which proved a very acceptable change of diet for us and our
+people.
+
+24th. The morning was calm. Wind E. left the cove and steered for
+Nachvak, and came, _accidentally_, to the very place where Jonathan's
+goods were deposited. Not perceiving any Esquimaux on shore, Jonathan
+and Thukkekina went up the bay in their kayaks in search of them.
+Meanwhile _we_ landed, and on the declivity of a hill found a great
+quantity of green soapstone. In the evening Jonathan and Thukkekina
+returned with ten other Equimaux, who rejoiced to see us again.
+
+25th. Brother Kohlmeister was engaged all day with the Esquimaux.
+Brother Kmoch went up the mountain, and brought some fine specimens of
+steatite.
+
+26th. Wind strong at N.W. we set sail; but the wind failing, we could
+not reach _Saeglek_, as proposed, but spent the night in the open sea.
+It passed, however, without any unpleasant occurrences.
+
+27th. The want of wind prevented our getting to-day as far as the
+Saeglek islands. Having passed through a very narrow Ikkerasak, with
+hardly sufficient depth of water for so large a boat, we cast anchor
+near our former station at _Kikkertarsoak_.
+
+28th. Wind cold and changeable, and towards evening stormy.
+
+29th. Set sail about 6 A.M. with a strong wind at W. and in the evening
+had reached _Kangertluksoak_ islands.
+
+30th. It blew hard, with snow, and we were obliged to spend the day shut
+up in our small cabin by lamp-light. The land was covered with snow. We
+were detained here very unpleasantly for three days, by the violence of
+the wind and weather.
+
+_October_ 3d. We steered for the promontory of _Kaumayok_; but the wind
+dying away, and at length turning to the South, we could not gain any
+safe harbour, and were obliged to tack about all night in the open sea.
+The weather, however, was mild, and we had the advantage of moon-light.
+
+4th. At 7 A.M. we succeeded in passing the Northern Ikkerasak near cape
+_Mugford_ with the tide, and the wind becoming fair, soon brought us
+among the Okkak islands. About noon we doubled cape _Uivak_, and
+perceived Esquimaux on shore, who ran up the hills, shouted for joy, and
+gave us by signs to understand, that the ship (the brig Jemima, sent
+annually with provisions to the settlements) was still at Okkak.
+
+We cannot describe the inexpressible pleasure and gratitude to God our
+Saviour which we felt, when we again beheld the neighbourhood of Okkak,
+after an absence of fifteen weeks. As soon as the captain descried our
+boat approaching, he hoisted his colours, and fired some guns to give
+notice of our arrival. As we were obliged to tack, to gain the entrance
+to the harbour, he came to meet us in the ship's boat, and about one
+o'clock we landed. The Missionaries and the Esquimaux met us with tears
+of joy and thankfulness, when we all joined in praise to God, who had so
+wonderfully kept His protecting hand over us during this perilous
+voyage, and granted us to return home in safety.
+
+Our voyage lasted from the 24th of June to the 4th of October, and we
+calculated it to be a distance of from 1200 to 1300 miles.
+
+BENJAMIN GOTTLIEB KOHLMEISTER.
+
+GEORGE KMOCH.
+
+[Illustration: _The Northern Extremity of_ LABRADOR with UNGAVA BAY
+Explored by the MISSIONARIES _of the Unitas Fratrum_ in 1811.]
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON
+THE COAST OF LABRADOR, TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 15436-8.txt or 15436-8.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/4/3/15436
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/15436-8.zip b/15436-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e3e688
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-8.zip
diff --git a/15436-h.zip b/15436-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62b52bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-h.zip
diff --git a/15436-h/15436-h.htm b/15436-h/15436-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d203025
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-h/15436-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,3661 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+<html>
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" />
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast of Labrador, to Ungava Bay, Westward of Cape Chudleigh, by Benjamin Kohlmeister and George Kmoch</title>
+  <style type="text/css">
+  /*<![CDATA[*/
+  <!--
+   body                 {margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%;
+                        text-align: justify; font-size: 120%; line-height: 120%}
+   table, td.toc        {padding: .75em 0em 0em 0em}
+   table.pg        {padding: .75em 0em 0em 0em;
+                    font-size: 80%;
+                    line-height: 100%; }
+  .pgt                  {font-size: 80%;
+                         line-height: 100%; }
+  .pgtt                 {font-size: 173%;
+                         line-height: 100%; }
+  .sig                  {margin-left: 10em}
+  .text p               {text-indent: 1.5em; margin-top: 0em;
+                         margin-bottom: .3em;}
+  .synopsis p           {font-style: italic; margin: 1em 2em 1em 2em;}
+  .small p              {text-align: center; font-weight: bold;
+                        font-size: 65%; margin: 0em 2em 0em 2em;}
+  .figure               {padding: 1em; margin: 0; text-align: center;
+                         margin: auto;}
+  h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6     {text-align: center;}
+  h2                    {margin-bottom: 1em;}
+  pre                   {font-size: 0.6em;
+                         line-height: 100%; }
+  hr.light               {margin-right: 25%; margin-left: 25%;}
+  blockquote              {font-size: 90%; margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%;}
+
+    -->
+/*]]>*/
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<h1 class="pgtt">The Project Gutenberg eBook, Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast
+of Labrador, to Ungava Bay, Westward of Cape Chudleigh, by Benjamin
+Kohlmeister and George Kmoch</h1>
+<pre>
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at <a href = "https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre>
+<p class="pgt">Title: Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast of Labrador, to Ungava Bay, Westward of Cape Chudleigh</p>
+<p class="pgt">       Undertaken to Explore the Coast, and Visit the Esquimaux in That Unknown Region</p>
+<p class="pgt">Author: Benjamin Kohlmeister and George Kmoch</p>
+<p class="pgt">Release Date: March 22, 2005  [eBook #15436]</p>
+<p class="pgt">Language: English</p>
+<p class="pgt">Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p>
+<p class="pgt">***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON THE COAST OF LABRADOR, TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH***</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<h4>E-text prepared by Wallace McLean, Cluny,<br />
+    and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br />
+    from page images generously made available by<br />
+    the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions<br />
+    (http://www.canadiana.org/)</h4>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<table class="pg" border="0" cellpadding="10" style="background-color: #ccccff;">
+  <tr>
+    <td valign="top">
+      Note:
+    </td>
+    <td>
+         Images of the original pages are available through the Canadian
+      Institute for Historical Microreproductions. See<br />
+      <a href="http://www.canadiana.org/ECO/ItemRecord/21002?id=fde620f29a76b4fe">
+      http://www.canadiana.org/ECO/ItemRecord/21002?id=fde620f29a76b4fe</a><br />
+      <br />
+      Inconsistencies and irregularities in spelling in the original
+      text have been retained. The table of contents was created for
+      this eBook.
+    </td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="100%" align="center" />
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<a name="page1"></a>
+<h2>JOURNAL</h2>
+
+<h2>OF A <big>&nbsp;VOYAGE&nbsp;</big> FROM</h2>
+
+<h2>OKKAK,</h2>
+
+<h4>ON THE COAST OF <big>LABRADOR</big>,</h4>
+
+<h5>TO</h5>
+
+<h1>UNGAVA BAY,</h1>
+
+<h4>WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH;</h4>
+
+<h5>UNDERTAKEN</h5>
+
+<h4><i>To explore the Coast, and visit the</i> ESQUIMAUX <i>in
+that unknown Region</i>.</h4>
+
+<h5>BY</h5>
+
+<h3>BENJAMIN KOHLMEISTER, AND GEORGE KMOCH,</h3>
+
+<h5>MISSIONARIES OF THE CHURCH OF THE</h5>
+
+<h3><i>UNITAS FRATRUM or</i> UNITED BRETHREN</h3>
+<br />
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="15%" align="center" />
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<br />
+<h2>London:</h2>
+
+<p align="center">
+<b><small><small>Printed by W. M&rsquo;Dowall, Pemberton Row, Gough Square, Fleet Street,</small></small></b>
+</p>
+
+<h5>FOR THE BRETHREN&rsquo;S SOCIETY FOR THE FURTHERANCE OF THE
+GOSPEL AMONG THE HEATHEN. </h5>
+
+<div class="small">
+<p>
+AND SOLD BY J. LE FEBVRE, 2, CHAPEL-PLACE, NEVILS-COURT, FETTER-LANE;<br />
+L. B. SEELEY, 169, FLEET-STREET; HAZARD AND BINNS, BATH;<br />
+AND T. BULGIN, AND T. LAMBE, BRISTOL.
+</p>
+</div>
+
+<h3>1814.</h3>
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="page2"></a>
+<h2>JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE,</h2>
+
+<h2><i>&amp;c. &amp;c.</i></h2>
+
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+
+<h3>CONTENTS</h3>
+
+<table summary="Table of Contents">
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#intro">INTRODUCTION</a></td>
+  <td align="right">3</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch1">CHAPTER I.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">6</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Outfit. Opinions of the Esquimaux respecting the Voyage.
+  Description of the Company. Departure from Okkak. Arrival
+  at Nungorome.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch2">CHAPTER II.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">10</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Departure from Nungorome Cove. Account of Solomon.
+  Drift-ice. Cape Mugford. Waterfalls from the Kaumayok
+  Mountains. Fruitless attempt to get out of the Ikkerasak,
+  or Straits.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch3">CHAPTER III.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">14</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Quit the Ikkerasak. Account of the Kaumayok Mountains, and
+  of Kangertluksoak. Public Worship on Sunday. Saeglek and
+  its Inhabitants described. The Missionaries visit the
+  Esquimaux at Kikkertarsoak.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch4">CHAPTER IV.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">20</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Departure from Saeglek. Fruitless attempt to reach
+  Nachvak. Retreat into Nullatartok Inlet. Slate Bay.
+  Detention on account of the Ice. Arrive at Nachvak.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch5">CHAPTER V.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">27</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Reception at Nachvak. Description of the bay. The
+  Esquimaux manner of spearing salmon and trout. Christian
+  deportment of the Okkak and Hopedale Esquimaux. Jonas&rsquo;s
+  address to the Heathen. Love of music general among these
+  Indians. Departure from Nachvak. Danger in doubling the
+  North Cape. Arrival at Sangmiyok bay.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch6">CHAPTER VI.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">33</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Pass Cape Nennoktok. Visit the Esquimaux families at
+    Kummaktorvik and Amitok. Description of an Esquimaux
+    travelling bed. Mountains seen at Ungava. Netsek seal
+    described. Greenland houses. Danger of being shipwrecked
+    near Kakkeviak.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch7">CHAPTER VII.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">39</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Arrival at Oppernavik. Account of Uttakiyok. His
+    perseverance in waiting for the arrival of the
+    Missionaries. Islands and bays between Kakkeviak and
+    Killinek. Danger in the ice at Ammitok. Want of fuel
+    supplied by robbing old graves.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch8">CHAPTER VIII.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">44</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Departure from Oppernavik. Pass the Ikkerasak of Killinek.
+    Whirlpools. The coast takes a southerly direction. Meeting
+    with Esquimaux from the Ungava country, who had never seen
+    an European. Anchor at Omanek. High tides. Drift-wood.
+    Double Cape Uibvaksoak. Distant view of Akpatok.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch9">CHAPTER IX.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">50</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Chain of black mountains. The Dragon&rsquo;s dwelling. Changes
+    occasioned by rise and fall of the tides, and dangers
+    attending them. Uttakiyok&rsquo;s superstitious customs.
+    Singular effect of the tide in the bay of Ittimnekoktok.
+    Arrive at Kangertlualuksoak bay and river. Its situation.
+    Transactions there.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch10">CHAPTER X.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">56</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Further transactions in Kangertlualuksoak Bay. The
+    Esquimaux women frightened by reports of Indians. Ceremony
+    of taking possession of this new-explored country, as
+    belonging to the King of England, and of naming the river
+    George river. Leave the bay and proceed to Arvarvik.
+    Whales caught by the Esquimaux in the shallows. Storm at
+    Kernertut</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch11">CHAPTER XI.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">62</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Doubts expressed by Jonathan and the other Esquimaux on
+    the expediency of continuing the voyage. Consultations.
+    Resolve to proceed. Thunder-storm at Pitsiolak. Account of
+    Indians. Esquimaux cookery and hunting feasts. Arrival in
+    the river Koksoak.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch12">CHAPTER XII.</a></td>
+  <td align="right">70</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Sail up the river Koksoak. Transactions in that region.
+    Dangerous eddy. Meet Esquimaux. Address to them. Their joy
+    and eagerness to have Missionaries, resident among them.
+    Find a suitable situation for a settlement. Description of
+    the country.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#ch13">CHAPTER XIII.</a></td>
+   <td align="right">77</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>Return to Okkak.</i></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="toc" colspan="2"><a href="#bottom">MAP</a></td>
+  <td align="right">End</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td><i>The Northern Extremity of Labrador with Ungava Bay
+  Explored by the Missionaries of the Unitas Fratrum in 1811.</i></td>
+</tr>
+
+</table>
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="intro"></a>
+<a name="page3"></a>
+<h3>INTRODUCTION.</h3>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>F<small>OR</small> these many years past, a considerable number of
+Esquimaux have been in the annual practice of visiting the three
+missionary establishments of the United Brethren on the coast of
+Labrador, OKKAK, NAIN, and HOPEDALE, chiefly with a view to barter, or
+to see those of their friends and acquaintance, who had become obedient
+to the gospel, and lived together in Christian fellowship, enjoying the
+instruction of the Missionaries.</p>
+
+<p>These people came mostly from the north, and some of them from a
+great distance. They reported, that the body of the Esquimaux nation
+lived near and beyond Cape Chudleigh, which they call Killinek, and
+having conceived much friendship for the Missionaries, never failed to
+request, that some of them would come to their country, and even urged
+the formation of a new settlement, considerably to the north of
+Okkak.</p>
+
+<p>To these repeated and earnest applications the Missionaries were the
+more disposed to listen, as it had been discovered, not many years after
+the establishment of the Mission in 1771, that that part of the coast on
+which, by the encouragement of the British government, the first
+settlement was made, was very thinly inhabited, and that the aim of the
+Mission, to convert the Esquimaux to Christianity, would be <a name="page4"></a> better
+obtained, if access could be had to the main body of the Indians, from
+which the roving inhabitants appeared to be mere stragglers.
+Circumstances, however, prevented more extensive plans from being put in
+execution; and the Missionaries, having gained the confidence and esteem
+of the Esquimaux in their neighbourhood, remained stationary on that
+coast, and, by degrees, formed three settlements, OKKAK, to the north,
+and HOPEDALE, to the south of NAIN, their first place of residence.</p>
+
+<p>In consequence of the abovementioned invitation, it became a subject
+of serious consideration, by what means a more correct idea of the
+extent and dwelling-places of the Esquimaux nation might be obtained,
+and a general wish was expressed, that one or more of the Missionaries
+would undertake the perilous task of visiting such places as were
+reported by the Esquimaux themselves to contain more inhabitants than
+the southern coast, but remained unknown to European navigators.</p>
+
+<p>The Synodal Committee, appointed for the management of the Missions
+of the United Brethren, having given their consent to the measure, and
+agreed with Brother Kohlmeister, by occasion of a visit paid by him to
+his relations and friends in Germany, as to the mode of putting it into
+execution, he returned to Labrador in 1810, and prepared to undertake
+the voyage early in the spring of 1811.</p>
+
+<p>For several years a correspondence had taken place between the
+Missionaries in Labrador and the Brethren&rsquo;s Society for the
+Furtherance of the Gospel, established in London, relating to the manner
+in which the voyage should be performed. Opinions were various on the
+subject; but it was at length determined, that a steady intelligent
+Christian Esquimaux, possessing a shallop, with two masts, and of
+sufficient dimensions, should be appointed to accompany one or two
+Missionaries, for a liberal recompence; and that the travellers should
+spend the winter at Okkak, to be ready to <a name="page5"></a>proceed on the voyage, without
+loss of time, as soon as the state of the ice would permit of it.
+Brother Kohlmeister proposed, in this view, the Esquimaux Jonathan, of
+Hopedale, and the brig employed to convey the annual supply of
+necessaries to the three settlements, was ordered to proceed first to
+Hopedale, partly with a view to this negociation. She arrived safe with
+Brother Kohlmeister at this place, on the 22d July, 1810. On the same
+day, he proposed to Jonathan the intended expedition, laid before him
+the whole plan, with all its difficulties and advantages, and found him
+immediately willing to undertake the voyage, and to forward its object
+by every means in his power.</p>
+
+<p>This was no small sacrifice on the part of Jonathan. An Esquimaux is
+naturally attached to the place of his birth; and, though he spends the
+summer, and indeed great part of the year, necessarily, and from
+inclination, in roving from one place to another in quest of food; yet
+in winter he settles, if possible, upon his native spot, where he is
+esteemed and beloved. This was eminently the case with Jonathan. He was
+a man of superior understanding and skill, possessed of uncommon
+presence of mind in difficulties and dangers, and at Hopedale considered
+as the principal person, or chief of his nation. But he was now ready to
+forsake all, and to go and reside at OKKAK, among strangers, having no
+authority or pre-eminence, and to undertake a voyage of unknown length
+and peril, from whence he could not be sure of a safe or speedy return,
+before the ice might set in, and confine him upon an unknown shore,
+during the whole of a second winter. There was, however, one
+consideration which outweighed every other in his mind, and made him,
+according to his own declaration, forget all difficulties and dangers.
+He hoped that the proposed voyage to visit his countrymen in the north
+would, in time, be a means of their becoming acquainted with the gospel
+of Christ, and partakers of the same blessings which he now enjoyed.
+This made him <a name="page6"></a>willing to accept of the call without any hesitation. Nor
+did he ever, during the whole voyage, forsake that generous principle,
+by which he was at first influenced, but his cheerful, firm, and
+faithful conduct proved, under all circumstances, most honourable to the
+character of a true convert to Christianity.</p>
+
+<p>Brother KOHLMEISTER being, after seventeen years residence in
+Labrador, complete master of the Esquimaux language, and deservedly
+beloved and respected both by Christians and heathens, and possessing an
+invincible zeal to promote their temporal and spiritual welfare, was a
+man eminently qualified to undertake the commission, and to conciliate
+the affections of unknown heathen. He had also previously made himself
+acquainted with the use of the quadrant, and with other branches of
+science, useful on such an occasion.</p>
+
+<p>Brother KMOCH, his companion, joined to other essential
+qualifications, great cheerfulness and intrepidity.</p>
+
+<p>All the parties having met at Okkak, in the autumn of 1810, the
+winter was partly spent in preparations for the intended expedition, and
+Jonathan&rsquo;s boat put into the best possible state of repair.</p>
+</div>
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch1"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER I.</h3>
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Outfit. Opinions of the Esquimaux respecting the Voyage.
+   Description of the Company. Departure from Okkak.
+   Arrival at Nungorome.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="text">
+<p>J<small>UNE</small> 16, 1811.&mdash;T<small>HE </small>ice began to loosen in the bay of
+OKKAK, and to drive out to sea. On the 17th, the bay was
+quite cleared of it; but on the 18th, it returned, and seemed
+to preclude all possibility of setting out so soon as we intended.
+On the 19th, however, it left us entirely.</p>
+
+<a name="page7"></a><p>20th. We were employed in hauling the boat to the edge
+of the water, and being floated by the tide, she came to
+anchor at six, P.M. She had been purchased by Jonathan,
+at Chateau-bay, and was about 45 feet long, twelve
+broad, and five deep, with two masts. We had furnished
+her with a complete deck, and divided her into three parts.
+The centre was our own cabin, into which all our baggage
+was stowed: the two other divisions were occupied by the
+Esquimaux. A small boat, brought from Lewis, was taken
+in tow.</p>
+
+<p>21st. We began to ship our provision and baggage: viz.
+six cwt. of ship&rsquo;s biscuit, sixteen bushels of pease, one cwt.
+of salt pork and best beef, (of which but a small portion was
+consumed, as we were generally well supplied with fresh
+provisions, procured by shooting), a firkin of butter, half
+cwt. of captain&rsquo;s biscuit, one cwt. of flour, two small barrels
+of gunpowder, one cwt. of large and small shot, half
+cwt. of tobacco, two eighteen-gallon barrels of ale, a few
+bottles of brandy, eighteen pounds of coffee, which was all
+consumed, coffee and biscuits being our usual repast; a
+case containing knives, wire, nails, &amp;c. for barter, if necessary;
+kettles and other utensils. Besides that every man
+had his fowling-piece, we had four muskets in reserve.
+After bringing all on board, we had just room enough to
+sleep in our cabin.</p>
+
+<p>22d, was spent in conferring with our brethren, on various
+subjects relating to the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>23d. All the Esquimaux met at the chapel, and in the
+most affectionate manner, and with many tears, bid us and
+our company farewell. They were the more affected with
+grief on this occasion, as the greatest part of our own Esquimaux
+thought the voyage impracticable, and expected
+that we should all perish in doubling Cape Chudleigh,
+(Killinek) on account of the violence of the currents, setting
+round between the cape, and the many rocks and islands
+<a name="page8"></a>which stretch from it towards the north. Reports had likewise
+been circulated of the hostile disposition of the Esquimaux
+in the Ungava bay; and it was boldly asserted, that
+if we even got there alive, we should never return. An old
+conjuror, (Angekok), <i>Atsugarsuk</i>, had been particularly
+active in spreading these reports. We cannot deny but that
+they occasioned some apprehension in our own minds, but
+being fully determined to venture in the name of God, and
+trusting in His protection, we were thankful that they failed
+to produce the intended effect on Jonathan, our guide, and
+on the other Esquimaux, who were to go with us, and who
+all remained firm.</p>
+
+<p>When Jonathan was told that the Ungava Esquimaux
+would kill him, he generally answered: &ldquo;Well, we will try,
+and shall know better when we get there:&rdquo; and once,
+conversing with us on the subject, expressed himself thus:
+&ldquo;When I hear people talking about the danger of being
+killed, I think: Jesus went to death out of love to us,
+what great matter would it be, if we were to be put to
+death in His service, should that be His good pleasure
+concerning us.&rdquo;</p>
+
+<p>24th. Having commended ourselves in prayer to the grace
+and protecting care of God our Saviour, and to the kind
+remembrance of our dear fellow missionaries, we set sail at
+two P.M.</p>
+
+<p>Our company consisted of four Esquimaux families:
+1. <i>Jonathan</i>, and his wife <i>Sybilla</i>, both between fifty and
+sixty years old. He was esteemed one of the most skilful
+commanders on the whole coast of Labrador, and for many
+years has shown himself both able and willing to serve the
+missionaries in a variety of ways. The boat was his own
+property, and we considered him as the captain of the
+expedition. 2. <i>Jonas</i>, Jonathan&rsquo;s son, and his wife <i>Agnes</i>,
+about thirty years of age, both intelligent, clever Esquimaux;
+they had their five children with them; <i>Sophia</i>, twelve years
+<a name="page9"></a>old, <i>Susanna</i>, <i>Jonathan</i>, <i>Thamar</i>, and <i>Sybilla</i>, the youngest
+but half a year old. 3. <i>Paul</i>, and his wife <i>Mary</i>, very
+agreeable, sensible people, about twenty years of age. Paul
+is Jonathan&rsquo;s cousin, and a man of a very warm temper.
+In activity and skill, he was next to Jonathan. 4. <i>David</i>,
+and his mother <i>Rachel</i>, the first a hopeful young man of
+about twenty, and the latter a good-natured old woman,
+who had the care of our clothes and linen, and kept them
+clean and in good order. Besides these four families, we
+took with us a boy, <i>Okkiksuk</i>, an orphan, about sixteen,
+whom Jonathan had adopted, and who promised to reward
+the kindness of his guardian by his good behaviour. He
+was always ready to render us every service in his power.</p>
+
+<p>We were attended on the voyage by a skin-boat (or woman&rsquo;s
+boat) in which were <i>Thukkekina</i> and his wife, and
+their adopted child <i>Mammak</i>, a boy twelve years old. Their
+age is about forty. The skin-boat was intended as a refuge,
+in case of any accident happening to our own boat, and was
+useful in landing, as we never brought the large boat close
+in shore. The first four families belong to Hopedale, Thukkekina
+and his wife to Okkak. They considered it as a great
+favour conferred on them to be permitted to accompany us.
+<i>Jonas</i> and his family occupied the after-part, and the rest
+the fore-part of the boat. The wind was moderate, and due
+west. We lost sight of our habitations in about half an
+hour, behind the N.E. point of the island Okkak, called
+Sungolik.</p>
+
+<p>At three, passed Cape Uivak, a cape on the continent,
+forming a moderately high headland, and the nearest place
+to Okkak, where Esquimaux spend the winter. Two or three
+winter-houses were standing.</p>
+
+<p>The wind failing, we cast off the skin-boat, which rowed
+merrily a-head. Before us, between the islands to the east
+and the continent, we saw much drift-ice, and it required attention
+to avoid the large shoals, the wind coming round
+<a name="page10"></a>to the N.W. We cast anchor at NUNGOROME, a cove about
+ten English miles from Okkak, where we found several of
+our Esquimaux, who had here their summer-station. Several
+had come from Naujasiorvik and other places, on purpose to
+meet us, and once more to express their affection and best
+wishes for our safe voyage and return. Late in the evening,
+we met on a green spot, where Brother Kohlmeister delivered
+a short discourse and prayer, after which we retired to sleep
+on board the boat.</p>
+</div>
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr align="center" noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" />
+<a name="ch2"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER II.</h3>
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Departure from Nungorome Cove. Account of Solomon. Drift-ice. Cape
+Mugford. Waterfalls from the Kaumayok Mountains. Fruitless attempt to
+get out of the Ikkerasak, or Straits.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>N<small>UNGOROME</small> is a cove on the south side of the Island Pacharvik.
+Between this island the main land is a narrow strait, so shallow that no
+whales can pass. The Esquimaux stretch their nets across, to catch
+seals, seeking shelter in it when the wind sets in from the open sea.
+They can only be taken in the night, and the greater part of those which
+frequent this coast are of the <i>Kairolik</i> kind, a middle-sized
+animal, and of the <i>Ugsuk</i>, the largest species of the seal tribe,
+weighing sometimes from five to six cwt.</p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux belonging to our congregation, who were at present
+stationed here, in tents, were <i>Moses</i>, <i>Samuel</i>,
+<i>Thomas</i>, <i>Isaac</i>, <i>Bammiuk</i>, and their families.
+<i>Solomon</i>, who has left our communion, was also here. He had
+formerly been a communicant member of Okkak congregation, but could not
+resist the temptation of going to the north to feast with the heathen
+Esquimaux, whenever they had <a name="page11"></a>caught a live, or found a dead whale. On
+such occasions he was seduced to commit many irregularities and sins,
+but always returned to us with a show of great contrition and
+repentance. After many relapses, he was informed, that this would do no
+longer, but that if he went again to these heathenish feasts, he would
+be excluded. He is a sensible, well-disposed man, and perceived the
+justice of the sentence; but his love of that species of amusement
+overcame all his good resolutions. He not only went again, but took also
+another wife; a step which, of course, excluded him from our fellowship.
+Yet he is very desirous that his children may receive a Christian
+education, and remain faithful to the precepts of the gospel.</p>
+
+<p>25th. Brother Kmoch rose at half past one in the morning, and
+suffering the rest to sleep on, got breakfast ready; he then fired his
+piece, by which Brother Kohlmeister and all the Esquimaux, young and
+old, were suddenly roused from their slumbers. Not one, however,
+regretted the unexpected interruption to their pleasant dreams, on
+beholding the sea quite free from ice, with a fine morning and fair
+wind; but after yawning, stretching, and shaking themselves as usual,
+the Esquimaux with great good humour got ready, and we set sail at half
+past three. Passed Pacharvik Island at four. Bammiuk and Solomon
+accompanied us as far as the North Ikkerasak (the Esquimaux name for a
+strait) between Cape Mugford Island, in 58&deg; N. latitude, and the
+mountains of Kaumayok. Their being in company retarded our progress, but
+in the sequel proved no disadvantage.</p>
+
+<p>About nine, we entered the straits, and perceiving at a distance much
+drift-ice a-head, cast anchor, and Brother Kmoch and Jonas landed on
+Cape Mugford Island. An Esquimaux, called <i>Niakungetok</i>,
+accompanied them to the top of an eminence, from whence the outer
+opening of the Ikkerasak was seen. They perceived the ice driving into
+it from the sea in such quantities as to threaten to close it up. Cape
+Mugford is an high island, extending far into the <a name="page12"></a>ocean, and the
+northern land-mark in steering for Okkak, <i>Kiglapeit</i> promontory
+bearing south, and the Saddle-island appearing right before the entrance
+of the bay. On their return to the boat, the wind veered to the north,
+and we steered for a dwelling-place of the Esquimaux, about twenty miles
+from Okkak, called <i>Ukkuararsuk</i>. To our great joy the ice began
+now to drive out again to sea, and we resolved to go with it. A gentle
+S.W. wind brought us to the place, where we had before anchored, but we
+were now beset with large fields of ice, among which we tacked, till we
+had nearly cleared the straits, when the great quantity of surrounding
+ice, pressing upon us, prevented our making further attempts, and we,
+were compelled to work our way back with oars and boat-hooks.</p>
+
+<p>On Cape Mugford island we now discovered more Esquimaux, who by signs
+directed our course towards a convenient harbour, near their dwellings,
+which we reached in safety.</p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux pitched their tents on shore, but we slept on
+board.</p>
+
+<p>The situation of this place is remarkably beautiful. The strait is
+about an English mile broad, and four or five in length. Both shores are
+lined with precipitous rocks, which in many places rise to a tremendous
+height, particularly on the Kaumayok side, from whence several
+waterfalls rush into the sea, with a roar, which quite fills the air.
+The singular appearance of these cataracts is greatly increased when
+illuminated by the rising sun, the spray, exhibiting the most beautiful
+prismatic colours. Below them huge masses of ice are formed, which seem
+to lean against the sides of the rocks, and to be continually increasing
+during the winter, but when melted by the power of a summer&rsquo;s sun,
+and disengaged by their weight, are carried off by the tides, and help
+to form floating ice-mountains. The coast lies S.W. by N.E.</p>
+
+<a name="page13"></a><p>26th. Being detained here by the state of the ice, and the weather
+fine and warm, Brother Kmoch and Ogiksuk rowed across the straits to the
+nearest great cataract, and were able, notwithstanding the steepness of
+the ascent, to get pretty close to it. It falls fifty or sixty feet
+perpendicular, and the noise is terrible. The spray ascending from it,
+like the steam of a huge cauldron, wetted the travellers completely.
+They amused themselves some time by rolling large stones into the fall,
+which by its force were carried along towards the sea, down the sloping
+torrent below. Our people meanwhile caught three seals, and made a
+hearty meal, of which we also partook, hunger, on this occasion,
+overcoming our dislike to seal&rsquo;s flesh. A sallad of scurvy-grass
+was made for supper.</p>
+
+<p>27th. We left this harbour about four A.M. with a favourable wind at
+West, but as it soon died away, we took to our oars, and reached the
+north point of Kaumayok, at the northern extremity of the strait. By an
+observation taken by Brother Kohlmeister, this point is situated in
+57&deg; 59' N. latitude. Though calm, there was a great swell from
+the sea, and the rolling of the boat affected our brave captain not a
+little, to the diversion of the other Esquimaux. About two P.M. the wind
+shifted to the N.W. By tacking we got to Kupperlik, about the middle of
+Kaumayok, but having the skin-boat in tow, could not weather the point,
+and were at length obliged to return to our former anchorage in the
+strait.</p>
+
+<p>28th. The wind being North we could not proceed. We therefore
+ascended the mountain of Cape Mugford. It is a barren rock, though here
+and there a solitary plant or a tuft of moss clings to its steep sides,
+and is difficult of access. The numerous waterfalls on the Kaumayok,
+which still rose above us, were full in view, and we now discovered
+several small lakes which supply them. Some of them fall from a great
+height perpendicularly into the sea.</p>
+
+<a name="page14"></a><p>We could here discern the island of Okkak, to the S.W. to the East,
+the boundless ocean, and to the N.E. three high, barren, and steep
+islands, called Nennoktuts by the Esquimaux, (White mountains.)</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch3"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER III.</h3>
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Quit the Ikkerasak. Account of the Kaumayok Mountains,
+and of Kangertluksoak. Public Worship on Sunday.
+Saeglek and its Inhabitants described. The Missionaries
+visit the Esquimaux at Kikkertarsoak.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="text">
+<p>J<small>UNE</small> 29th.&mdash;W<small>E</small> rose soon after two o&rsquo;clock, and rowed out of the
+Ikkerasak, with a fair wind. The sea was perfectly calm and smooth.
+Brother Kmoch rowed in the small boat along the foot of the mountains of
+Kaumayok, sometimes going on shore, while the large boat was making but
+little way, keeping out at some distance, to avoid the rocks. The
+outline of this chain of mountains exhibits the most fanciful figures.
+At various points, the rocks descend abruptly into the sea, presenting
+horrid precipices. The strand is covered with a black sand. At the
+height of about fifty feet from the sea, the rocks have veins of red,
+yellow, and green stone, running horizontally and parallel; and
+sometimes in an undulated form. Above these, they present the appearance
+of a magnificent colonade, or rather of buttresses, supporting a gothic
+building, varying in height and thickness, and here and there
+intersected by wide and deep chasms and glens, running far inland
+between the mountains. Loose stones above, have in some places the
+appearance of statues, and the superior region exhibits all kind of
+grotesque shapes. It is by far the most singular and picturesque chain
+of mountains on this coast. To the highest part of it we gave the name
+<a name="page15"></a>of St. Pauls, as it is not unlike that cathedral when viewed at a
+distance, with its dome and two towers.</p>
+
+<p>Before we left the Kaumayok, Brother Kohlmeister landed, and found
+the beach covered with blocks of stone, in colour white and grey, like
+statuary marble, but very hard. We now steered for
+<i>Kangertluksoak</i>, a winter-station of the Esquimaux, where several
+of our people had pitched their tents.</p>
+
+<p>At noon, we were off an island, called <i>Eingosiarsuk</i>, (the
+Little Cup), opposite the <i>Ittiplek</i>, (a flat piece of ground
+joining two headlands) over which the northern Esquimaux pass in sledges
+to Okkak, round Kaumayok. Farther towards the N.W. lies
+<i>Tuppertalik</i>, a high ridge of mountains, which, from its
+appearance, we called the Table mountain, having nearly the shape of the
+mountain so called at the Cape of Good Hope.</p>
+
+<p>To the north lies <i>Nellekartok,</i> the outermost island on leaving
+the Ikkerasak, and the first of the <i>Kangertluksoak</i> islands.
+Behind <i>Tuppertalik</i>, a bay opens called <i>Nappartok</i> (a wood),
+a winter-habitation, with a little wood higher up the country, about
+eight or ten hours drive from Okkak. A good harbour for large vessels is
+said to be here, called <i>Umiakovitannak,</i> (Broad boat-harbour).
+Before the entrance to <i>Nappartok</i>, lies an island,
+<i>Naujartsit</i> (the Little Sea-gull island). Seven or eight miles,
+north of Nappertok, a long flat point runs out, terminated by a small
+island. On approaching towards Kangertluksoak, a long island runs
+parallel with the coast called <i>Illuektulik</i>, (a burial-place),
+between which and the main land is a strait, affording good shelter for
+boats. Into this Jonathan intended to run, but the wind being
+favourable, we kept on our course, and passed two islands,
+<i>Kingmiktok</i>, (Dog island), and farther north, <i>Kikkertarsoak</i>
+a great island which defends the entrance into the harbour of
+<i>Kangertluksoak,</i> from the sea. At ten P.M. we came to an anchor in
+the harbour, and were <a name="page16"></a>received by our Esquimaux, of whom several
+families were stationed here, as well as by the other inhabitants, with
+demonstrations of great joy. Both the heathen who kept on the right side
+of the great bay, and our own Christian Esquimaux, on the left, fired
+numberless shots to welcome us. Several boats were here from
+<i>Kittinek</i> and <i>Nachvak</i> bound to Okkak.</p>
+
+<p><i>Kangertluksoak</i> lies about sixty miles north of Okkak, is an
+agreeable place, and has a good strand, and safe anchorage.</p>
+
+<p>30th. Being Sunday, the Missionaries went on shore, and visited all
+the Christian families, by whom they were received with the most lively
+expressions of affection and gratitude. Many strangers from the opposite
+coast had joined them, and they all seated themselves in a large circle
+on the grass.</p>
+
+<p><i>Nikupsuk&rsquo;s</i> wife, Louisa, who had long ago forsaken the
+believers, was here, and said, with much apparent contrition, that she
+was unworthy to be numbered with them. She then seated herself at a
+little distance from the rest.</p>
+
+<p>The number of the congregation, including our boat&rsquo;s company,
+amounted to about fifty. Brother Kohlmeister first addressed them, by
+greeting them from their brethren at Okkak, and expressing our joy at
+finding them well in health, and our hopes, that they were all walking
+worthy of their Christian profession, as a good example to their heathen
+neighbours. Then the Litany was read, and a spirit of true devotion
+pervaded the whole assembly.</p>
+
+<p>Our very hearts rejoiced in this place, which had but lately been a
+den of murderers, dedicated, as it were, by the angekoks, or sorcerers,
+to the service of the devil, to hear the cheerful voices of converted
+heathen, most melodiously sounding forth the praises of God, and giving
+glory to the name of Jesus their Redeemer. Peace, and cheerful
+countenances dwelt in the tents of the believing Esquimaux.</p>
+
+<a name="page17"></a><p>Our people had caught a large white-fish, and pressed us much to be
+their guests, which we should have accepted of with pleasure, but we
+thought it prudent to avail ourselves of the favourable wind and
+weather, to proceed. Instead, therefore, of dining with them, we
+presented to each tent a quart of pease, which is considered by the
+Esquimaux as a great luxury, and was received with unbounded
+thankfulness.</p>
+
+<p>About noon we set sail, with a brisk wind at S.E. for <i>Saeglek</i>.
+The coast presents here, moderately high, barren mountains, without bays
+or islands. The wind becoming more violent, the rope, by which we kept
+the skin-boat in tow, suddenly snapt, and set her adrift. She was
+frequently hid from our view by the height of the waves, but we were in
+no apprehension about her, as these kind of boats are much safer in a
+high sea, than a European one.</p>
+
+<p>At seven P.M. we arrived at <i>Saeglek</i>, and were saluted by the
+firing of muskets and bonfires on the hills. The Esquimaux have their
+dwellings on a small flat island, between two of larger size, but the
+strand is bad, and full of sharp shingles. There are about five or six
+winter-houses at Saeglek, containing each about two or three
+families.</p>
+
+<p>July 1st. Early, two Esquimaux men, <i>Joas</i> and <i>Uiverunna,</i>
+came in their kayaks to pay us a visit. They, with their families,
+inhabited some tents we had seen yesterday. Brother Kohlmeister spoke
+seriously to them on the necessity of conversion, especially to Joas,
+who had Christian parents, and as a child, was baptized at Okkak. He
+reminded him of his having been devoted to Jesus from his birth; that he
+therefore ought not to belong to the unbelievers, but to Him who had
+created and redeemed him; and that the greatest of all the sins he now
+committed, was his persisting in his determination not to return. He
+seemed to listen with some humility to the loving and earnest reproof
+and exhortations of the Missionary, but at last excused himself by
+<a name="page18"></a>laying the blame upon his mother, who kept him back, adding, that he
+still intended to be converted.</p>
+
+<p>Our people had meanwhile made a fire, and put the pot on to boil
+pease; but the wind changing, Jonathan determined immediately to
+proceed. The pease had just begun to swell, and as the two Esquimaux had
+presented us with some fresh meat, they had been asked to partake of our
+meal; but finding themselves thus disappointed, they fell to, and having
+greedily devoured a quantity of the half-boiled pease, and filled their
+gloves with the rest, they took leave, and set sail about 11, A.M.</p>
+
+<p>Hearing from some Esquimaux who made towards us in their kayaks, that
+the Saeglek people were all on the north side of the island of
+Kikkertarsoak, we proceeded thither, and having doubled the point, saw
+seven tents full of people. Two of them contained families from
+Killinek. But the violence of the wind was such, that we could not stay
+in this unsheltered place with safety. We therefore worked our way, with
+the help of the Esquimaux, round another point, into a roadstead, rather
+more sheltered than the former, though open to the sea. A little tobacco
+is the reward expected and given for such assistance.</p>
+
+<p>The beach is composed of numberless black pebbles, polished by the
+sea, and each about the size of an hen&rsquo;s egg.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Kohlmeister immediately landed, and visited the Esquimaux in
+their tents. Many heathen were at this place, to whom he preached the
+gospel, and invited them to believe in Jesus, as the Saviour of men, who
+would deliver them from the love, power, and curse of sin, having shed
+His blood, and died on the cross, to redeem their souls. He was heard
+with great attention. A venerable old man, with hair as white as wool,
+particularly attracted our notice. He called Brother Kohlmeister by
+name, took hold of both his hands, and begged him to sit down by him.
+Brother Kohlmeister inquired, whether he knew him. The old man <a name="page19"></a>replied:
+&ldquo;Thou art Benjamin, often have I heard thy name at Okkak. I
+therefore rejoice to see thee.&rdquo; He seemed quite at a loss, what
+way to express his affection; and at length delivered a strap of
+seals&rsquo;-leather to Mr. Kohlmeister, with these words: &ldquo;I am
+poor, and have nothing else to give thee, yet I wish to give thee some
+token of my love.&rdquo; Brother Kohlmeister accepted of his present,
+and inwardly cried to the Lord, to show mercy to this poor ignorant
+heathen. &ldquo;You are old,&rdquo; said he, &ldquo;and have not much
+more time to live in this world, will you not turn to that Jesus, who
+has died for your sins also? It is not His desire that you should
+perish, and be lost in everlasting darkness, but that you should live
+with Him in the place of light and immortal bliss.&rdquo; The old man
+replied: &ldquo;What shall I do? thy words are very pleasant, and I
+would fain hear much more of Jesus. I do not wish to be lost in the
+place of darkness.&rdquo; Brother Kohlmeister answered, that if he
+sincerely wished to be saved, and was troubled on account of his sinful
+life he should believe in, and call on the name of Jesus, who would
+certainly hear and reveal Himself unto him. Many people were present in
+the tent, who behaved with great decency, and whom Brother Kohlmeister
+earnestly addressed on the necessity of conversion. He wished to prolong
+the conversation especially with the old man, who promised, that he
+would never forget the words spoken to him, but it was growing late, and
+we returned to our cabin. The poor old man having sore legs, some
+medicine was left for him.</p>
+
+<p>The passage from Kangertluksoak to Saeglek is about twenty English
+miles. Saeglek is a considerable promontory, open to the south.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch4"></a>
+<a name="page20"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER IV.</h3>
+
+<div class="synopsis">
+
+<p>Departure from Saeglek. Fruitless attempt to reach Nachvak.
+Retreat into Nullatartok Inlet. Slate Bay. Detention
+on account of the Ice. Arrive at Nachvak.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>J<small>ULY</small> 2d.&mdash;A<small>T</small> one A.M. we set sail, steering for <i>Nachvak</i>, a
+distance of about thirty miles. Here a chain of mountains
+runs north and south, nearly parallel with the coast. The
+coast itself is of moderate height, but very steep, and not
+being defended by any island, the approach to it as a lee-shore,
+is very dangerous. It runs generally in a pretty strait
+line about forty miles, when a wide bay opens, in which lies,
+towards the north, an island called <i>Karngalersiorvik</i>, where
+there is said to be a good harbour for boats. The rocks, of
+which the mountains are composed, are of a white grey
+colour, streaked almost perpendicularly with veins of black
+stone, about two feet broad. The intermediate strata may
+be about eight times as broad. We had hoped to reach
+Nachvak in the morning, by continuing our course through
+the following night, though the wind was weak and variable,
+but in the evening we got into drift-ice: yet as the shoals
+were not close together, we worked our way through them;
+and stood on with the little wind we had at S.E.</p>
+
+<p>3d. At dawn of day, and being still four miles distant from
+Nachvak, we perceived both in the open sea, and all along the
+shore, that our passage was completely occupied with floating
+ice, which drove towards us, and forced us back. We then
+endeavoured to find shelter in a bay bounded by high mountains,
+but found none, the wind driving the ice after us into
+it, and soon filling it. Jonathan frequently cried out with a
+plaintive voice: &ldquo;Alas, alas, we shall soon be without a
+boat!&rdquo; We now hastened to the opposite shore to find some
+<a name="page21"></a>cove or inlet, but getting more and more entangled among
+the ice, were at last obliged, some to land, and haul the
+boat with ropes round the points, and others with boat-hooks
+and spars, to keep her off the rocks. Two or three
+times she stuck fast on sunken rocks, but by God&rsquo;s mercy
+always got off again without damage. At length we discovered
+three narrow inlets, the middlemost forming a bay,
+being the estuary of a river, which runs W.S.W. about
+eight or ten miles up the country, and is called Nullatartok.
+Into this we pushed, when shortly after our entrance, the ice
+entirely filled up the passage, and we were compelled to
+retreat to the uppermost part, choosing the shallowest possible
+spot to anchor in. The bay itself is about two miles
+in breadth, and only in the middle deep enough to admit
+the larger fields of drift ice to float into it. The strand is
+broad, and slopes off gently. It is covered with large tables
+of slate. The mountains on each side are high, and seem to
+consist of ferruginous slate, the lamina or plates of which
+are of such immense size, that they might serve for entire
+walls. Towards the sea, there exudes from these rocks, a
+yellowish white substance, which has a strong sulphureous
+smell. It was so powerful, that if a drop fell on a piece of
+tinned iron, it removed the tin in a few minutes.</p>
+
+<p>The vallies in the neighbourhood were green and full of
+flowers.</p>
+
+<p>Not far from the spot where we had pitched our tents,
+(which rested upon a carpet of <i>potentilla aurea</i>, in full bloom,
+bringing to our minds the European meadows, full of butter-cups),
+the river, which is of considerable breadth, falls into
+the bay. It abounds with fine salmon-trout. Farther to the
+westward, two other rivers flow into it, one of which is much
+broader than the other, and has a large cataract at some distance
+from its mouth. The upper parts of the mountains are
+covered partly with moss, and partly with low brush-wood,
+birch, and alder, and many berry-bearing shrubs and plants,
+<a name="page22"></a>but no high trees. We found here both arnica and colts-foot
+in great plenty. Brother Kohlmeister gathered and dried a
+quantity of each, as they are used in medical cases, and the
+former cannot be procured from England.</p>
+
+<p>The slate is extremely shivery, and is found in slabs, either
+lying or standing upright from four to eight feet square,
+most easily splitting into thin plates. Ascending the mountain,
+they are soon dislodged, by the tread of a man&rsquo;s foot,
+and glide down towards the beach with a rattling, tinkling
+noise. At low water, we noticed a bed of stone resembling
+cast iron, of a reddish hue, and polished by the friction of
+the water. After supping on salmon-trout, caught in the
+first-mentioned river, we retired to rest; but had some fears
+even here for the safety of our boat, the ice pushing in towards
+us, and our people being employed day and night in
+warding off the large shoals with their boat-hooks.</p>
+
+<p>4th. The weather being fair, Brother Kmoch ascended to
+the top of the highest part of the mountain near us, from
+whence he could see nothing but drift-ice, powerfully in motion
+towards the bay. Four of our Esquimaux went up the
+country to hunt reindeer; saw eight head and two fawns;
+but got none.</p>
+
+<p>Perceiving that our abode in this place might be of some
+duration, we for the first time pitched our tents on shore.
+Our morning and evening devotion was attended by the whole
+party; and on Sundays we read the Litany, and conducted
+the service in the usual way, which proved to us and our
+Esquimaux of great comfort and encouragement in all difficulties.
+We were detained here, by the ice, from the 3d to
+the 15th, and our faith and patience were frequently put
+to the trial. Meanwhile we found much pleasure in walking
+up the declivities of the hills, and into the fine green and
+flowery vallies around us.</p>
+
+<p>5th. We went up the western extremity of the bay, but
+found nothing worth notice. Here the rocks appeared to be
+of a species of freestone.</p>
+
+<a name="page23"></a><p>6th. In the evening we met in Jonathan&rsquo;s tent. Brother
+Kohlmeister addressed the company, and reminded them,
+that to-day the holy communion would be celebrated in our
+congregations, which we could not do in this place, under
+present circumstances. Then kneeling down, he offered up
+a fervent prayer, entreating the Lord not to forget us in this
+wilderness, but to give us to feel His all-reviving presence,
+and to feed our hungry and thirsty souls, out of the fulness
+of His grace. A comfortable sense of His love and peace filled
+all our hearts on this occasion.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening, Paul began to read out of the Harmony
+of the four Evangelists, which we shall continue as often as
+circumstances will admit of it. Jonathan and Jonas generally
+conduct the daily morning and evening worship.</p>
+
+<p>7th. We were so hard pressed by the ice driving towards
+us, that we were obliged in part to unload the boat, to be
+able to bring it into a safer situation in shallow water; and
+took our turns, three relieving three, to watch and guard off
+the larger shoals with boat-hooks, by day and night. We
+were glad to have reached a place, sheltered on all sides from
+the wind.</p>
+
+<p>8th. Our people went out to look for reindeer, and no
+prospect of our proceeding to sea appearing, they resolved
+to stay out all night.</p>
+
+<p>9th. Jonas returned and reported, that they had seen
+reindeer, but were not able to shoot any. Paul and Thukkekina
+went to-day to the western mountains, and staid over
+night.</p>
+
+<p>10th. Brother Kmoch went to the westward to look for
+birds. He saw a large flight of sea-fowl, but they were extremely
+shy, and would not permit him to get near them.
+From the hills around us, we perceived that the entrance into
+the bay was completely blocked up with ice; and towards the
+sea, nothing but one continued field of ice appeared. We
+sighed and prayed to the Lord to help us in this time of need.
+<a name="page24"></a>Jonas went out in his kayak, and shot an <i>ugsuk</i>, not far from
+our tent. Towards evening, we saw a fire made by our
+reindeer-hunters, at the western extremity of the bay, and
+they fired their pieces to give us notice, that they had got some
+game, and that we should fetch it with the small boat.</p>
+
+<p>Okkiksuk therefore went, and found them completely overcome
+with fatigue, having dragged their game, across the
+mountains for a considerable distance. The Esquimaux are
+indeed able to carry burdens up and down hill, under which
+most Europeans would sink, but when they kill a deer far
+inland, it is hard-earned food, by the trouble of carrying it
+home. Paul had shot two reindeer, of which we received a
+portion. Brother Kohlmeister had been on the other side
+of the bay, and returned with a large parcel of plants and
+flowers, the examination of which afforded him much amusement.</p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux now boiled a large kettle full of seal&rsquo;s
+flesh, of which we were invited to partake. This we did,
+and thought it a very palatable mess, particularly as we had
+tasted no fresh meat since we had left the North Ikkerasak.
+The prejudice of the Europeans against seal&rsquo;s flesh, consists
+mostly in imagination. The dirty kettle in which the Esquimaux
+boil it, is indeed not calculated to excite an appetite,
+but the meat, when eaten fresh, tastes much like beef;
+when cold, it acquires an oily taste; nor durst a person, not
+accustomed to it from his childhood, make a practice of eating
+it, as it is of a very heating nature, and would soon bring
+on serious disorders. It generally prevents sleep, if eaten at
+supper.</p>
+
+<p>12th. The wind became West, and cleared the bay of the
+ice. Brother Kmoch and Jonathan went to the opposite shore
+and found winter-houses, one of which had been inhabited
+last winter; two others were in ruins. They climbed the
+highest eminence towards Nachvak, but saw nothing but
+drift-ice, covering the sea, with but few spots of open water,
+to the north.</p>
+
+<a name="page25"></a><p>13th. It blew hard from the West. David and Okkiksuk
+crossed the bay to explore the state of the ice from the hills.
+In the evening they returned with intelligence, that the sea
+was cleared of ice to the northward. David had caught a
+netsek, (a small species of seal), and we had taken a good
+draught of trout in the net before our tent.</p>
+
+<p>14th. Jonathan roused us at four in the morning, the
+wind being in our favour, and we immediately made preparations
+to depart. After breakfast, as we were praying the
+Litany, a sudden storm arose. We were assembled in Jonathan&rsquo;s
+tent, and the stones and pegs, with which it had
+been fastened down to the ground, being already removed,
+the tent-skins were soon blown about our heads by the violence
+of the wind, and we were now obliged patiently to
+wait till the storm abated. In the midst of our deliberations,
+accompanied with expressions of our disappointment,
+Thukkekina gravely observed, that we might very likely get
+away this summer, and need not be dismayed. Towards
+evening, it fell calm, and the musquitoes teazed us unmercifully.
+We supped on fresh salmon, filled our tents
+with smoke, to keep off our winged tormentors, shut ourselves
+in, and forgot our grievances and Thukkekina&rsquo;s
+consolations in sound sleep.</p>
+
+<p>15th. In the morning at three o&rsquo;clock, we took a final
+leave of Nullatartok bay, and got under way with a favourable,
+though rather boisterous wind at S.W. having been
+detained here for twelve days by the ice. After about an
+hour&rsquo;s sail, we were near the entrance of the inlet, when a
+sudden gust from the mountains carried away our after-top-mast,
+with sail and tackle. It fell with great noise on the
+deck, and into the sea. By God&rsquo;s mercy no one was hurt,
+and we were more particularly thankful, that of the five
+children on board, none were just then on deck.</p>
+
+<p>It once happened, that the main-yard fell down, and but
+narrowly missed striking two children, who with a third
+<a name="page26"></a>were sitting and playing together. They must inevitably
+have lost their lives, had it fallen upon them. We praised
+God for their preservation during the whole voyage. By the
+above-mentioned disaster, we were obliged to run into a
+small cove, where we repaired the mast with all speed, and
+proceeded with a gentle wind towards Nachvak, A calm
+ensued, and as there is no anchorage between Nullatartok
+and Nachvak, we rowed all night, and felt the advantage of
+the great length of days, at this season of the year.</p>
+
+<p>16th. The view we had of the magnificent mountains of
+Nachvak, especially about sun-rise, afforded us and our Esquimaux
+great gratification. Their south-east extremity
+much resembles Saddle island near Okkak, being high,
+steep, and of singular shape. These mountains in general
+are not unlike those of Kaumayok for picturesque outline.
+In one place, tremendous precipices form a vast amphitheatre,
+surmounted by a ledge of green sod, which
+seemed to be the resort of an immense number of sea-gulls
+and other fowls, never interrupted by the intrusion of man.
+They flew with loud screams backwards and forwards over
+our heads, as if to warn off such unwelcome visitors. In
+another place, a narrow chasm opens into the mountain,
+widening into a lagoon, the surrounding rocks resembling
+the ruins of a large Gothic building, with the green ocean
+for its pavement, and the sky for its dome. The weather
+being fine, and the sun cheering us with his bright rays, after
+a cold and sleepless night, we seemed to acquire new vigour,
+by the contemplation of the grand features of nature
+around us. We now perceived some Esquimaux with a woman&rsquo;s
+boat, in a small bay, preparing to steer for Nachvak.
+They fired their pieces, and called to us to join them, as they
+had discovered a stranded whale. Going on shore to survey
+the remains of this huge animal, we found it by no means a
+pleasant sight. It lay upon the rocks, occupying a space
+about thirty feet in diameter, but was much shattered, and
+<a name="page27"></a>in a decaying state. Our people, however, cut off a quantity
+of blubber from its lips. The greater part of the blubber of
+this fish was lost, as the Esquimaux had no means of conveying
+it to Okkak.</p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux stationed here showed great willingness
+to assist us; and as our party was much fatigued with rowing
+all night, they towed us into Nachvak, where we arrived
+about 2 P.M. Old Kayaluk and a young man, Parnguna,
+and his wife, were here. The latter called on Brother Kohlmeister,
+and thanked him for having saved her life. He had
+forgotten that he had once given her medicine at Okkak in a
+dangerous illness, but her gratitude was still unbounded.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch5"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER V.</h3>
+
+<div class="synopsis">
+
+<p>Reception at Nachvak. Description of the bay. The Esquimaux
+manner of spearing salmon and trout. Christian deportment
+of the Okkak and Hopedale Esquimaux. Jonas&rsquo;s
+address to the Heathen. Love of music general among these
+Indians. Departure from Nachvak. Danger in doubling
+the North Cape. Arrival at Sangmiyok bay.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="text">
+<p>J<small>ULY</small> 16th.&mdash;A<small>FTER</small> two or three hours sleep in our cabin,
+we went on shore. The Esquimaux, who had here a temporary
+station, about fifty in number, received us with
+every mark of attention. Loud shouts of joy resounded from
+all quarters, and muskets were fired in every direction. They
+could scarcely wait with patience for our landing, and when
+we pitched our tent, were all eager to assist; thus we were
+soon at home among them. Seven tents were standing on
+the strand, and we found the people here differing much in
+their manners from the people at Saeglek. Their behaviour
+was modest and rather bashful, nor were we assailed by <a name="page28"></a>beggars
+and importunate intruders, as at the latter place, where
+beggary seemed quite the fashion, and proved very troublesome
+to us. But we had no instance of stealing. Thieves
+are considered by the Esquimaux in general with abhorrence,
+and with a thief no one is willing to trade. We have discovered,
+however, that that propensity is not altogether wanting
+in the northern Esquimaux, who, now and then, if they
+think that they can do it without detection, will make a little
+free with their neighbour&rsquo;s property. </p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux not only gave us a most hearty welcome,
+but attended our morning and evening prayers with great
+silence and apparent devotion. Indeed, to our great surprise,
+they behaved altogether with uncommon decorum and regularity
+during our stay.</p>
+
+<p>17th. Being detained with drift-ice at the mouth of the
+bay, we pitched our tent on shore. We examined the bay
+more minutely. It extends to the West to a considerable
+depth, and is not protected by any islands, except a few
+rocks, at some distance in the sea. The surrounding mountains
+are very high, steep, and barren, and verdure is found
+only in the vallies. Here the <i>arnica montana</i>, which the
+Missionaries have found of great use among the Esquimaux,
+grows in great abundance. Salmon-trout are caught in every
+creek and inlet.</p>
+
+<p>Like the salmon, they remain in the rivers and fresh-water
+lakes during the winter, and return to the sea in spring.
+The Esquimaux about Okkak and Saeglek, catch them in
+winter under the ice by spearing. For this purpose, they
+make two holes in the ice, about eight inches in diameter,
+and six feet asunder, in a direction from north to south. The
+northern hole they screen from the sun, by a bank of snow
+about four feet in height, raised in a semicircle round its
+southern edge, and form another similar bank on the north-side
+of the southern hole, sloped in such a manner as to reflect
+the rays of the sun into it. The Esquimaux then lies
+<a name="page29"></a>down, with his face close to the northern aperture, beneath
+which the water is strongly illuminated by the sunbeams entering
+at the southern. In his left hand he holds a red string,
+with which he plays in the water, to allure the fish, and in
+his right a spear, ready to strike them as they approach. In
+this manner they soon take as many as they want.</p>
+
+<p>The salmon-trout on this coast are from twelve to eighteen
+inches long, and in August and September so fat, that
+the Esquimaux collect from them a sufficient quantity of oil
+for their lamps. The immense abundance of these fish on
+all parts of the coast, would almost at any time save the Esquimaux
+from starving with hunger; but as seals furnish
+them both with food and clothing, it is of most consequence
+to them to attend to this branch of supply. At Hopedale and
+Nain, however, salmon-trout are caught only in the summer.</p>
+
+<p>We were much pleased with the behaviour of our own Esquimaux,
+during their stay at Nachvak. In every respect
+they conducted themselves, in word and deed, as true Christian
+people. Their conversation with their heathen countrymen,
+was free and unreserved, and &ldquo;to the use of edifying.&rdquo;
+Jonathan and Jonas in particular, gave us great
+satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p>The people having assembled in Jonathan&rsquo;s tent, those
+who had no room in it, standing without and listening with
+great order and stillness, Brother Kohlmeister addressed
+them, explaining the aim of our voyage; that we were going,
+out of love to their nation, to the northern Esquimaux,
+and to those of Ungava bay, to make known to them the
+love of God our Saviour; and, by the gospel, to point out to
+them the way to obtain life everlasting. We knew that they
+were heathen, who, being ignorant of the way to God, were
+in bondage to the devil, and would be lost for ever, unless
+God had mercy upon them and sent them his word, to lead
+them to Jesus Christ their only Saviour, who shed His blood,
+and died on the cross to redeem their souls.</p>
+
+<a name="page30"></a><p>They received the discourses and exhortations of the Missionary
+with reverential attention, but those of their own
+countrymen, with still greater eagerness, and we hope not
+without benefit. Jonas once addressed them thus; &ldquo;We
+were but lately as ignorant as you are now: we were long
+unable to understand the comfortable words of the gospel:
+we had neither ears to hear, nor hearts to receive them, till
+Jesus, by his power, opened our hearts and ears. Now
+we know what Jesus has done for us, and how great the
+happiness of those souls is, who come unto Him, love
+Him as their Saviour, and know, that they shall not be
+lost, when this life is past. Without this we live in constant
+fear of death. You will enjoy the same happiness,
+if you turn to and believe in Jesus. We are not surprised
+that you do not yet understand us. We were once like
+you, but now thank Jesus our Redeemer, with tears of
+joy, that He has revealed Himself unto us,&rdquo; Thus, with
+cheerful countenances and great energy, did these Christian
+Esquimaux praise and glorify the name of Christ our Saviour,
+and declare, what he had done for their souls, exhorting
+the heathen likewise to believe.</p>
+
+<p>The above address seemed to make a deep impression on
+the minds of all present. One of their leaders, or captains,
+exclaimed with great eagerness, in presence of them all:
+&ldquo;I am determined to be converted to Jesus.&rdquo; His name
+is <i>Onalik</i>. He afterwards called upon Brother Kohlmeister,
+and inquired, whether it was the same, to which of the three
+settlements he removed, as it was his firm determination to
+become a true believer. Brother Kohlmeister answered:
+&ldquo;That it was indifferent where he lived, if he were only
+converted and became a child of God, and an heir of life
+eternal.&rdquo; Another, named <i>Tullugaksoak</i>, made the same
+declaration, and added: &ldquo;That he would no longer live
+among the heathen.&rdquo;</p>
+
+<p>Though the very fickle disposition of the heathen <a name="page31"></a>Esquimaux,
+might cause some doubts to arise in our minds, as to
+their putting these good resolutions into practice, yet we
+hope, that the seed of the word of God, sown in this place,
+may not have altogether fallen upon barren ground.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening, our people met in Jonathan&rsquo;s tent, and
+sang hymns. Almost all the inhabitants were present. They
+afterwards spent a long time in pleasant and edifying conversation.
+It may here be observed, that the Esquimaux
+delight in singing and music. As to national songs, they
+have nothing deserving of that name; and the various collectors
+of these precious morsels in our day, would find their
+labour lost in endeavouring to harmonize the incantations
+of their sorcerers and witches, which more resemble the
+howlings of wolves and growlings of bears, than any thing
+human. But though the hymn and psalm-tunes of the Brethren&rsquo;s
+Church are mostly of antient construction, and,
+though rich in harmony, have no airy melodies to make
+them easily understood by unmusical ears, yet the Esquimaux
+soon learn to sing them correctly; and the voices of
+the women are remarkably sweet and well-tuned. Brother
+Kohlmeister having given one of the children a toy-flute,
+Paul took it, and immediately picked out the proper stops
+in playing several psalm-tunes upon it, as well as the imperfect
+state of the instrument would admit. Brother Kmoch
+having taken a violin with him, the same Esquimaux likewise
+took it up, and it was not long before he found out the
+manner of producing the different notes.</p>
+
+<p>18th. At 8 A.M. Brother Kohlmeister having delivered a
+farewell-discourse to the Esquimaux, (during which they
+were much affected), we took leave of these goodnatured people,
+and set sail with a fair and strong West-wind, but met
+with much drift-ice at the entrance of the bay. It made less
+way than our boat, and the wind becoming more violent, we
+found ourselves in an unpleasant situation. After tacking
+all day, and a great part of the night, the ice preventing
+<a name="page32"></a>our proceeding, and the wind, our returning to our former
+station, we were obliged to make for the Eastern point of
+the bay, where we at length succeeded in gaining a small
+cove, and cast anchor.</p>
+
+<p>Our situation was singular; the rocks rose in a semicircle
+around us, towering perpendicularly to an amazing height,
+like an immense wall.</p>
+
+<p>After a few hours stay, two Nachvak Esquimaux joined
+us, and prevailed on Jonathan to return to the tents, but we
+had scarcely reached the centre of the bay, before the violence
+of the wind drove us out to sea, and we were compelled
+to push for the northern promontory, from which all the
+ice had now retreated. Under the mountains we found
+shelter from the wind, which had by this time risen to a
+storm. It was late, and as it appeared dangerous to remain
+here, we rowed towards the point, but there beheld, with
+terror, the raging of the sea and dashing of the waves against
+the rocks, the spray flying like clouds into the air, and returned
+into smooth water, where, however, we were long in
+finding a place to anchor in. The night was spent quietly
+under shelter of the high rocks. They form the base of
+mountains higher than the <i>Kiglapeyd</i>, rise perpendicularly,
+in some places impending, with fragments, apparently loose,
+hanging over their edge, and forming all kinds of grotesque
+figures.</p>
+
+<p>19th. At sun-rise we still saw and heard the storm which
+threatened us with destruction, if we ventured to double the
+cape.</p>
+
+<p>At nine the wind abated, and we set sail, got safe round
+the point, and glided, with a gentle wind, into a broad,
+shallow bay, called Sangmiyok, full both of hidden and visible
+rocks, in which we cast anchor about five P.M. While
+Brother Kmoch superintended the concerns of the kitchen,
+Brother Kohlmeister and Jonathan went on shore, and to
+the highest mountain on the promontory. From the top of
+<a name="page33"></a>this mountain they could plainly discern the four principal
+headlands between Cape Mugford and Cape Chudleigh. The
+former situated in latitude 58&deg; N. the latter in 61&deg;. Between
+these are four promontories, in a line from S.E. to
+N.W. The first is <i>Uivak</i>, at the entrance into Saeglek Bay,
+outside of which a small island lies, in form of a pyramid or
+sugar-loaf. Next follow the two forming Nachvak Bay,
+another <i>Uivak</i> to the south of <i>Nennoktok</i>, upon which we
+stood. The fourth is <i>Kakkeviak</i>, not far from Killinek, or
+Cape Chudleigh, in form of a tent, called in the charts
+<i>Blackhead</i>. <i>Nennoktok</i> is called <i>False Blackhead</i>.</p>
+
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch6"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER VI.</h3>
+<div class="synopsis">
+
+<p>Pass Cape Nennoktok. Visit the Esquimaux families at
+Kummaktorvik and Amitok. Description of an Esquimaux
+travelling bed. Mountains seen at Ungava. Netsek
+seal described. Greenland houses. Danger of being
+shipwrecked near Kakkeviak.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="text">
+<p>J<small>ULY</small> 20th.&mdash;W<small>E</small> proceeded with
+little or no wind, and taking to our oars, doubled the great Cape of
+Nennoktok. Here a strong swell from the sea met us, and tossed our boat
+violently about, and, having no wind, it drove us nearer to the shore
+than was perfectly safe. We remained about an hour in this unpleasant
+situation, when a breeze sprung up, which carried us out to the open sea
+among islands. It now began to rain very hard, and the wind rose. While
+Brother Kmoch was assisting the people on deck, Brother Kohlmeister had
+enough to do below, to keep peace among the furniture of our cabin, and
+sometimes found himself defeated in his attempts, pots and pans, and
+boxes, and every thing that was not a fixture, tumbling upon him.
+Several of our people <a name="page34"></a>were in the skin-boat, and the fury of the wind
+and sea would not permit them to come to our assistance. The weather
+also became so thick and foggy between the islands, that we were unable
+to see to any distance. Jonathan was therefore glad to have been
+yesterday on shore, when from the mountain he discovered the situation
+of the promontory, the coast, and the islands before us, and now
+contrived to steer in the proper direction. We soon found ourselves in
+smoother water, and among islands, where a vast number of seals and
+birds made their appearance. At six in the evening we reached
+<i>Kummaktorvik</i>, and came to an anchor.</p>
+
+<p>Having landed, Brother Kmoch shot a hare, close to the beach. These
+creatures are white in winter, and grey in summer, and in winter so
+numerous, that though, when roasted, they are excellent food, we were
+almost tired of them last year at Okkak.</p>
+
+<p>The rain continuing during the whole of the night and forenoon of the
+21st, we found it necessary by sufficient rest to strengthen ourselves
+for future watchfulness.</p>
+
+<p>An Esquimaux travelling bed consists of a large bag of reindeer-skin,
+with the hair turned inward, covered with seal-skin, the hair turned
+outward. It is furnished with a broad flap to cover the mouth, and a
+strap to fasten down the flap. This bag comprehends the whole apparatus
+and furniture of an Esquimaux bed-room. Having undressed, the traveller
+creeps into it, and a kind neighbour having shut him up close by
+fastening the strap, he leaves him to sleep on till morning, when he
+helps him out again. In summer the flap is dispensed with. The
+invention, however, is of European origin, and a luxury introduced by
+the Missionaries; for an Esquimaux lies down in his clothes, without
+further preparation.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning we landed, and had the usual Sunday&rsquo;s service
+with our people on shore; after which Brother Kohlmeister visited the
+Esquimaux in their tents, and had some <a name="page35"></a>religious conversation with them,
+to which they seemed to pay attention. Afterwards Kuttaktok, John,
+Nukkapiak, and Kajulik, with their wives, came to see us on board. They
+are the winter inhabitants of this bay. John was baptized in infancy at
+Okkak, but afterwards left the settlement, and not only associates with
+the heathen Esquimaux, but has even been guilty of murder. All of them,
+however, come occasionally to Okkak. They had two tents about four miles
+from our landing place.</p>
+
+<p>22d. The contrary wind forbidding our departure, Brother Kohlmeister,
+accompanied by Jonathan, Jonas, and Thukkekina, walked across the
+country to the N.W. bay, to return their visit. When they saw them
+coming at a distance, they fired their pieces, to direct them to the
+tents, and came joyfully to meet the Missionary and his party. Nothing
+could exceed the cordiality with which they received them. A kettle was
+immediately put on the fire to cook salmon-trout, and all were invited
+to partake, which was the more readily accepted, as the length of the
+walk had created an appetite, the keenness of which overcame all
+squeamishness. To do these good people justice, their kettle was rather
+cleaner than usual, the dogs having licked it well, and the fish were
+fresh and well dressed. To honour the Missionary, a box was placed for
+him to sit upon, and the fish were served up to each upon a flat stone
+instead of a plate. After dinner, Brother Kohlmeister, in acknowledgment
+for their civility, gave to each of the women two needles, and a small
+portion of tobacco to each man, with which they were highly
+delighted.</p>
+
+<p>All of them being seated, a very lively and unreserved conversation
+took place concerning the only way of salvation, through Jesus Christ,
+and the necessity of conversion. With John and his mother Mary, Brother
+Kohlmeister spoke very seriously, and represented to them the danger of
+their state, as apostates from the faith; but they seem blinded <a name="page36"></a>by
+Satan, and determined to persist in their heathenish life. The Esquimaux
+now offered to convey the party across the bay in their skin-boat, which
+was accepted. Almost all of them accompanied the boat, and met with a
+very friendly reception from our boat&rsquo;s company. In the evening,
+after some hymns had been sung by our people, Jonas addressed them and
+the heathen Esquimaux in a short, nervous discourse, on the blessedness
+of being reconciled unto God.</p>
+
+<p>Kummaktorvik bay runs N.E. and S.W. and is defended by some islands
+from the sea. It is about four or five miles long, and surrounded by
+high mountains, with some pleasant plains at their foot, covered with
+verdure. It&rsquo;s distance from Nachvak is about twelve miles. This
+chain of mountains, as will be hereafter mentioned, may be seen from
+Kangertlualuksoak, in Ungava Bay, which is a collateral proof, that the
+neck of land, terminated to the N. by Cape Chudleigh, is of no great
+width. Both the Nain and Okkak Esquimaux frequently penetrate far enough
+inland to find the rivers taking a westerly direction, consequently
+towards the Ungava country. They even now and then have reached the
+woods skirting the estuaries of George and South rivers.</p>
+
+<p>23d. We set sail at sun-rise, but the wind being too high to suffer
+us to proceed with safety, we again anchored in a commodious harbour in
+<i>Amitok</i> island. Our people were here busily employed in repairing
+the damaged rigging and sails. Towards evening Jonas caught a seal, to
+the great gratification of our party. It was dressed immediately, and we
+joined them in their repast with a good appetite.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Netsek</i> is the only species of seal which remains during
+the winter under the ice. They form in it large caverns, in which they
+bring forth their young, two at a time, in March. More than one cavern
+belongs to one seal, that he may, if disturbed in the first, take
+shelter in the second. No other kind of seal is caught in winter by the
+Esquimaux.</p>
+
+<a name="page37"></a><p>24th. Brother Kmoch rose at two, and went on shore to examine the
+island more minutely. The morning was beautiful, and the sun rose with
+great splendour. <i>Amitok</i> lies N.W. from Kummaktorvik, is of an
+oblong shape, and stretches out pretty far towards the sea. The hills
+are of moderate height, the land is in many places flat, but in general
+destitute of grass. On the other side are some ruins of Greenland
+houses.</p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux have a tradition, that the Greenlanders came originally
+from Canada, and settled on the outermost islands of this coast, but
+never penetrated into the country, before they were driven eastward to
+Greenland. This report gains some credit, from the state in which the
+abovementioned ruins are found. They consist in remains of walls and
+graves, with a low stone enclosure round the tomb, covered with a slab
+of the same material. They have been discovered on islands near Nain,
+and though sparingly, all along the whole eastern coast, but we saw none
+in Ungava bay. The rocks on Amitok contain large masses of a crumbly,
+semi-transparent garnet, of a reddish hue. (From some specimens sent
+out, it rather appears to be a rose red quartz, or beryllite).</p>
+
+<p>As it appeared as if we should be detained here, Brother Kmoch had
+made a fire, and was leisurely cooking a savoury mess of birds for
+breakfast, when Jonathan returned from the hills, with intelligence that
+the wind was abating in violence, and he therefore would proceed. The
+tent was struck, and all hurried on board: yet we had long to combat
+both an unfavourable wind and a strong current, which compelled us to
+double the East point of the island, and seek shelter among some small
+islands, steering for <i>Niakungu</i> point. From hence we got the first
+sight of <i>Tikkerarsuk</i>, (the Esquimaux name for a low point
+stretching from the continent into the sea), of the island
+<i>Aulatzevik</i>, and the high promontory of <i>Kakkeviak</i>. The
+whole country to <a name="page38"></a>the west of <i>Niakungu</i> is called
+<i>Serliarutsit</i>. It fell calm as we doubled the point, and we took
+to our oars, and came to an anchor in an open bay, south of
+Tikkerarsuk.</p>
+
+<p>25th. At 6 P.M. we got under weigh with a fine S.E. wind, and made
+for the island of <i>Aulatzevik</i>, which is about the same size as an
+island of the same name, near Kiglapeyd. The passage between the island
+and the main is too shallow for an European boat like ours. The wind
+rising we sailed towards Kakkeviak at a great rate. To the right lay a
+chain of small islands called by the Esquimaux Pikkiulits, (the
+habitation of young eider-ducks). Having nearly doubled <i>Kakkeviak</i>
+cape, we perceived two tents on shore, which occasioned loud rejoicings
+on board. They belonged to <i>Kumiganna</i> of <i>Saeglek</i>, with his
+party, who being bound to Killinek, had promised to accompany us
+thither. The wind was very high, and the Cape encircled with numerous
+visible and invisible rocks, but there was a clear passage to the shore,
+keeping outside of the breakers. But whether from the violence of the
+wind, or from the eagerness with which our trusty captain wished soon to
+join his countrymen, he steered right through the midst of them, when
+suddenly the boat struck with great violence upon a sunken rock. The
+shock was so great, that all on board were thrown down, and every thing
+tumbled about. Poor Agnes, Jonas&rsquo;s wife, got a severe wound in her
+head. We immediately took in all our sails, and after hard labour,
+succeeded in pushing the boat off the rock. On examination we found that
+all was safe, and thanked God, with hearts filled with humble
+acknowledgments of His mercy, for preserving us from danger and death.
+The boat had struck in such a manner, that the keel, which was new and
+strong, being constructed of one solid piece of timber, sustained the
+whole shock. Had she taken the rock with her bottom, she would most
+likely have bilged, or upset, and it is a great question, whether our
+lives, but particularly the lives of the <a name="page39"></a>little children, could have
+been saved, the sea running very high. The skin-boat was thrown right
+over the rocks on shore, by the violence of the surf.</p>
+
+<p>Kumiganna soon came off in his kayak, and advised us to steer for the
+land right before us, where he thought we should find <i>Uttakiyok</i>;
+nor was there any safe anchorage in this place. We therefore took a
+young Esquimaux on board as pilot, and steered between the main land and
+the islands, for <i>Oppernavik</i>, twenty English miles off. Having
+left the skin-boat to follow us, we cut swiftly through the water, and
+soon reached the place of our destination.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch7"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER VII.</h3>
+<div class="synopsis">
+
+<p>Arrival at Oppernavik. Account of Uttakiyok. His perseverance in
+waiting for the arrival of the Missionaries. Islands and bays between
+Kakkeviak and Killinek. Danger in the ice at Ammitok. Want of fuel
+supplied by robbing old graves.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>W<small>HEN</small> we arrived at Oppernavik, we found
+<i>Uttakiyok</i>, with his two wives and youngest brother, waiting to
+receive us. He and his family are from the Ungava bay, and had been upon
+the watch in this place during the whole spring. They welcomed us with
+shouts of joy, and firing of their pieces, and we had indeed the
+greatest reason to thank God, that he had sent us this man, to conduct
+us on our way to an unknown country, and through unfrequented seas.</p>
+
+<p>For this service Uttakiyok was eminently qualified, and without such
+a steady, faithful guide, we should have been wandering in the most
+painful and dangerous uncertainty in the desert regions to the West of
+Cape <a name="page40"></a>Chudleigh, where, on a coast of 100 miles in length, we did not
+meet with a single inhabitant. He was so anxiously intent upon meeting
+us, that he had erected signals on all the heights surrounding his tent,
+to prevent our missing him. Among his countrymen he is much respected,
+on account of his superior sense, and skill in all Esquimaux arts, and
+possesses great influence among them.</p>
+
+<p><i>Uttakiyok</i> was one of the two Esquimaux, from whom, in the year
+1800, we received the first distinct information respecting the Ungava
+country and its inhabitants, by which the desire, excited both at home
+and here in Labrador, to visit the northern Esquimaux, was greatly
+strengthened, and led to a resolution, if possible, to take early steps
+to accomplish this object, (<a href="#page3">See page 3</a>).</p>
+
+<p>Two years ago, he had been on a trading voyage to Okkak, from
+Killinek, where he then dwelt, and intended to return, in the summer
+following, to Ungava, his native country, but an illness, which befel
+his son, detained him. This intelligence was received at Okkak during
+last winter, when we sent him word, that as we purposed paying his
+countrymen a visit, we wished him to wait for us, that he might conduct
+us through the straits of Killinek. But having heard nothing further
+concerning him, we remained in uncertainty respecting his intentions. We
+were the more thankful to God, who had disposed the heart of this man
+cheerfully to accept of the commission, and wait to be our guide, an
+office which he performed with a degree of faithfulness and
+disinterested kindness, which claims our admiration and gratitude.</p>
+
+<p>While we were here waiting for a favourable opportunity to pass the
+straits, which were yet filled with ice, he behaved in the kindest
+manner to us and our Esquimaux. Though a heathen, he regularly attended
+our morning and evening worship, and declared to Jonathan, that he also
+intended to be converted to Jesus, and if we would form a settlement in
+his country, would come and <a name="page41"></a>live with us, and was sure, that many of his
+countrymen would do the same.</p>
+
+<p>Around his tent, a considerable extent of rock was covered with
+seal&rsquo;s flesh, and in the hollows were pools of oil. Ten bags of
+blubber were standing ready for sale; and with a view to shew him our
+good-will, Brother Kohlmeister bartered with him for three of them,
+which were hid under the stones, to take them with us, if practicable,
+on our return.</p>
+
+<p>26th. We put up our three tents; Uttakiyok&rsquo;s people had three
+more. Wind N.W. We were now near the entrance into the Ikkerasak, (or
+straits), which separate the island of Killinek and two or three other
+large islands from the continent. They stretch to the N. to the distance
+of about 12 or 15 English miles, the outer one forming Cape Chudleigh.
+To the N.W. of the cape lie some other small islands, called by the
+Esquimaux <i>Tutsaets</i>, and N.N.E. of these, the great island
+<i>Resolution</i>, called <i>Igloarsuk</i>, on which, as we were
+informed, many Esquimaux reside. The Tutsaets were discernible from this
+place, but not the latter, which however, as the Esquimaux say, may be
+seen from the Tutsaets. We guessed at its situation, from the clouds
+hanging over it in the North quarter. The weather was, as might be
+expected on the northern coast of America, foggy, rainy, and cold, and
+our small stove, which we brought into the tent, was of great use to us
+during our stay in this place.</p>
+
+<p>27th. Rain and wind violent, and prevented our proceeding. We caught
+some <i>Pitsiolaks</i>, (awks), and a brace of young puffins, which,
+with the addition of some salt meat, made excellent broth.</p>
+
+<p>28th. The weather was fair, but the wind still blowing hard at N.W.
+Brother Kmoch went to Uttakiyok&rsquo;s tent, and sitting down with him
+at the point of Oppernavik, and looking down the coast as far as
+Kakkeviak, got him to <a name="page42"></a>name all the bays, points, and islands, from
+Kakkeviak to Oppernavik, of which he made minutes. The distance between
+the two points or headlands may be guessed at, by the time of sailing
+with a strong leading wind, namely three hours and a half. Coming up
+from Kakkeviak, to the E. lie three islands, <i>Kikkertorsoak</i>,
+<i>Imilialuk</i>, rather less in view, and <i>Nessetservik</i>. Having
+passed these, there follows a chain of small, naked islands, not very
+high, stretching towards Killinek. To the W. near Kakkeviak lies
+<i>Uglek</i>; then a bay, <i>Nulluk</i>, and farther to the left another
+bay, <i>Tellek</i>, (right arm). The country along these bays is called
+<i>Attanarsuk</i>. Now follow the bay <i>Ikkorliarsuk</i>, the lower
+point of <i>Tikkerarsuk</i>, the bay <i>Annivagtok</i>, and
+<i>Kakkeviak</i>, a high promontory, (not to be confounded with the
+other Kakkeviak, where we struck on the rock. This promontory is only
+about four miles from Oppernavik to the S.E.). Then follow two small
+bays, <i>Anniovariktok</i> and <i>Sangmiyok</i>, then the promontory
+<i>Ukkuliakartok</i>, (meaning a headland between two bays), and the bay
+<i>Tunnusuksoak</i>. Next, the last point on the continent, forming the
+south entrance to the Ikkerasak. The abovementioned chain of barren
+islands is called by the Esquimaux <i>Naviarutsit</i>, and besides them
+some low rocks, <i>Nuvurutsit</i>. The island of Killinek is about nine
+miles long, and five broad, high, and forming the north side of the
+straits. Another Ikkerasak, (or strait), divides it from an island
+called Kikkertorsoak, (a common name for an island), of considerable
+height, but not so long as <i>Killinek</i>: one, or perhaps more islands
+follow, narrowing E. and W. and forming Cape Chudleigh.</p>
+
+<p>To-day there was much ice both in the strait and at sea. We went to
+the nearest island, where Brother Kohlmeister took an observation, and
+found our situation to be 60&deg; 16'.</p>
+
+<p>30th. It blew a hard gale from the N.E., rained hard, and <a name="page43"></a>as the ice
+now began to enter our harbour, we were busily engaged in keeping it off
+the boat.</p>
+
+<p>31st. Imagining to-day that the straits would be free from ice, we
+resolved to attempt to pass them, and set sail. But it soon became
+evident, that there was still plenty of ice in the neighbourhood, and
+the wind setting to the N.E. with fogs, we were obliged to return.
+Suspecting also that the easterly wind would again drive the ice into
+our former harbour at Oppernavik, we ran into a short pass, between that
+and a small island called Ammitok, where we anchored under shelter of
+the island. The sequel proved, that we had for once acted with sound
+judgment and foresight, for our former anchoring-ground was soon filled
+with ice; and during the night large flakes entered even into our
+present place of refuge.</p>
+
+<p><i>August</i> 1st. At day break we found ourselves completely
+surrounded by floating ice, a strong N.W. wind driving the large shoals
+from the W. side of the little pass in which we lay, with much force
+towards us, insomuch that our boat was in the greatest danger of being
+crushed to pieces by them. We were all day long hard at work with poles,
+boat-hooks, and hatchets, to ward off the larger shoals, but when the
+tide fell, they hung upon our cables and anchors, of which we had three
+out, closing in also on all sides of the boat, so that we were every
+moment in fearful expectation of her being carried away, and our anchors
+lost, which would have reduced us to the most distressing situation.
+Indeed we all cried to the Lord to help us in this dangerous situation,
+and not to suffer us to perish here, but by His almighty aid, to save us
+and our boat. With great and unremitting exertions we had laboured all
+day, from the morning early, till seven in the evening, when the Lord
+heard our prayers, and sent relief. We now succeeded in working the boat
+out of the ice, the rising of the tide having opened a passage through
+it, just as we were almost <a name="page44"></a>exhausted with fatigue. It also became quite
+calm, and we felt as if we had passed from death to life.</p>
+
+<p>Having anchored again on the opposite side of the little pass or
+strait, we gave thanks to God, for the deliverance we had experienced
+through His mercy, in which our Esquimaux, young and old, most fervently
+joined.</p>
+
+<p>During our stay at Oppernavik, our whole stock of fire-wood was
+expended, and we were obliged to purchase of our companions, what they
+had to spare. We likewise robbed some old Esquimaux graves of the wooden
+utensils, which it is the superstitious practice of the heathen to lay
+beside the corpses of their owners, with old tent-poles, &amp;c. and
+thus obtained fuel sufficient for our cookery.</p>
+
+<p>Wood will not decay by mere exposure to the air in Labrador, but
+wastes away gradually; and after forty or more years, the wood found at
+the graves is still fit for use.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch8"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER VIII.</h3>
+
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Departure from Oppernavik. Pass the Ikkerasak of Killinek.
+Whirlpools. The coast takes a southerly direction. Meeting with
+Esquimaux from the Ungava country, who had never seen an European.
+Anchor at Omanek. High tides. Drift-wood. Double Cape Uibvaksoak.
+Distant view of Akpatok.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>A<small>UGUST</small> 2d.&mdash;H<small>AVING</small> made all
+needful preparations for the voyage, a gentle but favourable wind, and
+occasional rowing, brought us, about nine in the morning, to the
+entrance of the much dreaded Ikkerasak. The weather was pleasant and
+warm, not a flake of ice was to be seen, and all our fear and anxiety
+had subsided. Our minds were attuned to praise and thanksgiving for the
+providential preservation <a name="page45"></a>we had experienced yesterday. We performed our
+morning devotions on deck, and all joined in a joyful hallelujah to God
+our Saviour, which was sweetly repeated by echoes among the mountains
+and precipices on either side. The scripture-text appointed in the
+Church of the United Brethren for this day being read, it seemed as if
+addressed particularly to us, separated as we felt ourselves, in these
+lonely regions, from the rest of the inhabitants of the earth:
+&ldquo;<i>See now that I, even I, am He, and there is no God with me: I
+kill, and I make alive; I wound, and I heal.</i>&rdquo; Deut. 32, 39. We
+rejoiced, that we were in the hands of a gracious and merciful God and
+Father, who would not forsake us, but deal with us according to his
+wonted mercy and favour.</p>
+
+<p>The Ikkerasak, (or strait), is about ten miles in length; the land on
+each side high and rocky, and in some places precipitous, but there
+appeared no rocks in the strait itself. The water is deep and clear. Its
+mouth is wide, and soon after entering, a bay opens to the left, which
+by an inlet only just wide enough to admit a boat, communicates with a
+lagoon of considerable magnitude, in which lies an island on its western
+bank. Beyond this bay, the passage narrows and consequently the stream,
+always setting from N. to S. grows more rapid. Here the mountains on
+both sides rise to a great height. Having proceeded for two miles in a
+narrow channel, the strait opens again, but afterwards contracts to
+about 1000 yards across; immediately beyond which, the left coast turns
+to the south. As the tide ebbs regularly with the current from N. to S.
+along the whole coast of Labrador, the current through the strait is
+most violent during its fall, and less, when resisted by its influx on
+rising.</p>
+
+<p>We were taught to expect much danger in passing certain eddies or
+whirlpools in the narrow parts of the straits, and were therefore
+continually upon the look-out for them. When we passed the first narrow
+channel, at 12 P.M. it being low water, no whirlpool was perceptible.
+Having <a name="page46"></a>sailed on for little more than half an hour, with wind and tide
+in our favour, we reached the second. Here, indeed, we discovered a
+whirlpool, but of no great magnitude at this state of the tide. Near the
+north-shore the water was, indeed, whirled round in the manner of a
+boiling cauldron of ten or twelve feet diameter, with considerable noise
+and much foam; but we passed without the smallest inconvenience, within
+thirty or forty feet of the outer circle. Our skin-boat, however, which
+we had in tow, with a man in it, was seized by the vortex, and received
+a rapid twist; but as the towing-rope did not break, she was immediately
+rescued from danger by the swiftness of our course, and the affair
+afforded us more diversion than anxiety. The motion of the water in
+these eddies is so great, that they never freeze in the severest winter.
+The ice being drawn towards them with great force, the largest shoals
+are carried under water, and thrown up again, broken into numerous
+fragments. The Ikkerasak is at that season utterly impassable for boats.
+The Killinek people inhabit an island to the right, after leaving the
+strait.</p>
+
+<p>When we quitted the Ikkerasak, and entered the ocean on the western
+side of Cape Chudleigh, it seemed as if we were transported to a new
+world. Hitherto the coast to our left had always taken a northerly
+direction. It now turned to the S.S.W. and is low, with gently sloping
+hills, the sea being full of small islands, abounding in sea-fowl.</p>
+
+<p>To the N. and N.W. we saw the open sea in Hudson&rsquo;s Straits,
+which, compared to the turbulent Atlantic, seemed calm and peaceful. We
+sailed briskly amidst the islands, and overtook the inhabitants of
+Saeglek, whom we had seen at Kakkeviak, where they had got the start of
+us. The wind being favourable, we did not hail them, but kept on our
+course. We now saw with pleasure the Ungava country to the South before
+us, but had first to pass the low point of <i>Uivarsuk</i>, the bay of
+<i>Arvavik</i>, in which the people from <a name="page47"></a>Saeglek had their summer
+stations, and the mountain <i>Omanek</i>, of moderate height, and
+surrounded by many small islets, called by the Esquimaux
+<i>Erngavinget</i>, (bowels). We now discovered three skin-boats full of
+people standing towards us from the shore. They were inhabitants of
+Ungava, and welcomed our approach with loud shouts of joy and firing
+their pieces, which was answered by our party. They followed us to
+Omanek, a round island rising like a loaf among the rest, where they
+pitched their tents on shore.</p>
+
+<p>Some of them had formerly dwelt in different places north of Okkak,
+and were known to the Missionaries in former times, the rest were
+perfect strangers. They declared their intention of coming over to the
+North of Okkak, to remain some time in that country, for the sake of
+trade. It has been mentioned, that some of the Ungava people have come
+to Okkak, and carry on a trade between their countrymen and that place.
+They are a kind of middle men, bring fox and bear-skins, and exchange
+them for European goods. These they carry back, and sell at a very
+advanced price in the Ungava country. They spend two years on such a
+trading voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Kohlmeister visited the people in their tents. They were
+about fifty in number, men, women, and children. He informed them, that
+nothing could induce the Missionaries to come into this country, but
+love to the poor heathen, and an ardent desire to make them acquainted
+with their Creator and Redeemer, that through Him they might attain to
+happiness in time and eternity. Some seemed to listen with great
+attention, but the greater part understood nothing of what was said.
+This, of course, did not surprise us, as most of them were quite
+ignorant heathen, who had never before seen an European. They, however,
+raised a shout of joy, when we informed them, that we would come and
+visit them in their own country. Many were not satisfied with <a name="page48"></a>viewing
+us on every side with marks of great astonishment, but came close up to
+us, and pawed us all over. At taking leave we presented them with a few
+trifles, which excited among them the greatest pleasure and
+thankfulness.</p>
+
+<p>We recommend these heathen to the mercy of God, and pray, that the
+day may soon dawn, when the light of the saving gospel of Jesus may
+shine into their hearts.</p>
+
+<p>3d. Several of them came on board, once more to see us, and, in their
+way, to express their regard and gratitude. They also got some useful
+articles from our people, in exchange for their goods. We now set sail,
+passed a point called <i>Oglarvik</i>, and the bay <i>Takpangayok</i>,
+and arrived at <i>Tuktusiovik</i>, (a place where reindeer are seen),
+where we cast anchor for the night. Already at Omanek we had discovered
+a great difference between the rise and fall of the tides there and
+about Killinek. In the latter place it rose to four fathoms, but here
+still higher. The country looked pleasant, with many berry-bearing
+plants and bushes. There was, likewise, plenty of drift-wood all along
+the coast; not the large Greenland timber, but small trees and roots,
+evidently carried out of the great rivers of the Ungava by the ice. We
+had, of course, fire-wood enough, without robbing the graves of their
+superstitious furniture. Our Esquimaux pitched their tent on shore, and
+we supped with them on a mess of seal&rsquo;s flesh and eider-ducks. The
+musquitoes were extremely troublesome during our repast, after which we
+retired to sleep on board the boat.</p>
+
+<p>4th. Wind fair. We passed numerous low rocks; a point, by name
+unknown to Uttakiyok; the bay <i>Ikpigitok</i>, two miles broad, and the
+cape called <i>Uibvaksoak</i>, the northern boundary of the great bay or
+gulf of <i>Abloriak</i>. This cape is surrounded by many bare and sunken
+rocks, which caused us to stand out pretty far to the westward. While we
+were off the point, we descried, at a very great distance to the N.W. a
+large island, called by the Esquimaux <i>Akpatok</i>. <a name="page49"></a>They say, that it
+encloses the whole bay or gulf towards the sea, and consists of high
+land: also, that it is connected with the western continent at low water
+by an isthmus. The north coast of this island appears to be the line
+laid down in maps and charts as the coast of America, to the south of
+Hudson&rsquo;s Straits. But the district of Ungava is separated from the
+island by a large inland bay, extending southward to the 58&deg; N.L.
+North of Akpatok, the Esquimaux speak of islands well peopled by their
+countrymen, who have never seen Europeans.</p>
+
+<p>Having safely doubled the point or cape of <i>Uibvaksoak</i>, we came
+to an anchor near a small island to the south, where we spent the
+night.</p>
+
+<p>5th. Calm weather, and proceeded gently. About 9 A.M. the wind turned
+against us, and we ran into a small bay, about five miles from our
+former anchoring-place. Here we found the <i>Andromeda tetragona</i>
+growing in tolerable quantity, on the banks of a lagoon of fresh water.
+The face of the country was unpleasant, with many steep rocks. On a
+precipice behind our tent we perceived nests of birds of prey. The naked
+rocks had singular shapes, and presented to the imagination the ruins of
+a destroyed town. In the vallies we saw many small lagoons, but little
+grass, and the excrements of geese. It was about full moon, and the tide
+rising here five or six fathom, occasioned the most strange alterations
+in the prospect towards the sea, which, being smooth and clear of rocks
+at high water, exhibited, after its fall, an archipelago of rugged
+islands and black flats.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch9"></a>
+<a name="page50"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER IX.</h3>
+
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Chain of black mountains. The Dragon&rsquo;s dwelling. Changes
+occasioned by rise and fall of the tides, and dangers attending
+them. Uttakiyok&rsquo;s superstitious customs. Singular
+effect of the tide in the bay of Ittimnekoktok. Arrive at
+Kangertlualuksoak bay and river. Its situation. Transactions
+there.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>A<small>UGUST</small> 6th.&mdash;W<small>E </small>crossed the bay
+<i>Abloriak</i>, which is large and wide, with many small islands and
+rocks towards the sea, and high black mountains inland, called
+<i>Torngaets</i>. Uttakiyok, who was always very eager to make us
+attentive to every object and its name, shewed us here a wide and deep
+cavern, in shape like the gable end of an house, situated at the top of
+a precipice, in a black mountain, of a very horrid and dark appearance.
+This, he informed us, was the dwelling place of Torngak, the evil
+spirit. The scenery was, indeed, extremely wild and terrible, and the
+beforementioned prospect of the rocks and islands at low water gave to
+the whole country a most singularly gloomy character. Nor is this
+change, occasioned by the tide in the state of the sea, merely in
+appearance terrific, it is so in reality: for we never durst cast anchor
+in less than eight or nine fathoms water, lest at ebb-tide we should
+find ourselves aground, or even high and dry.</p>
+
+<p>The cavern just spoken of, connected with the chain of black
+mountains in which it is situated, we called the Dragon&rsquo;s
+dwelling, but had no time to examine the place, though it did not appear
+inaccessible. Whether Uttakiyok would have ventured to accompany us into
+it, is another question, for he was, with all his good sense, strongly
+attached to the superstitious notions and ceremonies of his <a name="page51"></a>countrymen.
+Thus, on passing dangerous places he always hung the claw of a raven to
+his breast, and carried the blown paunch of a seal upon a tent-pole
+fixed to one side of his boat. The latter is a common practice among the
+northern Esquimaux, and probably considered by them all as a very
+efficient charm.</p>
+
+<p>We passed <i>Sioralik</i>, and many small and flat rocky islands: the
+bay <i>Issorkitok</i>, (a grassy place), a nameless headland; and the
+larger bay <i>Nappartolik</i>, (a woody country). The wood is said to
+commence at the interior point of this bay, and to continue throughout
+the whole of the Ungava country, which, as we afterwards discovered,
+extends to a considerable distance to the southward. Then follows
+<i>Tunnuyalik</i>, a point, or perhaps an island, on which lies a huge
+white stone, twenty or thirty feet high, by which it is distinguished
+from other similar headlands. A chain of low, flat islands, runs out
+into the sea to a considerable distance, and appearing at a distance as
+continued land, they are mistaken for a cape. Farther on is the bay
+<i>Ittimnekoktok,</i> where it grew dark before we found a suitable
+anchorage. The wind was high, and some of our company went on shore in
+the skin-boat, in order to pitch their tent, and spend the night.</p>
+
+<p>7th. On rising, to our great surprise, we found ourselves left by the
+tide in a shallow pool of water, surrounded by rocky hills; nor could we
+at all discover the situation of our skin-boat, till after the water had
+begun to rise, and raised us above the banks of our watery dungeon,
+when, with great astonishment, not having been able to find it on the
+surface of the sea, and accidentally directing our eyes upwards, we saw
+it perched upon the top of a considerable eminence, and apparently on
+shore. We then landed, and ascending a rising ground, beheld with some
+terror, the wonderful changes occasioned by the tides. Our course was
+visible to the extent of two or three English miles, but <a name="page52"></a>the sea had
+left it, and we were obliged to remain in this dismal place, till about
+noon, before the water had risen sufficiently to carry us out. We now
+began to entertain fears, lest we might not always be able to find
+proper harbours, so as to avoid being left high and dry at low water;
+for having anchored in nine fathoms last night, we were left in one and
+a half this morning. Uttakiyok and Thukkekina were with us on shore. The
+eminence on which we stood was overgrown with vaccinia and other plants,
+and we saw among them marks of its being visited by hares. Near the
+summit was a spot, covered with red sand, which stained one&rsquo;s
+fingers, and among it were fragments of a substance resembling cast
+iron. We seemed here to stand on a peninsula connected by an isthmus
+with another island, or with the continent; but probably at high water
+it may be a separate island. </p>
+
+<p>As soon as the tide would permit, we set out, and proceeded towards a
+cape called <i>Kattaktok</i>, surrounded by small islands. Between the
+cape and our anchoring place, we passed, on the left, the following
+objects; <i>Keglo</i>, a broad deep bay; <i>Katarusialik</i>, a
+headland, probably of the continent; <i>Ukkasiksalik</i>, (meaning a
+place where soap stone is found), a peninsula; and to the right of the
+latter place, an island, <i>Kikkertarsoak</i>, which lies at the
+entrance of the <i>Great Bay</i>, or estuary of the great river
+<i>Kangertlualuksoak</i>. We sailed with a strong, but favourable wind,
+with some rain, between the peninsula and the island; and not trusting
+to the depth of the water at ebb-tide, sent two kayaks forward to sound.
+They soon brought us into a good harbour, where we cast anchor about
+half past five P.M.</p>
+
+<p><i>Kangertlualuksoak</i> river was the spot to which we had
+principally directed our views. It lies about 140 miles S.S.W. of Cape
+Chudleigh. By an observation at its mouth its latitude appeared to be
+58&deg; 57'. But we had no means of finding the longitude. At its
+entrance the bay <a name="page53"></a>runs rather S.S.E. for about ten or twelve English
+miles, then turns due S.E. for six or eight more, and after that S.W. At
+the second turn towards the S.E. there is the greatest quantity of wood,
+chiefly Larch, but of moderate size. We particularly noticed a fine
+slope facing the south, which appeared the most pleasant part of the
+bay, to which a vessel might approach and anchor with convenience, there
+being from 24 to 30 fathoms water. We also imagined that the entrance
+from the sea would be free from obstructions, as no islands are seen in
+that direction. Uttakiyok likewise declared, that there was no bar or
+sunken rocks near the mouth of the bay.</p>
+
+<p>We found no inhabitants on our arrival, but on the 13th, a whole
+company of people from Killinek joined us.</p>
+
+<p>Our transactions in the bay of <i>Kangertlualuksoak</i>, from the
+7th, are here noticed more in detail.</p>
+
+<p><i>August</i> 8th. We landed, and went in search of our people, who
+had spent the night in tents on shore. Okkiksuk accompanied us to the
+top of a hill, overlooking the bay <i>Ittimnekoktok</i>, where we had
+anchored the day before. We saw it quite dry, and full of large
+fragments of rock. Turning towards the land, we discovered some wood at
+a distance. The weather being calm and warm, the musquitoes were
+excessively troublesome. The vallies here are overgrown with verdure,
+and the hills pretty well clothed with moss, and berry-bearing plants;
+but we could not continue our walk, on account of the musquitoes, which
+persecuted us unmercifully, and drove us back to our tents. All our men
+were out, two on that side on which we had landed, and the others having
+crossed the bay in their kayaks, were employed in hunting reindeer.
+Jonathan only remained at home. In the afternoon he accompanied us in
+the small boat, to a hill, situated to the South of our station, at
+about two miles distant, where we landed, and went up the country, but
+found nothing much worth notice. We observed, <a name="page54"></a>that round the headland
+near us, the water was very rough, with eddies and whirlpools,
+occasioned by the rising of the high tides. On returning to our little
+boat, we found it aground. We therefore gathered some drift-wood, of
+which there was plenty, and made a good fire, at which we sat down and
+regaled ourselves with some biscuit and beer. Having pushed the boat
+into the water, we set out, but owing to the violence of the current had
+hard work to get to the great boat, and did not arrive till dark. Jonas
+saluted us from on board, by firing off his piece in token of success,
+and we found that he had got two, and his companion three reindeer, and
+a small black bear. The carcases were left at the tents, where part was
+cooked, and a mess brought to us on board, which proved an agreeable
+repast after our fatigue. Jonas and his family spent the night on board,
+the rest of the Esquimaux in their tents on shore.</p>
+
+<p>9th. Jonas having found a good harbour on the other side of the bay,
+and the current being here very strong, we sailed across and anchored
+there. The strand was even, and full of smooth rocks, above high water
+mark. The bottom of the bay is mud, and a slimy substance, covering all
+the stones and pebbles, left by the tide, makes walking very
+troublesome.</p>
+
+<p>The land is not high, but pleasant, covered with moss, with many
+small ponds, and marks of being frequented by reindeer. </p>
+
+<p>10th. We went farther up the bay in the skin-boat, with Jonathan,
+Uttakiyok, Thukkekina, Paul, David, and Okkiksuk. At a short distance
+from the place where we had landed yesterday, we came to a fine green
+terrace, overgrown with low shrubs and bushes, which delighted us much.
+From hence, a woody valley, extending to the left, seemed to invite us
+to take that course into the country, but we would not waste our time by
+examining it. On sailing farther up the bay, and turning round the
+<a name="page55"></a>abovementioned terrace, we came to a small inlet, dry at low water, on
+the left shore. Its banks were pleasantly covered with low bushes,
+interspersed with higher trees, and the place seemed to us very suitable
+for a settlement. From hence we perceived, at a short distance, on the
+opposite coast, a cape or headland, over which the tops of trees made
+their appearance. We sailed towards it, and found behind it a tract
+covered with low wood, chiefly larch and pine: on landing we saw the
+tracks of rein-deer, which had just left the spot. Jonathan, in an
+instant, ran like a young man for his gun, and with it into the wood. We
+followed him for two or three miles, but saw nothing but the track of
+the deer. The country inland seems in general level, with some low
+hills, and many ponds; without wood, but overgrown with rein-deer moss.
+No success attended our huntsman, and in the evening we met again in the
+boat. Brother Kmoch had kept up with Jonathan, and saw, among the
+bushes, the same kind of large partridge, or American wild pheasant,
+which is found about Okkak, but seems only to live in woods. It was a
+hen, with a covey of young birds, one of which which he caught,
+examined, and let go again, nor would he take or shoot the hen, out of
+compassion to the young brood.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Kohlmeister had meanwhile gone farther up the bay, and
+thought he had discovered the entrance of the river, but no fresh water
+appearing, we must still have been a great way off its influx into the
+bay.</p>
+
+<p>We now lighted a fire, boiled coffee, and cooked a dish of reindeer
+venison. The weather was warm, and the night fine and clear, but frosty.
+Having brought our travelling-beds with us on shore, (<a href="#page34">see
+page 34</a>), we crept into them, and spent the night at the fire-side,
+the Esquimaux lying down anywhere about us. In the morning, the whole
+country was covered with hoar-frost, and the straw we had lain upon was
+frozen fast to the ground.</p>
+</div>
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch10"></a>
+<a name="page56"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER X.</h3>
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Further transactions in Kangertlualuksoak Bay. The Esquimaux
+women frightened by reports of Indians. Ceremony of taking
+possession of this new-explored country, as belonging to the King
+of England, and of naming the river George river. Leave the bay
+and proceed to Arvarvik. Whales caught by the Esquimaux in the
+shallows. Storm at Kernertut.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>A<small>UGUST</small> 11th.&mdash;W<small>E</small> rose by break of day, and after breakfast,
+sailed across the bay, and landed at the second small inlet, with an
+intention of penetrating into the country, but the returning warmth of
+the weather by day, and the myriads of musquitoes we had to contend
+with, rendered us unable to execute our purpose.</p>
+
+<p>The Missionaries and Jonathan ascended a hill, from which a great
+tract of country might be overlooked. It was full of wood, as far as the
+eye could reach. Near the inlet some places seemed boggy, or covered
+with grass. From hence a valley stretched into the country, with a small
+lake in it, about two or three miles distant. Berries were every where
+in abundance. The summits of the hills had no wood upon them, but much
+reindeer-moss.</p>
+
+<p>On our return, being about a mile from our landing-place, we saw our
+skin-boat in the middle of the bay, and fired a gun as a signal for it
+to come to us. The Esquimaux had five rein-deer in the boat, which
+Uttakiyok had perceived on the opposite bank. He had followed them in
+his kayak, driven them into the water, and killed them there. When hard
+pressed, reindeer soon take to the water, and swim so well, that a
+four-oared boat can scarcely come up <a name="page57"></a>with them, but an Esquimaux, in his
+kayak will overtake them. They therefore, if possible, drive them into
+the water, being then sure of their game.</p>
+
+<p>After dining on part of the venison, we returned to the great boat.
+On the passage, we thought we perceived at a considerable distance a
+black bear, and Uttakiyok, elated with his recent success, hoped to gain
+new laurels. He entered his kayak and proceeded as cautiously as
+possible along the shore, towards the spot, landed, climbed the hill, so
+as not to be observed, but when he had got just within gun-shot,
+perceived, that his bear was a black stone. This adventure furnished the
+company with merriment for the remainder of the voyage to the boat,
+which we reached about six P.M. </p>
+
+<p>When we got on board the boat, we found that all the women had taken
+refuge in it, thinking that they had seen Indians onshore. The men
+therefore immediately landed, to take care of the forsaken tents. This
+was no doubt a false alarm, for we never discovered any traces of them
+during our stay. To the south of Hopedale the Indians and Esquimaux
+sometimes meet, but as the Hopedale Esquimaux seek to cultivate their
+friendship, quarrels and bloodshed seldom occur. In Ungava, however,
+though they often exchange tokens of friendship, they are apt to give
+way to their national jealousies; and provocations being aggravated,
+their meetings now and then terminate in murder. The Esquimaux are much
+afraid of the Indians, who are a more nimble and active race.</p>
+
+<p>12th. Having finished reconnoitring the neighbourhood, and gathered
+all the information concerning it, which our means would permit, and
+likewise fixed upon the green slope or terrace above described, as the
+most suitable place for a settlement, on account of the abundance of
+wood in its neighbourhood, we made preparations to proceed. Uttakiyok,
+who had spent more than one winter in the Ungava country, assured us,
+that there was here an ample supply of <a name="page58"></a>provisions, both in summer and
+winter, which Jonathan also credited, from his own observation. The
+former likewise expressed himself convinced, that if we would form a
+settlement here, many Esquimaux would come to us from all parts. We
+ourselves were satisfied that Europeans might find the means of
+existence in this place, as it was accessible for ships, and had wood
+and water in plenty. As for Esquimaux, there appeared no want of those
+things upon which they live, the sea abounding with whitefish, seals,
+sea fowl, &amp;c. and the land with reindeer, hares, bears, and other
+animals. The people from Killinek declared their intention of removing
+hither, if we would come and dwell among them, and are even now in the
+habit of visiting this place every summer. Our own company even
+expressed a wish to spend the winter here.</p>
+
+<p>This being the day before our departure, we erected, on two opposite
+hills, at the entrance of the bay, high marks of stones, and on the
+declivity of a hill to the right, a board, into which we had cut an
+inscription, thus&mdash;</p><br />
+
+<table summary="Inscriptions" align="center">
+		<tr align="center">
+		<td align="center">
+In front,
+		</td>
+				<td align="center">
+&nbsp;
+		</td>
+			<td align="center">
+At the back.
+		</td>
+</tr>
+	<tr align="center">
+	<td align="center">
+	<img width="35%" src="images/3a.png" alt=
+		"Tablet front" /></td>
+	<td align="center">
+			&nbsp;</td>
+	<td align="center">
+           <img width="35%" src="images/3b.png" alt=
+		"Tablet back" /></td>
+ </tr>
+	<tr align="center">
+	<td align="center">
+     <small>Georgius III. Rex.<br />
+            Societas<br />
+	        Unitatis Fratrum.<br />
+	        &nbsp;</small></td>
+	<td align="center">
+            &nbsp;</td>
+
+	<td align="center">
+     <small>Benjamin Kohlmeister,<br />
+            George Kmoch,<br />
+            Aug. 7, 1811. <br />
+            The day of our arrival.</small></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+<br />
+<p>We raised and fixed this tablet with some solemnity, in presence of
+Uttakiyok and his family, as representatives of the people of Ungava,
+and of our own company, and hoisted the British flag alongside of it,
+while another was displayed at the same time in the boat. We explained
+the cause of this ceremony to all present, to the following
+effect&mdash;</p>
+
+<a name="page59"></a><p>&ldquo;That we, on this day, raised this sign, in the name of our
+king, George III. the great monarch of all these territories, in
+testimony of our having explored it, and made choice of it, in case we
+or our Brethren should think proper to settle here. To which we called
+upon all present to bear witness.&rdquo; We then proclaimed the name of
+the Kangertlualuksoak to be henceforth <i>George River</i>, upon which
+every man fired his piece three times, the vollies being answered from
+the boat.</p>
+
+<p>The texts of scripture appointed for this day were then read, and we
+remarked how encouraging they were, as relating to the purpose, for
+which we visited these unknown regions:</p>
+
+
+<p><i>From the rising of the sun, even to the going down of the same, my
+name shall be great among the Gentiles, saith the Lord of Hosts!</i>
+Mal. 11, 1.</p>
+
+<p><i>At the name of Jesus every knee shall bow, of things in heaven,
+and things in earth, and things under the earth; and every tongue shall
+confess, that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God the Father!</i>
+Philippians, 2, 10, 11.</p>
+
+<p>After the ceremony was over, we distributed some pease, bread, and
+beer among the Esquimaux, which enabled them to make a splendid feast,
+and the day was spent in the most agreeable manner.</p>
+
+<p>13th. We set sail, about six A.M. with a gentle breeze, which however
+soon fell away entirely, and obliged us to take to our oars. Near the
+mouth of the bay, we met several kayaks, coming towards us. They were
+Esquimaux from Killinek, who expressed regret at not having sooner heard
+of our being here; some came on board, and traded with our people. We
+presented them with a little tobacco, for which they were very
+thankful.</p>
+
+<p>In order to get well out of the bay, we first steered North, and then
+passed to the S.W. between a peninsula <i>Nauyat</i>, lying to the left
+of the entrance, and seven small islands and <a name="page60"></a>rocks on the right, towards
+the island of <i>Arvarvik</i>, about six or seven miles distant, where
+we were obliged to cast anchor in an exposed situation, the wind having
+become contrary. There was a strong swell during the night, which
+violently agitated our boat.</p>
+
+<p><i>Arvarvik</i> is about five miles in circumference. It is covered
+with the bones of whales, which the Esquimaux catch here in their
+kayaks. The coast is surrounded by a great number of small low islands,
+with deep pools between them. Into these the whales stray at high water,
+and at the ebbing of the tide, are prevented finding their way back
+again. The Esquimaux then pursue and kill them with harpoons. In the
+island are ponds of fresh water, and some low hills, overgrown with
+moss. A great number of sea-fowl, and also reindeer, are found upon
+it.</p>
+
+<p>On the shore we found great quantities of a red jasper, or
+iron-stone, the same which occurs throughout the coast, from
+<i>Killinek</i> to South river, not as a stratum, but in lumps, and
+generally below high water mark.</p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux who landed on the continent reported, that about two
+miles inland, there was much low wood.</p>
+
+<p>14th. We left our unpleasant anchorage, and returned to a place where
+the skin-boat had lain during the night, as it was sheltered from the
+South wind, which had risen considerably.</p>
+
+<p>15th. Our people went out to hunt reindeer, and returned in the
+evening with two. The wind shifted to the west, and blew with violence.
+We spent again an uneasy night.</p>
+
+<p>16th. Brother Kmoch went on shore and returned with a parcel of
+stones for examination. We now began to feel some anxiety on account of
+the great loss of time we were suffering here by contrary winds.</p>
+
+<p>17th. About eight o&rsquo;clock we set sail, the wind having come
+round to the S.E. with a cloudy sky. We passed <a name="page61"></a>several nameless islands,
+at the distance of about a mile from the shore. In the afternoon, it
+began to rain hard, and after having sailed about twelve miles, we cast
+anchor near a long point of land, called <i>Kernertut</i>, by which we
+were sheltered from the wind, which had again turned to the South-west.
+The sky however was clear, and the beginning of the night pleasant, with
+beautiful appearances of the Aurora Borealis. Most of our people, and
+with them Uttakiyok, had gone in the skin-boat higher up the bay, but it
+was too shallow to admit of our following them. Only Jonas and his
+children, and the two boys Okkiksuk and Mammak, were left with us on
+board.</p>
+
+<p>During the night the wind veered round to the N.E. and blew a gale,
+which increased in violence till day-break.</p>
+
+<p>18th. The sea now rose to a tremendous height, such as we had never
+before experienced, and by the change of wind, we were exposed to the
+whole of its fury. The rain fell in torrents. We lay at three anchors,
+and the boat was tossed about terribly, the sea frequently breaking
+quite over her, insomuch that we expected every moment to be swallowed
+up in the abyss. With much difficulty we succeeded in lowering our
+after-mast. Jonathan and the rest of our company on shore, were obliged
+to be passive spectators of the dreadful scene, waiting the event in
+silent anguish. They quitted their tents, and came forward to some
+eminences near the beach, where, by lifting up their hands, and other
+gestures, they expressed terror, bordering on despair. Frequently the
+boat was hid from their view by the waves, which ran mountains high.
+They expected every moment that we should break loose from our anchors,
+and the boat be driven on the rocks. The length of our cables was here
+of the greatest advantage to us. About noon, the rope by which the small
+boat was fastened, broke. She was immediately carried up the bay, and
+thrown, by the violence of the surf, on the top of a rock, where she
+stuck fast, keel upwards. It <a name="page62"></a>was impossible to render us any assistance,
+till the tide turned, when the raging of the sea, and the wind, began to
+abate. As soon as it was practicable, Jonathan and the other men came to
+us in the skin-boat. He seemed quite overcome with joy, and, not able to
+utter a word, held out his hand, and shed tears of gratitude that he met
+us again alive, for he had given us up for lost.</p>
+
+<p>We now endeavoured to bring the great boat closer to the shore,
+landed, pitched our tent, and gave thanks to God for the merciful
+deliverance we had just experienced. Indeed all our people most
+fervently joined in praise to Him for the preservation of our lives. A
+warm dinner was soon prepared, by which we were much refreshed.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as the tide had ebbed sufficiently for it, our people went to
+the rock, on which the small boat lay, and got her into the water. To
+our great surprize we found, that she had received no material
+injury.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch11"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER XI.</h3>
+
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Doubts expressed by Jonathan and the other Esquimaux on
+the expediency of continuing the voyage. Consultations.
+Resolve to proceed. Thunder-storm at Pitsiolak. Account
+of Indians. Esquimaux cookery and hunting feasts. Arrival
+in the river Koksoak.</p>
+</div>
+
+<div class="text">
+<p>J<small>ONATHAN</small> and Jonas now became more and more anxious
+about our situation. They represented to us, that, if
+we attempted to proceed farther, we might probably be
+compelled to remain here the whole winter, as the stormy
+season was fast approaching. They added, that to <i>them</i>, it
+would be of little consequence, but that they were concerned
+on <i>our</i> account.</p>
+
+<a name="page63"></a><p>Though we had not said any thing as yet that might tend
+to shake the confidence of our party, yet we felt no small
+degree of perplexity concerning present appearances. During
+the six days since we left George&rsquo;s River, we had made
+little more than fourteen or fifteen miles, and were at least,
+as far as we could judge, seventy or eighty from the river
+<i>Koksoak</i>, which we had fixed upon as the final object of the
+voyage, being the outermost western boundary of the Ungava
+country. Insurmountable difficulties seemed now to present
+themselves, owing partly to contrary winds and cold weather,
+and partly to loss of time, for we had been already two
+months on the voyage, and had not yet obtained our aim:
+so that our return might be unseasonably late, if we proceeded.
+We could not possibly make up our minds to
+spend the winter here, as we had not a sufficient supply of
+provisions, and knew what distress it would occasion to our
+Brethren at Okkak.</p>
+
+<p>We felt quite at a loss what to do in this dilemma, and our
+path seemed enveloped in obscurity. We remembered, that
+&ldquo;<i>to the upright there ariseth a light in the darkness</i>,&rdquo; (Ps.
+112, 4): that is, to them who fear and trust in the Lord, and
+sincerely desire to know and do His will, He will reveal it.
+In His name we had entered upon this voyage, the only ultimate
+object of which was, the conversion of a benighted,
+neglected nation, in one of the remotest corners of the earth.
+We were, therefore, sure that He would not forsake us, nor
+leave us in uncertainty as to His will concerning us, but that
+He, &ldquo;<i>whose eyes run to and fro throughout the whole
+earth, to shew Himself strong in the behalf of them whose
+heart is perfect towards Him</i>,&rdquo; (2 Chron. 16, 9.) was,
+even in this desolate region, present with us, and would
+hear and answer our prayers. Many comfortable texts of
+scripture occurred to our minds on this occasion, filling us
+with an extraordinary degree of faith and confidence in Him,
+<a name="page64"></a>particularly such as, &ldquo;<i>He will be very gracious unto thee
+at the voice of thy cry; when He shall hear it, He will answer
+thee</i>,&rdquo; Isa. 30, 19. Also, Dan. 10, 19; Jer. 16, 21;
+Isa. 43, 2, &amp;c. The mercies, also, which we had already
+experienced, excited within us a sense of the deepest gratitude
+and most firm trust; and we therefore told our people,
+that we indeed participated in their concern, would take
+the subject into serious consideration, and acquaint them
+with our determination on the morrow.</p>
+
+<p>19th. In the morning we met in our tent, where we were
+safe from the intrusion of the Esquimaux, to confer together
+upon this most important subject. We weighed all the circumstances
+connected with it, maturely and impartially, as
+in the presence of God, and, not being able to come to any
+decision, where reasons for and against the question seemed
+to hold such an even balance, we determined to commit our
+case to Him, who has promised, that &ldquo;<i>if two of His people
+shall agree on earth, as touching any thing that they shall
+ask, it shall be done for them</i>,&rdquo; (Matth. 18, 19.) and,
+kneeling down, entreated Him to hear our prayers and supplications
+in this our distressed and embarrassing situation,
+and to make known to us His will concerning our future
+proceedings, whether we should persevere in fulfilling the
+whole aim of our voyage, or, prevented by circumstances,
+give up a part, and return home from this place.</p>
+
+<p>The peace of God which filled our hearts on this memorable
+occasion, and the strong conviction wrought in us both,
+that we should persevere, in His name, to fulfil the whole
+of our commission, relying without fear on His help and
+preservation, no words can describe; but those who believe
+in the fulfilment of the gracious promises of Jesus, given to
+His poor followers and disciples, will understand us, when
+we declare, that we were assured, that it was the will of God
+our Saviour, that we should not now return and leave our
+<a name="page65"></a>work unfinished, but proceed to the end of our proposed
+voyage. Each of us communicated to his brother the conviction
+of his heart, all fears and doubts vanished, and we
+were filled anew with courage and willingness to act in obedience
+to it, in the strength of the Lord. O that all men
+knew the comfort and happiness of a mind devoted unto, and
+firmly trusting in God in all things!</p>
+
+<p>When we made known our determination to Jonathan
+and his son Jonas, and told them, that we had maturely considered
+the subject committed by them to us, and that, in
+answer to our prayers, the Lord had convinced us, that, not
+having obtained the aim of our voyage, we should proceed,
+Jonas, at first, seemed not quite satisfied, but our excellent
+captain, Jonathan, without hesitation replied: &ldquo;Yes, that
+is also my conviction! We will go whither Jesus directs
+us. He will bring us safe to our journey&rsquo;s end, and
+safe home again.&rdquo; We were, indeed, glad and thankful
+that the Lord had inclined the heart of this man, who but
+yesterday seemed to be quite dispirited, to take this resolution,
+for much depended upon him, and the rest followed
+him without difficulty. Indeed they all submitted to our determination
+with a willing mind, and their expressions of
+resignation affected us much.</p>
+
+<p>During the day, the men had been out a-hunting, when
+Uttakiyok killed three reindeer, which occasioned great rejoicing,
+and helped to make our people forget the frightful
+scenes of yesterday. The country is full of black looking
+rocks, between which reindeer-moss and berries grow in
+plenty. The shore exhibited still many marks of the violence
+of the storm.</p>
+
+<p>20th. We proceeded with a favourable wind at N.E.
+Our course lay S.W. across a broad bay, then, after doubling
+a point, across another bay of about the same breadth,
+to an island <i>Allukpaluk</i>, which we passed on the right, and
+<a name="page66"></a>on the left, another island, <i>Nipkotok</i>. At a considerable distance
+a-head lay the islands <i>Pitsiolak</i>, opposite a headland
+of the continent called <i>Tuktutok</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The sky had been from the morning cloudy, the wind became
+unfavourable and violent, and about noon heavy rain
+came on. Not being well able to proceed, on account of the
+violence of the wind, we cast anchor on the west side of
+<i>Pitsiolak</i>, about 2 P.M. but perceiving a thunderstorm
+rising from the western horizon, with very black clouds,
+threatening to drive us on shore if we remained at this anchorage,
+we weighed as quickly as possible, and endeavoured
+to get to the other side of the island.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile a most tremendous storm of thunder, lightning,
+and rain overtook us. The claps of thunder followed the
+flashes without interval, and the lightning seemed to strike
+into the water close to our boat, while the wind carried the
+spray into the air like smoke. Providentially we had
+doubled the northern point before the worst came on, and
+got to an anchor under shelter of the land. The storm passed
+by swiftly, it grew calm, the sun broke out, and the weather
+became uncommonly fine with us, though at a distance we
+saw the black clouds, and heard the hollow murmuring of
+the thunder for a long time.</p>
+
+<p>We now expected to have a comfortable night&rsquo;s rest, but
+it grew intensely cold, and again began to blow violently
+from the west. The strong current and heavy swell brought
+us into some danger, and the poor people, who were obliged
+to remain on deck all night, suffered much from cold and
+wet. When the tide was full, about midnight, the island
+we had seen to the west nearly vanished, the greater part being
+covered with water.</p>
+
+<p>21st. In the morning we again saw the skin-boat lying
+upon a pretty high rock, and a tent pitched close to it. The
+weather was calm, but the wind contrary. Our Esquimaux
+<a name="page67"></a>made good use of this respite to refresh themselves after
+the fatigues of the night with a hearty meal and a sound nap.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon we landed. The island Pitsiolak, which
+forms two at high water, is low and flat, overgrown with
+Empetrum and Rubus Cham&#339;morus, (<i>Akpik</i>-berries).
+Quantities of driftwood float about the shores. The jasper
+occurred here again. This island may be about four or five
+miles long, and, at low water, is connected with other islands
+to the north. By the help of our glasses we could perceive
+woods on the continent, and the Esquimaux thought they
+discovered the smoke of Indian fires. They are much afraid
+of meeting these people. Bloody encounters occasionally
+occur between them. The Indians come from the interior,
+and from Hudson&rsquo;s Bay, and are frequently seen near the
+two principal rivers, George river and South river, towards
+which we were going; but we met with none. Brother
+Kohlmeister rather wished for it, as some of them are said to
+understand English, and he was desirous of endeavouring
+to bring them to a more peaceable disposition towards the
+Esquimaux, by friendly conversation.</p>
+
+<p>22d. We found the skin-boat a great hindrance to us.
+Without being obliged to take that in tow, we might have
+kept at a greater distance from the shore, which would have
+enabled us to get on more rapidly, and with greater safety.
+On shore we found a great quantity of cubical pyrites in a
+grey matrix. The Esquimaux are attentive to this mineral,
+and have before now brought it to Okkak.</p>
+
+<p>23d. We proceeded at 6 A.M. and steered for the island
+of <i>Saeglorsoak</i>. The islands called <i>Nocharutsit</i> lay on our
+left. They are a group of numerous small islands, many of
+which are overflowed at high water, extending W. and E.
+towards the entrance of South river. Between these islands
+and Akpatok, the sea is said to be clear of rocks, and the
+water of sufficient depth for any ship entering from Hudson&rsquo;s
+<a name="page68"></a>Straits, and bound to the Koksoak, or South river; but no
+ship durst, in our opinion, venture to approach the coast
+of Ungava within twenty or thirty miles.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon, the tide turning against us, and the wind
+unfavourable, we were obliged to come to an anchor among
+the islands. We had left the skin-boat behind, with Thukkekina,
+Uttakiyok&rsquo;s brother Annoray, and one of his wives,
+to whom he had given his baggage in charge. The Esquimaux
+wives are very punctilious, the first always maintains
+the highest dignity, regulates the housekeeping, distributes
+the provisions, and directs everything, as mistress of the family.</p>
+
+<p>Jonas went out in his kayak, and shot a seal. We saw
+many, and fired at them, but got none. Whitefish were
+likewise seen at a distance. Uttakiyok and David were out
+in their kayaks, and joined us in the evening loaded with geese.</p>
+
+<p>On the turn of the tide we proceeded, and at ten P.M.
+cast anchor among the Nocharutsits, under a pretty high
+island, about three or four miles in circumference. All our
+people remained on board during the night, which was calm
+and pleasant.</p>
+
+<p>24th. David roused us about five o&rsquo;clock, by firing at a
+seal, which he killed. The women went on shore to cook
+it with some geese. When they returned, we all breakfasted
+on the contents of their pot.</p>
+
+<p>The Esquimaux want no books of cookery to manage
+their kitchen affairs. The meat is boiled with the blood in
+it, and the addition of some water. When it is sufficiently
+done, that is, according the Ungava custom, when half warm,
+the women take it out of the pot, and serve it up on a piece
+of stone, if on shore, and on a piece of board, if at sea. Then
+the person, who has caught the seal or game, proclaims with
+great vociferation, that the <i>men</i> may come and sit down to
+eat. Such exertion of voice, however, seems hardly <a name="page69"></a>necessary,
+as the Esquimaux are very acute at hearing, when they
+are invited to dinner. When the men have done, the women
+sit down, having taken good care, beforehand, that their
+share is secured. The Esquimaux customs never permit
+men and women to sit down together at a meal.</p>
+
+<p>It sometimes happens among the heathen Esquimaux,
+that several having had good success, one huntsman&rsquo;s feast
+is hardly over, before another proclaims the invitation to
+his banquet. This is never suffered to pass unnoticed, while
+the power of cramming down another morsel remains. Thus
+they will continue eating, till they are scarcely able to
+breathe, and then lie down to sleep off the effects of their
+gluttony. Indeed their excessive voraciousness on such
+occasions produces, especially after long fasting, all the
+symptoms of drunkenness. They forget, under its sensual
+influence, all moderation, and abandon themselves to the
+most disgusting abominations.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon we steered W. by N. (wind N.E.), for
+the cape of <i>Kernerauyak</i>, at the east side of the entrance of
+the river <i>Koksoak</i>, (Sand river). Before we arrived at the
+cape, we left some islands to the South, the largest of which
+is again called <i>Kikkertarsoak. Saeglorsoak</i>, is a large flat
+island, about eight or ten miles long, and its neighbourhood
+very dangerous, on account of many sunken rocks. The
+continent hereabouts is well wooded, and Indians are said
+to be frequently seen in the interior. The mouth of the
+Koksoak is seven or eight English miles broad: its shores
+steep, but the rocks in general low, and covered with moss.
+The Esquimaux say, that in the middle there is water
+enough for any large ship, though the tides prevent any near
+approach to the land. At sunset we came to an anchor at
+the mouth of the river.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch12"></a>
+<a name="page70"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER XII.</h3>
+
+<div class="synopsis">
+<p>Sail up the river Koksoak. Transactions in that region.
+Dangerous eddy. Meet Esquimaux. Address to them.
+Their joy and eagerness to have Missionaries, resident
+among them. Find a suitable situation for a settlement.
+Description of the country.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="text">
+<p>A<small>UGUST </small>25th.&mdash;T<small>HIS</small> was the joyful day on which at last
+we saw our hopes realized, and the principal aim of our
+journey obtained. The sun rose beautifully, and announced
+a delightful day. We were obliged to wait till seven A.M.
+for the turn of the tide, before we could proceed up the
+river. The estuary of the <i>Koksoak</i> lies, according to
+an observation taken, in 58&deg; 36' N. latitude, nearly the
+same as Okkak. To the west the country is called by
+the Esquimaux <i>Assokak</i>, the coast turning again W.N.W.
+This river, therefore, seems to be at the most southern point
+of the coast, George&rsquo;s river entering the sea at 58&deg; 52', consequently
+more North.</p>
+
+<p>The Koksoak appeared to us to be about as broad as the
+Thames at Gravesend, or the Elbe near Hamburg, and
+the whole river, with its various windings, much resembles
+the Thames for twenty-four miles upwards. Its depth is
+sufficient for a ship thus far. Its general direction is from
+the South. We reckoned it to be about 600 or 700 miles
+from Okkak, and Killinek or Cape Chudleigh half way.</p>
+
+<p>Having proceeded five or six miles up the river, we came
+to a small island, which we left on our right.</p>
+
+<p>We saw several sacks of blubber, a sledge, and some other,
+<a name="page71"></a>articles lying on the beach, and Jonathan and Brother
+Kmoch went in the small boat to discover the proprietors,
+but found nobody there, to guard the goods.</p>
+
+<p>A little farther on is a point of land running out into
+nearly the middle of the stream. The current sets very
+rapidly round it, so as to form a dangerous eddy. Our boat
+was seized, and twice turned quite round; the small boat
+was whirled about several times, as she pushed through it.
+The women on board our boat, on seeing this, set up a loud
+scream; but Jonathan only laughed at their fears, and we
+afterwards saw kayaks passing the eddy in perfect safety.</p>
+
+<p>Having doubled the point, we perceived several kayaks
+approaching. The people in them shouted aloud for joy,
+exclaiming, <i>Innuit, Innuit</i>! Men, Men! Some guns were
+also fired in the boat, which were soon answered by some
+fowling-pieces from the shore.</p>
+
+<p>We now saw three tents pitched on the bank, and hoisted
+our colours, when we were incessantly hailed by the inhabitants.
+There was a general cry of <i>Kuv&egrave;, Kuv&egrave;, Kablunaet,
+Kablunaet!</i> Europeans, Europeans! from the men in the
+kayaks, who, by all manner of gesticulations, expressed their
+pleasure, brandishing their pautiks, (oars), and shouting
+continually as they rowed alongside the boat. The women
+on shore answered with loud acclamations.</p>
+
+<p>About one P.M. we cast anchor close to their habitations.
+Fourteen families were here, among whom were some from
+a distant district, called <i>Eivektok</i>. These had pitched their
+tents farther up the river. <i>Arnauyak</i> was with them, a
+man, with whom Brother Kohlmeister had become acquainted
+some years ago, exceedingly regretted, that he had but
+a few days ago left the place, to hunt reindeer on George&rsquo;s
+river. The children expressed their joy by running to and
+fro on the strand, like wild creatures.       </p>
+
+<p>At first, the people in the tents appeared rather shy, but
+after accepting of some trifling presents, they became quite
+<a name="page72"></a>communicative, and gave us some of their toys in exchange;
+then walking round us, surveyed us narrowly, as if we were
+a new species of animals. Most of them had never before
+seen an European. Uttakiyok&rsquo;s brother had joined them,
+and already informed them of our arrival, without which
+they would probably have been yet more alarmed at seeing
+strangers, and hearing the report of fire-arms.</p>
+
+<p>They now invited all our people to dine with them, and
+having heard that Brother Kohlmeister would like to taste
+the flesh of a whitefish, a kettle was immediately placed on
+the fire, and a large piece put in to boil. Brother Kmoch
+meanwhile cooked a savoury soup of birds, and reindeer-flesh,
+more fit for an European stomach. While dinner was
+preparing, Brother Kohlmeister took a walk up the bank of
+the river, and across some hills. As the families belonging
+to <i>Eivektok</i> had their summer dwelling in that neighbourhood,
+the Esquimaux, on perceiving that he had walked in
+that direction, and fearing that the Eivektok people, seeing
+him alone, might mistake him for an Indian, and shoot at
+him, dispatched two men to bring him back. They missed
+him, and he returned before them. He found our people
+very pleasantly conversing with the heathen concerning the
+aim of our journey, and the way of salvation. Even Uttakiyok
+was thus engaged, explaining, as well as he could, the
+cause of our living in Labrador: he exclaimed, &ldquo;let us,
+my friends, all be converted to Jesus.&rdquo; He was heard with
+peculiar attention, being considered as a captain among
+them. In the evening we sang hymns in Jonathan&rsquo;s tent.
+The people all came and listened with much seriousness.</p>
+
+<p>26th. To-day the Eivektok families came in a skin-boat
+down the river, to see us. They were full of astonishment,
+but soon took courage, and handled us, to discover whether
+we were made of the same materials with themselves. An
+old man, <i>Netsiak</i>, addressed Brother Kohlmeister: &ldquo;Are you
+Benjamin? I have never seen you with my eyes, but at
+<a name="page73"></a>Eivektok have heard your name often mentioned.&rdquo; He
+seemed to be a sensible man, and a captain among his tribe.</p>
+
+<p>We could not help remarking the difference between these
+Esquimaux and their countrymen living on the same coasts
+with our settlements. The former are very poor, and miserably
+equipped, whereas the latter, by their intercourse with
+us and other Europeans, have acquired many conveniences,
+and are, by barter, well provided with what they want.</p>
+
+<p>27th. We proceeded farther up the river, accompanied by
+most of the men, and some women, in their skin-boat, and
+arrived at a bay, which, by the winding of the stream, appears
+like a lake, surrounded on all sides with gently rising
+grounds, well planted with wood of moderate size, chiefly
+larch. Behind the wood are some low hills. We named
+this place <i>Unity&rsquo;s Bay</i>. There is here a very good place for
+a Missionary settlement. A fine slope extends for about half
+an English mile, bounded on each extremity by a hill, on
+each of which we erected high signals. The land is even and
+dry. Juniper, currants, and other berries, grow here in
+abundance, and rivulets run out of the wood at a distance of
+a few hundred paces from each other. The slope faces the
+S.S.E. and we named it <i>Pilgerruh</i>, (Pilgrim&rsquo;s rest). Brother
+Kohlmeister made drawings of the situation.</p>
+
+<p>From our first arrival we had improved every opportunity
+of making the Esquimaux acquainted with the chief aim of our
+visit to this country, and addressed them both singly and in
+companies. Nor were Jonathan and Jonas remiss in conversing
+with them about the concerns of their immortal souls, declaring
+to them the love of God our Saviour towards them.
+We once met with Sybilla, Jonathan&rsquo;s wife, seated with a
+company of women, under the shadow of a skin-boat, set on
+edge, exhorting them, with great simplicity and fervour, to
+hear and believe the gospel.</p>
+
+<p>28th. Brother Kmoch landed with Jonathan, and spent
+<a name="page74"></a>some hours in examining the banks of the river. On ascending
+the first eminence, the view of the interior is in
+general flat, with a few low hills, and ponds in some places,
+full of wild geese. The timber in the woods hereabouts is
+not large: we found none fit for masts. The largest trees
+were not more than eight inches in diameter, and fifteen or
+twenty feet high. They are chiefly larch and pines. In
+some places we found them burnt or withered, and were
+informed by the Esquimaux, that it was the effect of the
+Indian&rsquo;s fires. Indeed we saw several places where the Indians
+had put up huts, and left sufficient vestiges of their
+abode. Berries grow everywhere, and between the river
+and the wood, the plain is chiefly covered with willows,
+high grass growing between them, but these and the various
+shrubs are so low, that a man can easily look over them.
+In all directions we saw the tracks of reindeer, and there
+is every appearance of its being a place much frequented
+by these animals. Deeper in the wood, we found great
+quantities of sorrel and other European plants. The woods
+appeared very thick, and extended as far as the eye could
+reach, often coming down to the edge of the river. The
+Esquimaux say, that higher up, large timber is found. On
+our return to the skin-boat we found ourselves pretty much
+fatigued, and ready to partake of a supper, cooked by the
+Esquimaux, consisting of ship&rsquo;s biscuit, dried fish, and raw
+whitefish blubber. The Esquimaux prevailed upon Brother
+Kmoch to taste the latter, and he reported, that having once
+overcome his aversion to it, its taste was sweet, like the
+kernel of a nut, but heated his stomach like a hot posset.</p>
+
+<p>29th. Changeable and rainy weather prevented us from
+going out much.</p>
+
+<p>30th. Our people, and with them the strange Esquimaux,
+met for public worship. Brother Kohlmeister once more
+explained to them our intention in coming thus far to visit
+them. He addressed them to the following effect: &ldquo;That
+<a name="page75"></a>already, many years ago, many excellent people in the
+country beyond the great ocean, had thought of them
+with much love, and felt desirous that the inhabitants of
+the Ungava country also might hear the comfortable
+word of God, and be instructed in it: for they had heard
+that the Esquimaux here were heathen, who, through
+ignorance, served the Torngak, or evil spirit, and were
+led by him into the commission of all manner of sin, that
+they might hereafter be lost, and go to the place of eternal
+darkness and misery. Out of love, therefore,&rdquo; continued
+the missionary, &ldquo;they have sent us to you, and out of love
+we have come to you, to tell you how you may be saved,
+and become happy, peaceful children of God, being delivered
+from the fear of death, which is now upon you all,
+and have the prospect of everlasting joy and peace hereafter,
+even by receiving the gospel, and turning to Jesus,
+who is the only Creator and Saviour of all men. He
+died for <i>your</i> sins, for <i>our</i> sins, and for the sins of all
+mankind, as our surety, suffering the punishment we
+deserved, that <i>you</i>, by receiving Him, and believing on
+Him, might be saved, and not go to the place of eternal
+darkness and pain, but to the place of bliss and eternal
+rest. You cannot yet understand these comfortable
+words of the gospel, but if it is your sincere wish to know
+the truth of them, Jesus will open your ears and hearts,
+to hear and understand them. These my companions
+were as ignorant as you, but they now thank God, that
+they know Jesus as their Saviour, and are assured
+that through His death they shall inherit everlasting
+life.&rdquo;</p>
+
+<p>During this address all were silent and very attentive.
+Some exclaimed: &ldquo;O we desire to hear more about it!&rdquo;
+Old Netsiak, from Eivektok, said: &ldquo;I am indeed old, but if
+you come to live here, I will certainly remove hither also;
+and live with you and be converted.&rdquo;</p>
+
+<a name="page76"></a><p>When we put the question to them, whether they were
+willing, that we should come and dwell with them, and instruct
+them, they all answered with a loud and cheerful
+voice. &ldquo;<i>Kaititse tok, Kaititse tok!</i> O do come soon, and
+live with us, we will all gladly be converted, and live
+with you.&rdquo; Jonathan and Jonas also bore ample testimony
+to the truth of what we had spoken, and their words
+seemed to make a deep impression on all their countrymen.
+Uttakiyok was above others eager to express his wish that
+we might soon make a settlement in the Ungava country.
+Five of the fourteen families who mean to reside here next
+winter, are from Eivektok.</p>
+
+<p>Farther inland, the river Koksoak widens considerably,
+but consequently grows more shallow. The country is
+pleasant, with wood, grassy plains, and gentle hills.</p>
+
+<p>31st. Having finished all our observations here, we
+dropped down the stream to the place, where we had discovered
+the first tents.</p>
+
+<p>In descending, as well as ascending the river, we saw a
+great number of whitefish, and many seals. Reindeer are
+numerous on both shores, both in summer and winter. All
+the Esquimaux declared, that this was the best provision-place
+in the whole country, and they consequently flock to
+it from all parts every summer, frequently protracting their
+stay during the winter. The greater number of those we
+found here, purposed spending next winter in this neighbourhood.
+The Esquimaux are prevented from making
+this place their constant residence by their fear of the land-Indians,
+which cause them to quit it sooner than they
+otherwise would wish to do.</p>
+
+<p>We spared no pains to collect all the information we
+possibly could obtain, on every subject relating to this
+situation, both as to itself, and in reference to the possibility
+of approaching it with a ship, as likewise respecting the
+inhabitants of the Ungava country in general. It appeared
+<a name="page77"></a>evident, that the place above described is the most eligible
+for forming a missionary-settlement.</p>
+
+<p>We found it unnecessary to proceed to the Westward, by
+the account given us by our worthy conductor Uttakiyok,
+whose information hitherto we had always found correct,
+and confidently to be relied on.</p>
+
+<p>He reported: 1. That farther West no wood is to be
+found on the coast.</p>
+
+<p>2. That besides the two rivers Kangertlualuksoak and
+Koksoak, they knew of no place where a ship might with
+safety approach the land.</p>
+
+<p>3. That at this time we should probably find no inhabitants,
+as they had all gone into the interior to hunt
+reindeer.</p>
+
+<p>We therefore now considered the business committed to
+us to be accomplished, and determined to return to Okkak,
+thankful to God our Saviour for the many proofs of His
+favour, and protection, experienced in the execution of our
+commission.</p>
+</div>
+
+<br />
+<br />
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="20%" align="center" />
+<br />
+<a name="ch13"></a>
+<h3>CHAPTER XIII.</h3>
+
+<div class="synopsis">
+
+<p>Return to Okkak.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="text">
+<p>S<small>EPTEMBER</small> 1st.&mdash;A<small>T</small> ten A.M. we fell down the river
+with the ebb-tide, and about noon anchored near its mouth.
+The Esquimaux showed great attachment to us, and could
+hardly resolve to take a final leave. They called after us,
+&ldquo;Come soon again, we shall always be wishing for you.&rdquo;
+Several of them, and among them our friend Uttakiyok,
+followed us in their kayaks to the mouth of the river.</p>
+
+<p>We erected here, on the promontory Kernerauyak, a board
+with an inscription similar to that put up at George river,
+but with the day of our departure inserted, viz. Sept. 1st,
+<a name="page78"></a>instead of the day of our arrival, Aug. 7th. The same
+solemnities took place as on the former occasion. Our
+faithful pilot Uttakiyok, who had rendered us such important
+and essential services, now took leave of us, as he
+intends to spend the winter in this neighbourhood. He
+repeated his assurance, that if we settled here, he would be
+the first to join us, and to turn with his whole heart to God.
+Not willing to be any longer incumbered with the skin-boat,
+we added it to other useful articles given to Uttakiyok, as a
+reward for his faithful attention to us. He was very highly
+gratified, and thankful for this species of remuneration.</p>
+
+<p>2d. Left the Koksoak, called by us, <i>South river</i>, and
+steered to the N. of <i>Kernerauyak</i> and <i>Kikkertorsoak</i>. In
+the evening we cast anchor in an open road, among the
+<i>Nachorutsit</i> islands, with fine weather.</p>
+
+<p>3d. Set sail at sun-rise, wind and tide in our favour, and
+proceeded rapidly. About noon, however, a fog came on,
+which obliged us to come to an anchor at <i>Pitsiolak</i>. When
+it cleared up, we proceeded, steering between <i>Allukpalak</i>
+and <i>Nipkotok</i>, and cast anchor in the open sea, near <i>Kernertut</i>,
+where, on our first arrival, we encountered such
+a tremendous storm. The night proved quite calm and
+fair.</p>
+
+<p>4th. A gentle breeze brought us pleasantly as far as the
+island <i>Nauyet</i>, at the mouth of the <i>Kangertlualuksoak</i>,
+where we cast anchor, having performed the same voyage
+in three days, which took us twelve on our former passage.
+The distance may be about 100 English miles.</p>
+
+<p>5th. Landed, and erected a species of landmark, on the
+highest point of <i>Nauyet</i>, as a ship entering the river must
+keep near this island, the shore on the other side being very
+foul. Contrary winds now obliged us to enter the bay, and
+cast anchor in the same place where we had lain on the 9th
+of August.</p>
+
+<p>6th. Storm and rain prevented our proceeding. <a name="page79"></a>The Esquimaux
+went on shore, and pitched their tent. Of late
+they generally spent the night on board the boat.</p>
+
+<p>7th. Wind at W. but a heavy swell from the sea prevented
+our sailing. Our men went out to hunt, and Paul returned
+in the evening with a deer.</p>
+
+<p>8th. Snow had fallen during the night, and the whole
+country had the appearance of the middle of winter. We
+dropped down with the ebb-tide, but were obliged to anchor
+again near the entrance of the bay. When the tide turned
+we proceeded, and, leaving <i>Kikkertorsoak</i> to the right, made
+for cape <i>Kattaktok</i>, where we spent the night at anchor
+among some low islands. The night was clear, and a comet
+appeared N. by W.</p>
+
+<p>9th. Wind favourable and strong. We set sail at sun-rise,
+and steered for <i>Uibvaksoak</i>, and so rapidly did our
+boat make way through the waves, that we arrived there already
+at four in the afternoon, passing swiftly by the Dragon&rsquo;s
+dwelling, (<i>Torngets</i>). A thunder-storm was approaching.
+The wind, which felt quite warm, was in our
+rear, and violent gusts assailed us now and then, which made
+us shorten sail; yet the boat seemed to fly from island to
+island. We were unable to find a safe anchorage till 8 P.M.
+when it was already dark. We had sailed, in fourteen hours,
+about 100 English miles, and were all completely wet with
+the spray of the sea and frequent showers. Our Esquimaux
+were obliged, in this condition, to lie down either on deck
+or on shore.</p>
+
+<p>10th. Reached <i>Omanek</i>, about 40 or 50 miles sail.</p>
+
+<p>11th. Wind contrary, with much rain. We were confined
+to our narrow cabin, and shut in all day, with a lamp
+burning.</p>
+
+<p>12th. Clear weather: set sail at noon. In the afternoon
+we were saluted by some shots from <i>Killinek</i> Esquimaux,
+who were halting not far from the Ikkerasak, or straits, at
+the entrance of which we cast anchor about 7 P.M.</p>
+
+<a name="page80"></a><p>13th. Though we wished to have some conversation with
+the <i>Killinek</i> people, as they cannot often come to Okkak,
+yet we thought it adviseable to lose no time, and, with the
+ebb-tide, passed through the <i>Ikkerasak</i> in perfect safety.
+When, about 1 P.M. the tide turned, we ran into a cove on
+the south side, and at 5 P.M. anchored in the lagoon above
+described, (<a href="#page43">See page 43</a>), the entrance to which will only
+admit a boat.</p>
+
+<p>14th. Reached <i>Oppernavik</i>, where we first met Uttakiyok.</p>
+
+<p>15th. Set sail with a gentle breeze, which permitted us to
+have our Sunday&rsquo;s service on deck. The wind, however,
+soon turning against us, we were compelled to return to our
+former anchorage.</p>
+
+<p>16th and 17th. We were unpleasantly detained by wind
+and rain, and on the latter day much snow fell.</p>
+
+<p>18th. Reached <i>Kikkertarsoak</i> about 1 P.M. Our men
+went out in their kayaks, and returned in the evening with
+three seals. The night was fair, with beautiful appearances
+of the Aurora Borealis.</p>
+
+<p>19th. The morning was calm: some indications of approaching
+storm made us anxious to proceed. We set out
+early; but a fog coming on, we came again to an anchor off
+a barren island. After staying here two hours, hoping for a
+favourable change, Jonathan proposed to proceed, and
+steered S.W. not knowing rightly where we were. On this
+occasion, we could not help admiring the composure of the
+Esquimaux. But having last night made a hearty meal of
+the provisions they had acquired, they seemed to take things
+easy, and thought it would all be right in the end. So it
+turned out; for by and by we saw the continent, and kept
+along shore, till we got to the promontory <i>Kakkeviak</i>,
+where, on our passage, we had nearly suffered shipwreck.
+(<a href="#page38">See page 38</a>). Here we cast anchor in a wide shallow bay,
+and spent a quiet night. </p>
+
+<p>20th. The fog had dispersed, and the wind was <a name="page81"></a>favourable,
+though shifting from W. to N.W.N. and N.E. At 7
+P.M. we reached <i>Kumaktorvik</i> and found good anchorage
+close to the Esquimaux winter-houses; but we were disappointed
+by finding them empty, the people being probably
+out on the reindeer-hunt. There were four houses standing,
+apparently not old, and the traces of eight others, situated
+on a low point of land, well covered with grass, and
+surrounded by high mountains.</p>
+
+<p>21st. Wind N.W. set sail by break of day; reached <i>Nennoktok</i>
+about noon, and steered across <i>Sangmiyok</i> bay, for
+the northern promontory in <i>Nachvak</i> bay. Sangmiyok bay
+is full of breakers, and the sea running pretty high, they
+appeared very distinctly. The wind dying away in the afternoon,
+we got no farther than the steep rocks under which
+we had spent the night of July the 18th, where we came to
+an anchor. A heavy swell from the sea, and violent gusts
+of wind assailing us in all directions from the mountains
+gave us much uneasiness; but, by the protecting care of
+God, we suffered no harm.</p>
+
+<p>22d. It blew hard from the N.W. and prevented our running
+into Nachvak bay. Our situation being highly dangerous,
+and the wind favouring our proceeding, we determined to
+pass by Nachvak. But having sailed across the bay, our
+captain found it impossible to proceed, and thought proper
+to come to an anchor. The truth was, that he had left some
+articles here in a cove, which he wished to secure. We
+therefore went on shore, and found many fragments of the
+bones of whales, whence we inferred that whales are sometimes
+cast on shore in this place.</p>
+
+<p>23d. A heavy storm came on from the N.W. To-day
+we caught the first cod-fish, which proved a very acceptable
+change of diet for us and our people.</p>
+
+<p>24th. The morning was calm. Wind E. left the cove
+and steered for Nachvak, and came, <i>accidentally</i>, to the very
+place where Jonathan&rsquo;s goods were deposited. Not <a name="page82"></a>perceiving
+any Esquimaux on shore, Jonathan and Thukkekina
+went up the bay in their kayaks in search of them. Meanwhile
+<i>we</i> landed, and on the declivity of a hill found a great
+quantity of green soapstone. In the evening Jonathan and
+Thukkekina returned with ten other Equimaux, who rejoiced
+to see us again.</p>
+
+<p>25th. Brother Kohlmeister was engaged all day with the
+Esquimaux. Brother Kmoch went up the mountain, and
+brought some fine specimens of steatite. </p>
+
+<p>26th. Wind strong at N.W. we set sail; but the wind
+failing, we could not reach <i>Saeglek</i>, as proposed, but spent
+the night in the open sea. It passed, however, without any
+unpleasant occurrences.</p>
+
+<p>27th. The want of wind prevented our getting to-day as
+far as the Saeglek islands. Having passed through a very
+narrow Ikkerasak, with hardly sufficient depth of water for
+so large a boat, we cast anchor near our former station at
+<i>Kikkertarsoak</i>.</p>
+
+<p>28th. Wind cold and changeable, and towards evening
+stormy.</p>
+
+<p>29th. Set sail about 6 A.M. with a strong wind at W. and
+in the evening had reached <i>Kangertluksoak</i> islands.</p>
+
+<p>30th. It blew hard, with snow, and we were obliged to
+spend the day shut up in our small cabin by lamp-light.
+The land was covered with snow. We were detained here
+very unpleasantly for three days, by the violence of the wind
+and weather.</p>
+
+<p><i>October</i> 3d. We steered for the promontory of <i>Kaumayok</i>;
+but the wind dying away, and at length turning to the
+South, we could not gain any safe harbour, and were obliged
+to tack about all night in the open sea. The weather, however,
+was mild, and we had the advantage of moon-light.</p>
+
+<p>4th. At 7 A.M. we succeeded in passing the Northern
+Ikkerasak near cape <i>Mugford</i> with the tide, and the wind
+becoming fair, soon brought us among the Okkak islands.
+<a name="page83"></a>About noon we doubled cape <i>Uivak</i>, and perceived Esquimaux
+on shore, who ran up the hills, shouted for joy, and
+gave us by signs to understand, that the ship (the brig
+Jemima, sent annually with provisions to the settlements)
+was still at Okkak.</p>
+
+<p>We cannot describe the inexpressible pleasure and gratitude
+to God our Saviour which we felt, when we again
+beheld the neighbourhood of Okkak, after an absence of
+fifteen weeks. As soon as the captain descried our boat
+approaching, he hoisted his colours, and fired some guns
+to give notice of our arrival. As we were obliged to tack, to
+gain the entrance to the harbour, he came to meet us in the
+ship&rsquo;s boat, and about one o&rsquo;clock we landed. The Missionaries
+and the Esquimaux met us with tears of joy and
+thankfulness, when we all joined in praise to God, who had
+so wonderfully kept His protecting hand over us during this
+perilous voyage, and granted us to return home in safety.</p>
+
+<p>Our voyage lasted from the 24th of June to the 4th of
+October, and we calculated it to be a distance of from 1200
+to 1300 miles.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="sig">B<small>ENJAMIN</small> G<small>OTTLIEB</small> K<small>OHLMEISTER</small>.</div>
+<div class="sig">G<small>EORGE</small> K<small>MOCH</small>.</div>
+<a name="bottom"></a>
+<br />
+<div class="figure">
+<a href="images/2.jpg"><img width="414" height="400" src="images/1.jpg" alt=
+"Map: The Northern Extremity of LABRADOR with UNGAVA BAY Explored by the
+MISSIONARIES of the Unitas Fratrum in 1811" /></a>
+</div>
+<div>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+</div>
+<hr noshade="noshade" size="4" width="100%" align="center" />
+<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON THE COAST OF LABRADOR, TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH***</p>
+<p>******* This file should be named 15436-h.txt or 15436-h.zip *******</p>
+<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br />
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/4/3/15436">https://www.gutenberg.org/1/5/4/3/15436</a></p>
+<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.</p>
+
+<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.</p>
+
+
+
+<pre>
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+<a href="https://gutenberg.org/license">https://gutenberg.org/license)</a>.
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">https://www.gutenberg.org</a>
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a>
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+<a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a>
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/15436-h/images/1.jpg b/15436-h/images/1.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f970726
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-h/images/1.jpg
diff --git a/15436-h/images/2.jpg b/15436-h/images/2.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0d31e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-h/images/2.jpg
diff --git a/15436-h/images/3a.png b/15436-h/images/3a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..763b085
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-h/images/3a.png
diff --git a/15436-h/images/3b.png b/15436-h/images/3b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2dac0ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436-h/images/3b.png
diff --git a/15436.txt b/15436.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67b2c45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3160 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast
+of Labrador, to Ungava Bay, Westward of Cape Chudleigh, by Benjamin
+Kohlmeister and George Kmoch
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Journal of a Voyage from Okkak, on the Coast of Labrador, to Ungava Bay, Westward of Cape Chudleigh
+       Undertaken to Explore the Coast, and Visit the Esquimaux in That Unknown Region
+
+
+Author: Benjamin Kohlmeister and George Kmoch
+
+Release Date: March 22, 2005  [eBook #15436]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON
+THE COAST OF LABRADOR, TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Wallace McLean, Cluny, and the Project Gutenberg Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team from page images generously made available
+by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions
+(http://www.canadiana.org/)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this file which
+      includes a map of the region described.
+      See 15435-h.htm or 15435-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/4/3/15435/15435-h/15435-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/4/3/15435/15435-h.zip)
+
+      Images of the original pages are available through the Canadian
+      Institute for Historical Microreproductions. See
+      http://www.canadiana.org/ECO/ItemRecord/21002?id=fde620f29a76b4fe
+
+      Inconsistencies and irregularities in spelling in the original
+      text have been retained. The table of contents was created for
+      this eBook.
+
+
+
+
+JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON THE COAST OF LABRADOR,
+TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH;
+
+UNDERTAKEN to Explore the Coast, and Visit the ESQUIMAUX in that
+Unknown Region
+
+by
+
+BENJAMIN KOHLMEISTER and GEORGE KMOCH
+
+Missionaries of the Church of the Unitas Fratrum or United Brethren
+
+London:
+Printed by W. M'Dowall, Pemberton Row, Gough Square, Fleet Street,
+for the Brethren's Society for the Furtherance of the
+Gospel Among the Heathen.
+And Sold By J. Le Febvre, 2, Chapel-Place, Nevils-Court, Fetter-Lane;
+L. B. Seeley, 169, Fleet-Street; Hazard And Binns, Bath;
+and T. Bulgin, and T. Lambe, Bristol
+
+1814
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE,
+
+&c. &c.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+INTRODUCTION                                                   3
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+  Outfit. Opinions of the Esquimaux respecting the Voyage.
+  Description of the Company. Departure from Okkak. Arrival
+  at Nungorome.                                                6
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+  Departure from Nungorome Cove. Account of Solomon.
+  Drift-ice. Cape Mugford. Waterfalls from the Kaumayok
+  Mountains. Fruitless attempt to get out of the Ikkerasak,
+  or Straits.                                                 10
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+  Quit the Ikkerasak. Account of the Kaumayok Mountains, and
+  of Kangertluksoak. Public Worship on Sunday. Saeglek and
+  its Inhabitants described. The Missionaries visit the
+  Esquimaux at Kikkertarsoak.                                 14
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+  Departure from Saeglek. Fruitless attempt to reach
+  Nachvak. Retreat into Nullatartok Inlet. Slate Bay.
+  Detention on account of the Ice. Arrive at Nachvak.         20
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+  Reception at Nachvak. Description of the bay. The
+  Esquimaux manner of spearing salmon and trout. Christian
+  deportment of the Okkak and Hopedale Esquimaux. Jonas's
+  address to the Heathen. Love of music general among these
+  Indians. Departure from Nachvak. Danger in doubling the
+  North Cape. Arrival at Sangmiyok bay.                       27
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+  Pass Cape Nennoktok. Visit the Esquimaux families at
+  Kummaktorvik and Amitok. Description of an Esquimaux
+  travelling bed. Mountains seen at Ungava. Netsek seal
+  described. Greenland houses. Danger of being shipwrecked
+  near Kakkeviak.                                             33
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+  Arrival at Oppernavik. Account of Uttakiyok. His
+  perseverance in waiting for the arrival of the
+  Missionaries. Islands and bays between Kakkeviak and
+  Killinek. Danger in the ice at Ammitok. Want of fuel
+  supplied by robbing old graves.                             39
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+  Departure from Oppernavik. Pass the Ikkerasak of Killinek.
+  Whirlpools. The coast takes a southerly direction. Meeting
+  with Esquimaux from the Ungava country, who had never seen
+  an European. Anchor at Omanek. High tides. Drift-wood.
+  Double Cape Uibvaksoak. Distant view of Akpatok.            44
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+  Chain of black mountains. The Dragon's dwelling. Changes
+  occasioned by rise and fall of the tides, and dangers
+  attending them. Uttakiyok's superstitious customs.
+  Singular effect of the tide in the bay of Ittimnekoktok.
+  Arrive at Kangertlualuksoak bay and river. Its situation.
+  Transactions there.                                         50
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+  Further transactions in Kangertlualuksoak Bay. The
+  Esquimaux women frightened by reports of Indians. Ceremony
+  of taking possession of this new-explored country, as
+  belonging to the King of England, and of naming the river
+  George river. Leave the bay and proceed to Arvarvik.
+  Whales caught by the Esquimaux in the shallows. Storm at
+  Kernertut.                                                  56
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+  Doubts expressed by Jonathan and the other Esquimaux on
+  the expediency of continuing the voyage. Consultations.
+  Resolve to proceed. Thunder-storm at Pitsiolak. Account of
+  Indians. Esquimaux cookery and hunting feasts. Arrival in
+  the river Koksoak.                                          62
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+  Sail up the river Koksoak. Transactions in that region.
+  Dangerous eddy. Meet Esquimaux. Address to them. Their joy
+  and eagerness to have Missionaries, resident among them.
+  Find a suitable situation for a settlement. Description of
+  the country.                                                70
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+  Return to Okkak.                                            77
+
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+For these many years past, a considerable number of Esquimaux have been
+in the annual practice of visiting the three missionary establishments
+of the United Brethren on the coast of Labrador, OKKAK, NAIN, and
+HOPEDALE, chiefly with a view to barter, or to see those of their
+friends and acquaintance, who had become obedient to the gospel, and
+lived together in Christian fellowship, enjoying the instruction of the
+Missionaries.
+
+These people came mostly from the north, and some of them from a great
+distance. They reported, that the body of the Esquimaux nation lived
+near and beyond Cape Chudleigh, which they call Killinek, and having
+conceived much friendship for the Missionaries, never failed to request,
+that some of them would come to their country, and even urged the
+formation of a new settlement, considerably to the north of Okkak.
+
+To these repeated and earnest applications the Missionaries were the
+more disposed to listen, as it had been discovered, not many years after
+the establishment of the Mission in 1771, that that part of the coast on
+which, by the encouragement of the British government, the first
+settlement was made, was very thinly inhabited, and that the aim of the
+Mission, to convert the Esquimaux to Christianity, would be better
+obtained, if access could be had to the main body of the Indians, from
+which the roving inhabitants appeared to be mere stragglers.
+Circumstances, however, prevented more extensive plans from being put in
+execution; and the Missionaries, having gained the confidence and esteem
+of the Esquimaux in their neighbourhood, remained stationary on that
+coast, and, by degrees, formed three settlements, OKKAK, to the north,
+and HOPEDALE, to the south of NAIN, their first place of residence.
+
+In consequence of the abovementioned invitation, it became a subject of
+serious consideration, by what means a more correct idea of the extent
+and dwelling-places of the Esquimaux nation might be obtained, and a
+general wish was expressed, that one or more of the Missionaries would
+undertake the perilous task of visiting such places as were reported by
+the Esquimaux themselves to contain more inhabitants than the southern
+coast, but remained unknown to European navigators.
+
+The Synodal Committee, appointed for the management of the Missions of
+the United Brethren, having given their consent to the measure, and
+agreed with Brother Kohlmeister, by occasion of a visit paid by him to
+his relations and friends in Germany, as to the mode of putting it into
+execution, he returned to Labrador in 1810, and prepared to undertake
+the voyage early in the spring of 1811.
+
+For several years a correspondence had taken place between the
+Missionaries in Labrador and the Brethren's Society for the Furtherance
+of the Gospel, established in London, relating to the manner in which
+the voyage should be performed. Opinions were various on the subject;
+but it was at length determined, that a steady intelligent Christian
+Esquimaux, possessing a shallop, with two masts, and of sufficient
+dimensions, should be appointed to accompany one or two Missionaries,
+for a liberal recompence; and that the travellers should spend the
+winter at Okkak, to be ready to proceed on the voyage, without loss of
+time, as soon as the state of the ice would permit of it. Brother
+Kohlmeister proposed, in this view, the Esquimaux Jonathan, of Hopedale,
+and the brig employed to convey the annual supply of necessaries to the
+three settlements, was ordered to proceed first to Hopedale, partly with
+a view to this negociation. She arrived safe with Brother Kohlmeister at
+this place, on the 22d July, 1810. On the same day, he proposed to
+Jonathan the intended expedition, laid before him the whole plan, with
+all its difficulties and advantages, and found him immediately willing
+to undertake the voyage, and to forward its object by every means in his
+power.
+
+This was no small sacrifice on the part of Jonathan. An Esquimaux is
+naturally attached to the place of his birth; and, though he spends the
+summer, and indeed great part of the year, necessarily, and from
+inclination, in roving from one place to another in quest of food; yet
+in winter he settles, if possible, upon his native spot, where he is
+esteemed and beloved. This was eminently the case with Jonathan. He was
+a man of superior understanding and skill, possessed of uncommon
+presence of mind in difficulties and dangers, and at Hopedale considered
+as the principal person, or chief of his nation. But he was now ready to
+forsake all, and to go and reside at OKKAK, among strangers, having no
+authority or pre-eminence, and to undertake a voyage of unknown length
+and peril, from whence he could not be sure of a safe or speedy return,
+before the ice might set in, and confine him upon an unknown shore,
+during the whole of a second winter. There was, however, one
+consideration which outweighed every other in his mind, and made him,
+according to his own declaration, forget all difficulties and dangers.
+He hoped that the proposed voyage to visit his countrymen in the north
+would, in time, be a means of their becoming acquainted with the gospel
+of Christ, and partakers of the same blessings which he now enjoyed.
+This made him willing to accept of the call without any hesitation. Nor
+did he ever, during the whole voyage, forsake that generous principle,
+by which he was at first influenced, but his cheerful, firm, and
+faithful conduct proved, under all circumstances, most honourable to the
+character of a true convert to Christianity.
+
+Brother KOHLMEISTER being, after seventeen years residence in Labrador,
+complete master of the Esquimaux language, and deservedly beloved and
+respected both by Christians and heathens, and possessing an invincible
+zeal to promote their temporal and spiritual welfare, was a man
+eminently qualified to undertake the commission, and to conciliate the
+affections of unknown heathen. He had also previously made himself
+acquainted with the use of the quadrant, and with other branches of
+science, useful on such an occasion.
+
+Brother KMOCH, his companion, joined to other essential qualifications,
+great cheerfulness and intrepidity.
+
+All the parties having met at Okkak, in the autumn of 1810, the winter
+was partly spent in preparations for the intended expedition, and
+Jonathan's boat put into the best possible state of repair.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+  _Outfit. Opinions of the Esquimaux respecting the Voyage.
+  Description of the Company. Departure from Okkak. Arrival at
+  Nungorome._
+
+
+June 16, 1811.--The ice began to loosen in the bay of OKKAK, and to
+drive out to sea. On the 17th, the bay was quite cleared of it; but on
+the 18th, it returned, and seemed to preclude all possibility of setting
+out so soon as we intended. On the 19th, however, it left us entirely.
+
+20th. We were employed in hauling the boat to the edge of the water, and
+being floated by the tide, she came to anchor at six, P.M. She had been
+purchased by Jonathan, at Chateau-bay, and was about 45 feet long,
+twelve broad, and five deep, with two masts. We had furnished her with a
+complete deck, and divided her into three parts. The centre was our own
+cabin, into which all our baggage was stowed: the two other divisions
+were occupied by the Esquimaux. A small boat, brought from Lewis, was
+taken in tow.
+
+21st. We began to ship our provision and baggage: viz. six cwt. of
+ship's biscuit, sixteen bushels of pease, one cwt. of salt pork and best
+beef, (of which but a small portion was consumed, as we were generally
+well supplied with fresh provisions, procured by shooting), a firkin of
+butter, half cwt. of captain's biscuit, one cwt. of flour, two small
+barrels of gunpowder, one cwt. of large and small shot, half cwt. of
+tobacco, two eighteen-gallon barrels of ale, a few bottles of brandy,
+eighteen pounds of coffee, which was all consumed, coffee and biscuits
+being our usual repast; a case containing knives, wire, nails, &c. for
+barter, if necessary; kettles and other utensils. Besides that every man
+had his fowling-piece, we had four muskets in reserve. After bringing
+all on board, we had just room enough to sleep in our cabin.
+
+22d, was spent in conferring with our brethren, on various subjects
+relating to the voyage.
+
+23d. All the Esquimaux met at the chapel, and in the most affectionate
+manner, and with many tears, bid us and our company farewell. They were
+the more affected with grief on this occasion, as the greatest part of
+our own Esquimaux thought the voyage impracticable, and expected that we
+should all perish in doubling Cape Chudleigh, (Killinek) on account of
+the violence of the currents, setting round between the cape, and the
+many rocks and islands which stretch from it towards the north. Reports
+had likewise been circulated of the hostile disposition of the Esquimaux
+in the Ungava bay; and it was boldly asserted, that if we even got there
+alive, we should never return. An old conjuror, (Angekok), _Atsugarsuk_,
+had been particularly active in spreading these reports. We cannot deny
+but that they occasioned some apprehension in our own minds, but being
+fully determined to venture in the name of God, and trusting in His
+protection, we were thankful that they failed to produce the intended
+effect on Jonathan, our guide, and on the other Esquimaux, who were to
+go with us, and who all remained firm.
+
+When Jonathan was told that the Ungava Esquimaux would kill him, he
+generally answered: "Well, we will try, and shall know better when we
+get there:" and once, conversing with us on the subject, expressed
+himself thus: "When I hear people talking about the danger of being
+killed, I think: Jesus went to death out of love to us, what great
+matter would it be, if we were to be put to death in His service, should
+that be His good pleasure concerning us."
+
+24th. Having commended ourselves in prayer to the grace and protecting
+care of God our Saviour, and to the kind remembrance of our dear fellow
+missionaries, we set sail at two P.M.
+
+Our company consisted of four Esquimaux families: 1. _Jonathan_, and his
+wife _Sybilla_, both between fifty and sixty years old. He was esteemed
+one of the most skilful commanders on the whole coast of Labrador, and
+for many years has shown himself both able and willing to serve the
+missionaries in a variety of ways. The boat was his own property, and we
+considered him as the captain of the expedition. 2. _Jonas_, Jonathan's
+son, and his wife _Agnes_, about thirty years of age, both intelligent,
+clever Esquimaux; they had their five children with them; _Sophia_,
+twelve years old, _Susanna_, _Jonathan_, _Thamar_, and _Sybilla_, the
+youngest but half a year old. 3. _Paul_, and his wife _Mary_, very
+agreeable, sensible people, about twenty years of age. Paul is
+Jonathan's cousin, and a man of a very warm temper. In activity and
+skill, he was next to Jonathan. 4. _David_, and his mother _Rachel_, the
+first a hopeful young man of about twenty, and the latter a good-natured
+old woman, who had the care of our clothes and linen, and kept them
+clean and in good order. Besides these four families, we took with us a
+boy, _Okkiksuk_, an orphan, about sixteen, whom Jonathan had adopted,
+and who promised to reward the kindness of his guardian by his good
+behaviour. He was always ready to render us every service in his power.
+
+We were attended on the voyage by a skin-boat (or woman's boat) in which
+were _Thukkekina_ and his wife, and their adopted child _Mammak_, a boy
+twelve years old. Their age is about forty. The skin-boat was intended
+as a refuge, in case of any accident happening to our own boat, and was
+useful in landing, as we never brought the large boat close in shore.
+The first four families belong to Hopedale, Thukkekina and his wife to
+Okkak. They considered it as a great favour conferred on them to be
+permitted to accompany us. _Jonas_ and his family occupied the
+after-part, and the rest the fore-part of the boat. The wind was
+moderate, and due west. We lost sight of our habitations in about half
+an hour, behind the N.E. point of the island Okkak, called Sungolik.
+
+At three, passed Cape Uivak, a cape on the continent, forming a
+moderately high headland, and the nearest place to Okkak, where
+Esquimaux spend the winter. Two or three winter-houses were standing.
+
+The wind failing, we cast off the skin-boat, which rowed merrily a-head.
+Before us, between the islands to the east and the continent, we saw
+much drift-ice, and it required attention to avoid the large shoals, the
+wind coming round to the N.W. We cast anchor at NUNGOROME, a cove about
+ten English miles from Okkak, where we found several of our Esquimaux,
+who had here their summer-station. Several had come from Naujasiorvik
+and other places, on purpose to meet us, and once more to express their
+affection and best wishes for our safe voyage and return. Late in the
+evening, we met on a green spot, where Brother Kohlmeister delivered a
+short discourse and prayer, after which we retired to sleep on board the
+boat.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+  _Departure from Nungorome Cove. Account of Solomon. Drift-ice.
+  Cape Mugford. Waterfalls from the Kaumayok Mountains. Fruitless
+  attempt to get out of the Ikkerasak, or Straits._
+
+
+Nungorome is a cove on the south side of the Island Pacharvik. Between
+this island the main land is a narrow strait, so shallow that no whales
+can pass. The Esquimaux stretch their nets across, to catch seals,
+seeking shelter in it when the wind sets in from the open sea. They can
+only be taken in the night, and the greater part of those which frequent
+this coast are of the _Kairolik_ kind, a middle-sized animal, and of the
+_Ugsuk_, the largest species of the seal tribe, weighing sometimes from
+five to six cwt.
+
+The Esquimaux belonging to our congregation, who were at present
+stationed here, in tents, were _Moses_, _Samuel_, _Thomas_, _Isaac_,
+_Bammiuk_, and their families. _Solomon_, who has left our communion,
+was also here. He had formerly been a communicant member of Okkak
+congregation, but could not resist the temptation of going to the north
+to feast with the heathen Esquimaux, whenever they had caught a live, or
+found a dead whale. On such occasions he was seduced to commit many
+irregularities and sins, but always returned to us with a show of great
+contrition and repentance. After many relapses, he was informed, that
+this would do no longer, but that if he went again to these heathenish
+feasts, he would be excluded. He is a sensible, well-disposed man, and
+perceived the justice of the sentence; but his love of that species of
+amusement overcame all his good resolutions. He not only went again, but
+took also another wife; a step which, of course, excluded him from our
+fellowship. Yet he is very desirous that his children may receive a
+Christian education, and remain faithful to the precepts of the gospel.
+
+25th. Brother Kmoch rose at half past one in the morning, and suffering
+the rest to sleep on, got breakfast ready; he then fired his piece, by
+which Brother Kohlmeister and all the Esquimaux, young and old, were
+suddenly roused from their slumbers. Not one, however, regretted the
+unexpected interruption to their pleasant dreams, on beholding the sea
+quite free from ice, with a fine morning and fair wind; but after
+yawning, stretching, and shaking themselves as usual, the Esquimaux with
+great good humour got ready, and we set sail at half past three. Passed
+Pacharvik Island at four. Bammiuk and Solomon accompanied us as far as
+the North Ikkerasak (the Esquimaux name for a strait) between Cape
+Mugford Island, in 58 deg. N. latitude, and the mountains of Kaumayok.
+Their being in company retarded our progress, but in the sequel proved
+no disadvantage.
+
+About nine, we entered the straits, and perceiving at a distance much
+drift-ice a-head, cast anchor, and Brother Kmoch and Jonas landed on
+Cape Mugford Island. An Esquimaux, called _Niakungetok_, accompanied
+them to the top of an eminence, from whence the outer opening of the
+Ikkerasak was seen. They perceived the ice driving into it from the sea
+in such quantities as to threaten to close it up. Cape Mugford is an
+high island, extending far into the ocean, and the northern land-mark in
+steering for Okkak, _Kiglapeit_ promontory bearing south, and the
+Saddle-island appearing right before the entrance of the bay. On their
+return to the boat, the wind veered to the north, and we steered for a
+dwelling-place of the Esquimaux, about twenty miles from Okkak, called
+_Ukkuararsuk_. To our great joy the ice began now to drive out again to
+sea, and we resolved to go with it. A gentle S.W. wind brought us to the
+place, where we had before anchored, but we were now beset with large
+fields of ice, among which we tacked, till we had nearly cleared the
+straits, when the great quantity of surrounding ice, pressing upon us,
+prevented our making further attempts, and we, were compelled to work
+our way back with oars and boat-hooks.
+
+On Cape Mugford island we now discovered more Esquimaux, who by signs
+directed our course towards a convenient harbour, near their dwellings,
+which we reached in safety.
+
+The Esquimaux pitched their tents on shore, but we slept on board.
+
+The situation of this place is remarkably beautiful. The strait is about
+an English mile broad, and four or five in length. Both shores are lined
+with precipitous rocks, which in many places rise to a tremendous
+height, particularly on the Kaumayok side, from whence several
+waterfalls rush into the sea, with a roar, which quite fills the air.
+The singular appearance of these cataracts is greatly increased when
+illuminated by the rising sun, the spray, exhibiting the most beautiful
+prismatic colours. Below them huge masses of ice are formed, which seem
+to lean against the sides of the rocks, and to be continually increasing
+during the winter, but when melted by the power of a summer's sun, and
+disengaged by their weight, are carried off by the tides, and help to
+form floating ice-mountains. The coast lies S.W. by N.E.
+
+26th. Being detained here by the state of the ice, and the weather fine
+and warm, Brother Kmoch and Ogiksuk rowed across the straits to the
+nearest great cataract, and were able, notwithstanding the steepness of
+the ascent, to get pretty close to it. It falls fifty or sixty feet
+perpendicular, and the noise is terrible. The spray ascending from it,
+like the steam of a huge cauldron, wetted the travellers completely.
+They amused themselves some time by rolling large stones into the fall,
+which by its force were carried along towards the sea, down the sloping
+torrent below. Our people meanwhile caught three seals, and made a
+hearty meal, of which we also partook, hunger, on this occasion,
+overcoming our dislike to seal's flesh. A sallad of scurvy-grass was
+made for supper.
+
+27th. We left this harbour about four A.M. with a favourable wind at
+West, but as it soon died away, we took to our oars, and reached the
+north point of Kaumayok, at the northern extremity of the strait. By an
+observation taken by Brother Kohlmeister, this point is situated in 57 deg.
+59' N. latitude. Though calm, there was a great swell from the sea, and
+the rolling of the boat affected our brave captain not a little, to the
+diversion of the other Esquimaux. About two P.M. the wind shifted to the
+N.W. By tacking we got to Kupperlik, about the middle of Kaumayok, but
+having the skin-boat in tow, could not weather the point, and were at
+length obliged to return to our former anchorage in the strait.
+
+28th. The wind being North we could not proceed. We therefore ascended
+the mountain of Cape Mugford. It is a barren rock, though here and there
+a solitary plant or a tuft of moss clings to its steep sides, and is
+difficult of access. The numerous waterfalls on the Kaumayok, which
+still rose above us, were full in view, and we now discovered several
+small lakes which supply them. Some of them fall from a great height
+perpendicularly into the sea.
+
+We could here discern the island of Okkak, to the S.W. to the East, the
+boundless ocean, and to the N.E. three high, barren, and steep islands,
+called Nennoktuts by the Esquimaux, (White mountains.)
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+  _Quit the Ikkerasak. Account of the Kaumayok Mountains, and of
+  Kangertluksoak. Public Worship on Sunday. Saeglek and its
+  Inhabitants described. The Missionaries visit the Esquimaux at
+  Kikkertarsoak._
+
+
+June 29th.--We rose soon after two o'clock, and rowed out of the
+Ikkerasak, with a fair wind. The sea was perfectly calm and smooth.
+Brother Kmoch rowed in the small boat along the foot of the mountains of
+Kaumayok, sometimes going on shore, while the large boat was making but
+little way, keeping out at some distance, to avoid the rocks. The
+outline of this chain of mountains exhibits the most fanciful figures.
+At various points, the rocks descend abruptly into the sea, presenting
+horrid precipices. The strand is covered with a black sand. At the
+height of about fifty feet from the sea, the rocks have veins of red,
+yellow, and green stone, running horizontally and parallel; and
+sometimes in an undulated form. Above these, they present the appearance
+of a magnificent colonade, or rather of buttresses, supporting a gothic
+building, varying in height and thickness, and here and there
+intersected by wide and deep chasms and glens, running far inland
+between the mountains. Loose stones above, have in some places the
+appearance of statues, and the superior region exhibits all kind of
+grotesque shapes. It is by far the most singular and picturesque chain
+of mountains on this coast. To the highest part of it we gave the name
+of St. Pauls, as it is not unlike that cathedral when viewed at a
+distance, with its dome and two towers.
+
+Before we left the Kaumayok, Brother Kohlmeister landed, and found the
+beach covered with blocks of stone, in colour white and grey, like
+statuary marble, but very hard. We now steered for _Kangertluksoak_, a
+winter-station of the Esquimaux, where several of our people had pitched
+their tents.
+
+At noon, we were off an island, called _Eingosiarsuk_, (the Little Cup),
+opposite the _Ittiplek_, (a flat piece of ground joining two headlands)
+over which the northern Esquimaux pass in sledges to Okkak, round
+Kaumayok. Farther towards the N.W. lies _Tuppertalik_, a high ridge of
+mountains, which, from its appearance, we called the Table mountain,
+having nearly the shape of the mountain so called at the Cape of Good
+Hope.
+
+To the north lies _Nellekartok_, the outermost island on leaving the
+Ikkerasak, and the first of the _Kangertluksoak_ islands. Behind
+_Tuppertalik_, a bay opens called _Nappartok_ (a wood), a
+winter-habitation, with a little wood higher up the country, about eight
+or ten hours drive from Okkak. A good harbour for large vessels is said
+to be here, called _Umiakovitannak_, (Broad boat-harbour). Before the
+entrance to _Nappartok_, lies an island, _Naujartsit_ (the Little
+Sea-gull island). Seven or eight miles, north of Nappertok, a long flat
+point runs out, terminated by a small island. On approaching towards
+Kangertluksoak, a long island runs parallel with the coast called
+_Illuektulik_, (a burial-place), between which and the main land is a
+strait, affording good shelter for boats. Into this Jonathan intended to
+run, but the wind being favourable, we kept on our course, and passed
+two islands, _Kingmiktok_, (Dog island), and farther north,
+_Kikkertarsoak_ a great island which defends the entrance into the
+harbour of _Kangertluksoak_, from the sea. At ten P.M. we came to an
+anchor in the harbour, and were received by our Esquimaux, of whom
+several families were stationed here, as well as by the other
+inhabitants, with demonstrations of great joy. Both the heathen who kept
+on the right side of the great bay, and our own Christian Esquimaux, on
+the left, fired numberless shots to welcome us. Several boats were here
+from _Kittinek_ and _Nachvak_ bound to Okkak.
+
+_Kangertluksoak_ lies about sixty miles north of Okkak, is an agreeable
+place, and has a good strand, and safe anchorage.
+
+30th. Being Sunday, the Missionaries went on shore, and visited all the
+Christian families, by whom they were received with the most lively
+expressions of affection and gratitude. Many strangers from the opposite
+coast had joined them, and they all seated themselves in a large circle
+on the grass.
+
+_Nikupsuk's_ wife, Louisa, who had long ago forsaken the believers, was
+here, and said, with much apparent contrition, that she was unworthy to
+be numbered with them. She then seated herself at a little distance from
+the rest.
+
+The number of the congregation, including our boat's company, amounted
+to about fifty. Brother Kohlmeister first addressed them, by greeting
+them from their brethren at Okkak, and expressing our joy at finding
+them well in health, and our hopes, that they were all walking worthy of
+their Christian profession, as a good example to their heathen
+neighbours. Then the Litany was read, and a spirit of true devotion
+pervaded the whole assembly.
+
+Our very hearts rejoiced in this place, which had but lately been a den
+of murderers, dedicated, as it were, by the angekoks, or sorcerers, to
+the service of the devil, to hear the cheerful voices of converted
+heathen, most melodiously sounding forth the praises of God, and giving
+glory to the name of Jesus their Redeemer. Peace, and cheerful
+countenances dwelt in the tents of the believing Esquimaux.
+
+Our people had caught a large white-fish, and pressed us much to be
+their guests, which we should have accepted of with pleasure, but we
+thought it prudent to avail ourselves of the favourable wind and
+weather, to proceed. Instead, therefore, of dining with them, we
+presented to each tent a quart of pease, which is considered by the
+Esquimaux as a great luxury, and was received with unbounded
+thankfulness.
+
+About noon we set sail, with a brisk wind at S.E. for _Saeglek_. The
+coast presents here, moderately high, barren mountains, without bays or
+islands. The wind becoming more violent, the rope, by which we kept the
+skin-boat in tow, suddenly snapt, and set her adrift. She was frequently
+hid from our view by the height of the waves, but we were in no
+apprehension about her, as these kind of boats are much safer in a high
+sea, than a European one.
+
+At seven P.M. we arrived at _Saeglek_, and were saluted by the firing of
+muskets and bonfires on the hills. The Esquimaux have their dwellings on
+a small flat island, between two of larger size, but the strand is bad,
+and full of sharp shingles. There are about five or six winter-houses at
+Saeglek, containing each about two or three families.
+
+July 1st. Early, two Esquimaux men, _Joas_ and _Uiverunna_, came in
+their kayaks to pay us a visit. They, with their families, inhabited
+some tents we had seen yesterday. Brother Kohlmeister spoke seriously to
+them on the necessity of conversion, especially to Joas, who had
+Christian parents, and as a child, was baptized at Okkak. He reminded
+him of his having been devoted to Jesus from his birth; that he
+therefore ought not to belong to the unbelievers, but to Him who had
+created and redeemed him; and that the greatest of all the sins he now
+committed, was his persisting in his determination not to return. He
+seemed to listen with some humility to the loving and earnest reproof
+and exhortations of the Missionary, but at last excused himself by
+laying the blame upon his mother, who kept him back, adding, that he
+still intended to be converted.
+
+Our people had meanwhile made a fire, and put the pot on to boil pease;
+but the wind changing, Jonathan determined immediately to proceed. The
+pease had just begun to swell, and as the two Esquimaux had presented us
+with some fresh meat, they had been asked to partake of our meal; but
+finding themselves thus disappointed, they fell to, and having greedily
+devoured a quantity of the half-boiled pease, and filled their gloves
+with the rest, they took leave, and set sail about 11, A.M.
+
+Hearing from some Esquimaux who made towards us in their kayaks, that
+the Saeglek people were all on the north side of the island of
+Kikkertarsoak, we proceeded thither, and having doubled the point, saw
+seven tents full of people. Two of them contained families from
+Killinek. But the violence of the wind was such, that we could not stay
+in this unsheltered place with safety. We therefore worked our way, with
+the help of the Esquimaux, round another point, into a roadstead, rather
+more sheltered than the former, though open to the sea. A little tobacco
+is the reward expected and given for such assistance.
+
+The beach is composed of numberless black pebbles, polished by the sea,
+and each about the size of an hen's egg.
+
+Brother Kohlmeister immediately landed, and visited the Esquimaux in
+their tents. Many heathen were at this place, to whom he preached the
+gospel, and invited them to believe in Jesus, as the Saviour of men, who
+would deliver them from the love, power, and curse of sin, having shed
+His blood, and died on the cross, to redeem their souls. He was heard
+with great attention. A venerable old man, with hair as white as wool,
+particularly attracted our notice. He called Brother Kohlmeister by
+name, took hold of both his hands, and begged him to sit down by him.
+Brother Kohlmeister inquired, whether he knew him. The old man replied:
+"Thou art Benjamin, often have I heard thy name at Okkak. I therefore
+rejoice to see thee." He seemed quite at a loss, what way to express his
+affection; and at length delivered a strap of seals'-leather to Mr.
+Kohlmeister, with these words: "I am poor, and have nothing else to give
+thee, yet I wish to give thee some token of my love." Brother
+Kohlmeister accepted of his present, and inwardly cried to the Lord, to
+show mercy to this poor ignorant heathen. "You are old," said he, "and
+have not much more time to live in this world, will you not turn to that
+Jesus, who has died for your sins also? It is not His desire that you
+should perish, and be lost in everlasting darkness, but that you should
+live with Him in the place of light and immortal bliss." The old man
+replied: "What shall I do? thy words are very pleasant, and I would fain
+hear much more of Jesus. I do not wish to be lost in the place of
+darkness." Brother Kohlmeister answered, that if he sincerely wished to
+be saved, and was troubled on account of his sinful life he should
+believe in, and call on the name of Jesus, who would certainly hear and
+reveal Himself unto him. Many people were present in the tent, who
+behaved with great decency, and whom Brother Kohlmeister earnestly
+addressed on the necessity of conversion. He wished to prolong the
+conversation especially with the old man, who promised, that he would
+never forget the words spoken to him, but it was growing late, and we
+returned to our cabin. The poor old man having sore legs, some medicine
+was left for him.
+
+The passage from Kangertluksoak to Saeglek is about twenty English
+miles. Saeglek is a considerable promontory, open to the south.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+  _Departure from Saeglek. Fruitless attempt to reach Nachvak.
+  Retreat into Nullatartok Inlet. Slate Bay. Detention on account
+  of the Ice. Arrive at Nachvak._
+
+
+July 2d.--At one A.M. we set sail, steering for _Nachvak_, a distance of
+about thirty miles. Here a chain of mountains runs north and south,
+nearly parallel with the coast. The coast itself is of moderate height,
+but very steep, and not being defended by any island, the approach to it
+as a lee-shore, is very dangerous. It runs generally in a pretty strait
+line about forty miles, when a wide bay opens, in which lies, towards
+the north, an island called _Karngalersiorvik_, where there is said to
+be a good harbour for boats. The rocks, of which the mountains are
+composed, are of a white grey colour, streaked almost perpendicularly
+with veins of black stone, about two feet broad. The intermediate strata
+may be about eight times as broad. We had hoped to reach Nachvak in the
+morning, by continuing our course through the following night, though
+the wind was weak and variable, but in the evening we got into
+drift-ice: yet as the shoals were not close together, we worked our way
+through them; and stood on with the little wind we had at S.E.
+
+3d. At dawn of day, and being still four miles distant from Nachvak, we
+perceived both in the open sea, and all along the shore, that our
+passage was completely occupied with floating ice, which drove towards
+us, and forced us back. We then endeavoured to find shelter in a bay
+bounded by high mountains, but found none, the wind driving the ice
+after us into it, and soon filling it. Jonathan frequently cried out
+with a plaintive voice: "Alas, alas, we shall soon be without a boat!"
+We now hastened to the opposite shore to find some cove or inlet, but
+getting more and more entangled among the ice, were at last obliged,
+some to land, and haul the boat with ropes round the points, and others
+with boat-hooks and spars, to keep her off the rocks. Two or three times
+she stuck fast on sunken rocks, but by God's mercy always got off again
+without damage. At length we discovered three narrow inlets, the
+middlemost forming a bay, being the estuary of a river, which runs
+W.S.W. about eight or ten miles up the country, and is called
+Nullatartok. Into this we pushed, when shortly after our entrance, the
+ice entirely filled up the passage, and we were compelled to retreat to
+the uppermost part, choosing the shallowest possible spot to anchor in.
+The bay itself is about two miles in breadth, and only in the middle
+deep enough to admit the larger fields of drift ice to float into it.
+The strand is broad, and slopes off gently. It is covered with large
+tables of slate. The mountains on each side are high, and seem to
+consist of ferruginous slate, the lamina or plates of which are of such
+immense size, that they might serve for entire walls. Towards the sea,
+there exudes from these rocks, a yellowish white substance, which has a
+strong sulphureous smell. It was so powerful, that if a drop fell on a
+piece of tinned iron, it removed the tin in a few minutes.
+
+The vallies in the neighbourhood were green and full of flowers.
+
+Not far from the spot where we had pitched our tents, (which rested upon
+a carpet of _potentilla aurea_, in full bloom, bringing to our minds the
+European meadows, full of butter-cups), the river, which is of
+considerable breadth, falls into the bay. It abounds with fine
+salmon-trout. Farther to the westward, two other rivers flow into it,
+one of which is much broader than the other, and has a large cataract at
+some distance from its mouth. The upper parts of the mountains are
+covered partly with moss, and partly with low brush-wood, birch, and
+alder, and many berry-bearing shrubs and plants, but no high trees. We
+found here both arnica and colts-foot in great plenty. Brother
+Kohlmeister gathered and dried a quantity of each, as they are used in
+medical cases, and the former cannot be procured from England.
+
+The slate is extremely shivery, and is found in slabs, either lying or
+standing upright from four to eight feet square, most easily splitting
+into thin plates. Ascending the mountain, they are soon dislodged, by
+the tread of a man's foot, and glide down towards the beach with a
+rattling, tinkling noise. At low water, we noticed a bed of stone
+resembling cast iron, of a reddish hue, and polished by the friction of
+the water. After supping on salmon-trout, caught in the first-mentioned
+river, we retired to rest; but had some fears even here for the safety
+of our boat, the ice pushing in towards us, and our people being
+employed day and night in warding off the large shoals with their
+boat-hooks.
+
+4th. The weather being fair, Brother Kmoch ascended to the top of the
+highest part of the mountain near us, from whence he could see nothing
+but drift-ice, powerfully in motion towards the bay. Four of our
+Esquimaux went up the country to hunt reindeer; saw eight head and two
+fawns; but got none.
+
+Perceiving that our abode in this place might be of some duration, we
+for the first time pitched our tents on shore. Our morning and evening
+devotion was attended by the whole party; and on Sundays we read the
+Litany, and conducted the service in the usual way, which proved to us
+and our Esquimaux of great comfort and encouragement in all
+difficulties. We were detained here, by the ice, from the 3d to the
+15th, and our faith and patience were frequently put to the trial.
+Meanwhile we found much pleasure in walking up the declivities of the
+hills, and into the fine green and flowery vallies around us.
+
+5th. We went up the western extremity of the bay, but found nothing
+worth notice. Here the rocks appeared to be of a species of freestone.
+
+6th. In the evening we met in Jonathan's tent. Brother Kohlmeister
+addressed the company, and reminded them, that to-day the holy communion
+would be celebrated in our congregations, which we could not do in this
+place, under present circumstances. Then kneeling down, he offered up a
+fervent prayer, entreating the Lord not to forget us in this wilderness,
+but to give us to feel His all-reviving presence, and to feed our hungry
+and thirsty souls, out of the fulness of His grace. A comfortable sense
+of His love and peace filled all our hearts on this occasion.
+
+In the evening, Paul began to read out of the Harmony of the four
+Evangelists, which we shall continue as often as circumstances will
+admit of it. Jonathan and Jonas generally conduct the daily morning and
+evening worship.
+
+7th. We were so hard pressed by the ice driving towards us, that we were
+obliged in part to unload the boat, to be able to bring it into a safer
+situation in shallow water; and took our turns, three relieving three,
+to watch and guard off the larger shoals with boat-hooks, by day and
+night. We were glad to have reached a place, sheltered on all sides from
+the wind.
+
+8th. Our people went out to look for reindeer, and no prospect of our
+proceeding to sea appearing, they resolved to stay out all night.
+
+9th. Jonas returned and reported, that they had seen reindeer, but were
+not able to shoot any. Paul and Thukkekina went to-day to the western
+mountains, and staid over night.
+
+10th. Brother Kmoch went to the westward to look for birds. He saw a
+large flight of sea-fowl, but they were extremely shy, and would not
+permit him to get near them. From the hills around us, we perceived that
+the entrance into the bay was completely blocked up with ice; and
+towards the sea, nothing but one continued field of ice appeared. We
+sighed and prayed to the Lord to help us in this time of need. Jonas
+went out in his kayak, and shot an _ugsuk_, not far from our tent.
+Towards evening, we saw a fire made by our reindeer-hunters, at the
+western extremity of the bay, and they fired their pieces to give us
+notice, that they had got some game, and that we should fetch it with
+the small boat.
+
+Okkiksuk therefore went, and found them completely overcome with
+fatigue, having dragged their game, across the mountains for a
+considerable distance. The Esquimaux are indeed able to carry burdens up
+and down hill, under which most Europeans would sink, but when they kill
+a deer far inland, it is hard-earned food, by the trouble of carrying it
+home. Paul had shot two reindeer, of which we received a portion.
+Brother Kohlmeister had been on the other side of the bay, and returned
+with a large parcel of plants and flowers, the examination of which
+afforded him much amusement.
+
+The Esquimaux now boiled a large kettle full of seal's flesh, of which
+we were invited to partake. This we did, and thought it a very palatable
+mess, particularly as we had tasted no fresh meat since we had left the
+North Ikkerasak. The prejudice of the Europeans against seal's flesh,
+consists mostly in imagination. The dirty kettle in which the Esquimaux
+boil it, is indeed not calculated to excite an appetite, but the meat,
+when eaten fresh, tastes much like beef; when cold, it acquires an oily
+taste; nor durst a person, not accustomed to it from his childhood, make
+a practice of eating it, as it is of a very heating nature, and would
+soon bring on serious disorders. It generally prevents sleep, if eaten
+at supper.
+
+12th. The wind became West, and cleared the bay of the ice. Brother
+Kmoch and Jonathan went to the opposite shore and found winter-houses,
+one of which had been inhabited last winter; two others were in ruins.
+They climbed the highest eminence towards Nachvak, but saw nothing but
+drift-ice, covering the sea, with but few spots of open water, to the
+north.
+
+13th. It blew hard from the West. David and Okkiksuk crossed the bay to
+explore the state of the ice from the hills. In the evening they
+returned with intelligence, that the sea was cleared of ice to the
+northward. David had caught a netsek, (a small species of seal), and we
+had taken a good draught of trout in the net before our tent.
+
+14th. Jonathan roused us at four in the morning, the wind being in our
+favour, and we immediately made preparations to depart. After breakfast,
+as we were praying the Litany, a sudden storm arose. We were assembled
+in Jonathan's tent, and the stones and pegs, with which it had been
+fastened down to the ground, being already removed, the tent-skins were
+soon blown about our heads by the violence of the wind, and we were now
+obliged patiently to wait till the storm abated. In the midst of our
+deliberations, accompanied with expressions of our disappointment,
+Thukkekina gravely observed, that we might very likely get away this
+summer, and need not be dismayed. Towards evening, it fell calm, and the
+musquitoes teazed us unmercifully. We supped on fresh salmon, filled our
+tents with smoke, to keep off our winged tormentors, shut ourselves in,
+and forgot our grievances and Thukkekina's consolations in sound sleep.
+
+15th. In the morning at three o'clock, we took a final leave of
+Nullatartok bay, and got under way with a favourable, though rather
+boisterous wind at S.W. having been detained here for twelve days by the
+ice. After about an hour's sail, we were near the entrance of the inlet,
+when a sudden gust from the mountains carried away our after-top-mast,
+with sail and tackle. It fell with great noise on the deck, and into the
+sea. By God's mercy no one was hurt, and we were more particularly
+thankful, that of the five children on board, none were just then on
+deck.
+
+It once happened, that the main-yard fell down, and but narrowly missed
+striking two children, who with a third were sitting and playing
+together. They must inevitably have lost their lives, had it fallen upon
+them. We praised God for their preservation during the whole voyage. By
+the above-mentioned disaster, we were obliged to run into a small cove,
+where we repaired the mast with all speed, and proceeded with a gentle
+wind towards Nachvak. A calm ensued, and as there is no anchorage
+between Nullatartok and Nachvak, we rowed all night, and felt the
+advantage of the great length of days, at this season of the year.
+
+16th. The view we had of the magnificent mountains of Nachvak,
+especially about sun-rise, afforded us and our Esquimaux great
+gratification. Their south-east extremity much resembles Saddle island
+near Okkak, being high, steep, and of singular shape. These mountains in
+general are not unlike those of Kaumayok for picturesque outline. In one
+place, tremendous precipices form a vast amphitheatre, surmounted by a
+ledge of green sod, which seemed to be the resort of an immense number
+of sea-gulls and other fowls, never interrupted by the intrusion of man.
+They flew with loud screams backwards and forwards over our heads, as if
+to warn off such unwelcome visitors. In another place, a narrow chasm
+opens into the mountain, widening into a lagoon, the surrounding rocks
+resembling the ruins of a large Gothic building, with the green ocean
+for its pavement, and the sky for its dome. The weather being fine, and
+the sun cheering us with his bright rays, after a cold and sleepless
+night, we seemed to acquire new vigour, by the contemplation of the
+grand features of nature around us. We now perceived some Esquimaux with
+a woman's boat, in a small bay, preparing to steer for Nachvak. They
+fired their pieces, and called to us to join them, as they had
+discovered a stranded whale. Going on shore to survey the remains of
+this huge animal, we found it by no means a pleasant sight. It lay upon
+the rocks, occupying a space about thirty feet in diameter, but was much
+shattered, and in a decaying state. Our people, however, cut off a
+quantity of blubber from its lips. The greater part of the blubber of
+this fish was lost, as the Esquimaux had no means of conveying it to
+Okkak.
+
+The Esquimaux stationed here showed great willingness to assist us; and
+as our party was much fatigued with rowing all night, they towed us into
+Nachvak, where we arrived about 2 P.M. Old Kayaluk and a young man,
+Parnguna, and his wife, were here. The latter called on Brother
+Kohlmeister, and thanked him for having saved her life. He had forgotten
+that he had once given her medicine at Okkak in a dangerous illness, but
+her gratitude was still unbounded.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+  _Reception at Nachvak. Description of the bay. The Esquimaux
+  manner of spearing salmon and trout. Christian deportment of
+  the Okkak and Hopedale Esquimaux. Jonas's address to the
+  Heathen. Love of music general among these Indians. Departure
+  from Nachvak. Danger in doubling the North Cape. Arrival at
+  Sangmiyok bay._
+
+
+July 16th.--After two or three hours sleep in our cabin, we went on
+shore. The Esquimaux, who had here a temporary station, about fifty in
+number, received us with every mark of attention. Loud shouts of joy
+resounded from all quarters, and muskets were fired in every direction.
+They could scarcely wait with patience for our landing, and when we
+pitched our tent, were all eager to assist; thus we were soon at home
+among them. Seven tents were standing on the strand, and we found the
+people here differing much in their manners from the people at Saeglek.
+Their behaviour was modest and rather bashful, nor were we assailed by
+beggars and importunate intruders, as at the latter place, where beggary
+seemed quite the fashion, and proved very troublesome to us. But we had
+no instance of stealing. Thieves are considered by the Esquimaux in
+general with abhorrence, and with a thief no one is willing to trade. We
+have discovered, however, that that propensity is not altogether wanting
+in the northern Esquimaux, who, now and then, if they think that they
+can do it without detection, will make a little free with their
+neighbour's property.
+
+The Esquimaux not only gave us a most hearty welcome, but attended our
+morning and evening prayers with great silence and apparent devotion.
+Indeed, to our great surprise, they behaved altogether with uncommon
+decorum and regularity during our stay.
+
+17th. Being detained with drift-ice at the mouth of the bay, we pitched
+our tent on shore. We examined the bay more minutely. It extends to the
+West to a considerable depth, and is not protected by any islands,
+except a few rocks, at some distance in the sea. The surrounding
+mountains are very high, steep, and barren, and verdure is found only in
+the vallies. Here the _arnica montana_, which the Missionaries have
+found of great use among the Esquimaux, grows in great abundance.
+Salmon-trout are caught in every creek and inlet.
+
+Like the salmon, they remain in the rivers and fresh-water lakes during
+the winter, and return to the sea in spring. The Esquimaux about Okkak
+and Saeglek, catch them in winter under the ice by spearing. For this
+purpose, they make two holes in the ice, about eight inches in diameter,
+and six feet asunder, in a direction from north to south. The northern
+hole they screen from the sun, by a bank of snow about four feet in
+height, raised in a semicircle round its southern edge, and form another
+similar bank on the north-side of the southern hole, sloped in such a
+manner as to reflect the rays of the sun into it. The Esquimaux then
+lies down, with his face close to the northern aperture, beneath which
+the water is strongly illuminated by the sunbeams entering at the
+southern. In his left hand he holds a red string, with which he plays in
+the water, to allure the fish, and in his right a spear, ready to strike
+them as they approach. In this manner they soon take as many as they
+want.
+
+The salmon-trout on this coast are from twelve to eighteen inches long,
+and in August and September so fat, that the Esquimaux collect from them
+a sufficient quantity of oil for their lamps. The immense abundance of
+these fish on all parts of the coast, would almost at any time save the
+Esquimaux from starving with hunger; but as seals furnish them both with
+food and clothing, it is of most consequence to them to attend to this
+branch of supply. At Hopedale and Nain, however, salmon-trout are caught
+only in the summer.
+
+We were much pleased with the behaviour of our own Esquimaux, during
+their stay at Nachvak. In every respect they conducted themselves, in
+word and deed, as true Christian people. Their conversation with their
+heathen countrymen, was free and unreserved, and "to the use of
+edifying." Jonathan and Jonas in particular, gave us great satisfaction.
+
+The people having assembled in Jonathan's tent, those who had no room in
+it, standing without and listening with great order and stillness,
+Brother Kohlmeister addressed them, explaining the aim of our voyage;
+that we were going, out of love to their nation, to the northern
+Esquimaux, and to those of Ungava bay, to make known to them the love of
+God our Saviour; and, by the gospel, to point out to them the way to
+obtain life everlasting. We knew that they were heathen, who, being
+ignorant of the way to God, were in bondage to the devil, and would be
+lost for ever, unless God had mercy upon them and sent them his word, to
+lead them to Jesus Christ their only Saviour, who shed His blood, and
+died on the cross to redeem their souls.
+
+They received the discourses and exhortations of the Missionary with
+reverential attention, but those of their own countrymen, with still
+greater eagerness, and we hope not without benefit. Jonas once addressed
+them thus; "We were but lately as ignorant as you are now: we were long
+unable to understand the comfortable words of the gospel: we had neither
+ears to hear, nor hearts to receive them, till Jesus, by his power,
+opened our hearts and ears. Now we know what Jesus has done for us, and
+how great the happiness of those souls is, who come unto Him, love Him
+as their Saviour, and know, that they shall not be lost, when this life
+is past. Without this we live in constant fear of death. You will enjoy
+the same happiness, if you turn to and believe in Jesus. We are not
+surprised that you do not yet understand us. We were once like you, but
+now thank Jesus our Redeemer, with tears of joy, that He has revealed
+Himself unto us," Thus, with cheerful countenances and great energy, did
+these Christian Esquimaux praise and glorify the name of Christ our
+Saviour, and declare, what he had done for their souls, exhorting the
+heathen likewise to believe.
+
+The above address seemed to make a deep impression on the minds of all
+present. One of their leaders, or captains, exclaimed with great
+eagerness, in presence of them all: "I am determined to be converted to
+Jesus." His name is _Onalik_. He afterwards called upon Brother
+Kohlmeister, and inquired, whether it was the same, to which of the
+three settlements he removed, as it was his firm determination to become
+a true believer. Brother Kohlmeister answered: "That it was indifferent
+where he lived, if he were only converted and became a child of God, and
+an heir of life eternal." Another, named _Tullugaksoak_, made the same
+declaration, and added: "That he would no longer live among the
+heathen."
+
+Though the very fickle disposition of the heathen Esquimaux, might cause
+some doubts to arise in our minds, as to their putting these good
+resolutions into practice, yet we hope, that the seed of the word of
+God, sown in this place, may not have altogether fallen upon barren
+ground.
+
+In the evening, our people met in Jonathan's tent, and sang hymns.
+Almost all the inhabitants were present. They afterwards spent a long
+time in pleasant and edifying conversation. It may here be observed,
+that the Esquimaux delight in singing and music. As to national songs,
+they have nothing deserving of that name; and the various collectors of
+these precious morsels in our day, would find their labour lost in
+endeavouring to harmonize the incantations of their sorcerers and
+witches, which more resemble the howlings of wolves and growlings of
+bears, than any thing human. But though the hymn and psalm-tunes of the
+Brethren's Church are mostly of antient construction, and, though rich
+in harmony, have no airy melodies to make them easily understood by
+unmusical ears, yet the Esquimaux soon learn to sing them correctly; and
+the voices of the women are remarkably sweet and well-tuned. Brother
+Kohlmeister having given one of the children a toy-flute, Paul took it,
+and immediately picked out the proper stops in playing several
+psalm-tunes upon it, as well as the imperfect state of the instrument
+would admit. Brother Kmoch having taken a violin with him, the same
+Esquimaux likewise took it up, and it was not long before he found out
+the manner of producing the different notes.
+
+18th. At 8 A.M. Brother Kohlmeister having delivered a
+farewell-discourse to the Esquimaux, (during which they were much
+affected), we took leave of these goodnatured people, and set sail with
+a fair and strong West-wind, but met with much drift-ice at the entrance
+of the bay. It made less way than our boat, and the wind becoming more
+violent, we found ourselves in an unpleasant situation. After tacking
+all day, and a great part of the night, the ice preventing our
+proceeding, and the wind, our returning to our former station, we were
+obliged to make for the Eastern point of the bay, where we at length
+succeeded in gaining a small cove, and cast anchor.
+
+Our situation was singular; the rocks rose in a semicircle around us,
+towering perpendicularly to an amazing height, like an immense wall.
+
+After a few hours stay, two Nachvak Esquimaux joined us, and prevailed
+on Jonathan to return to the tents, but we had scarcely reached the
+centre of the bay, before the violence of the wind drove us out to sea,
+and we were compelled to push for the northern promontory, from which
+all the ice had now retreated. Under the mountains we found shelter from
+the wind, which had by this time risen to a storm. It was late, and as
+it appeared dangerous to remain here, we rowed towards the point, but
+there beheld, with terror, the raging of the sea and dashing of the
+waves against the rocks, the spray flying like clouds into the air, and
+returned into smooth water, where, however, we were long in finding a
+place to anchor in. The night was spent quietly under shelter of the
+high rocks. They form the base of mountains higher than the _Kiglapeyd_,
+rise perpendicularly, in some places impending, with fragments,
+apparently loose, hanging over their edge, and forming all kinds of
+grotesque figures.
+
+19th. At sun-rise we still saw and heard the storm which threatened us
+with destruction, if we ventured to double the cape.
+
+At nine the wind abated, and we set sail, got safe round the point, and
+glided, with a gentle wind, into a broad, shallow bay, called Sangmiyok,
+full both of hidden and visible rocks, in which we cast anchor about
+five P.M. While Brother Kmoch superintended the concerns of the kitchen,
+Brother Kohlmeister and Jonathan went on shore, and to the highest
+mountain on the promontory. From the top of this mountain they could
+plainly discern the four principal headlands between Cape Mugford and
+Cape Chudleigh. The former situated in latitude 58 deg. N. the latter in
+61 deg. Between these are four promontories, in a line from S.E. to N.W.
+The first is _Uivak_, at the entrance into Saeglek Bay, outside of which
+a small island lies, in form of a pyramid or sugar-loaf. Next follow the
+two forming Nachvak Bay, another _Uivak_ to the south of _Nennoktok_,
+upon which we stood. The fourth is _Kakkeviak_, not far from Killinek,
+or Cape Chudleigh, in form of a tent, called in the charts _Blackhead_.
+_Nennoktok_ is called _False Blackhead_.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+  _Pass Cape Nennoktok. Visit the Esquimaux families at
+  Kummaktorvik and Amitok. Description of an Esquimaux travelling
+  bed. Mountains seen at Ungava. Netsek seal described. Greenland
+  houses. Danger of being shipwrecked near Kakkeviak._
+
+
+July 20th.--We proceeded with little or no wind, and taking to our oars,
+doubled the great Cape of Nennoktok. Here a strong swell from the sea
+met us, and tossed our boat violently about, and, having no wind, it
+drove us nearer to the shore than was perfectly safe. We remained about
+an hour in this unpleasant situation, when a breeze sprung up, which
+carried us out to the open sea among islands. It now began to rain very
+hard, and the wind rose. While Brother Kmoch was assisting the people on
+deck, Brother Kohlmeister had enough to do below, to keep peace among
+the furniture of our cabin, and sometimes found himself defeated in his
+attempts, pots and pans, and boxes, and every thing that was not a
+fixture, tumbling upon him. Several of our people were in the skin-boat,
+and the fury of the wind and sea would not permit them to come to our
+assistance. The weather also became so thick and foggy between the
+islands, that we were unable to see to any distance. Jonathan was
+therefore glad to have been yesterday on shore, when from the mountain
+he discovered the situation of the promontory, the coast, and the
+islands before us, and now contrived to steer in the proper direction.
+We soon found ourselves in smoother water, and among islands, where a
+vast number of seals and birds made their appearance. At six in the
+evening we reached _Kummaktorvik_, and came to an anchor.
+
+Having landed, Brother Kmoch shot a hare, close to the beach. These
+creatures are white in winter, and grey in summer, and in winter so
+numerous, that though, when roasted, they are excellent food, we were
+almost tired of them last year at Okkak.
+
+The rain continuing during the whole of the night and forenoon of the
+21st, we found it necessary by sufficient rest to strengthen ourselves
+for future watchfulness.
+
+An Esquimaux travelling bed consists of a large bag of reindeer-skin,
+with the hair turned inward, covered with seal-skin, the hair turned
+outward. It is furnished with a broad flap to cover the mouth, and a
+strap to fasten down the flap. This bag comprehends the whole apparatus
+and furniture of an Esquimaux bed-room. Having undressed, the traveller
+creeps into it, and a kind neighbour having shut him up close by
+fastening the strap, he leaves him to sleep on till morning, when he
+helps him out again. In summer the flap is dispensed with. The
+invention, however, is of European origin, and a luxury introduced by
+the Missionaries; for an Esquimaux lies down in his clothes, without
+further preparation.
+
+In the morning we landed, and had the usual Sunday's service with our
+people on shore; after which Brother Kohlmeister visited the Esquimaux
+in their tents, and had some religious conversation with them, to which
+they seemed to pay attention. Afterwards Kuttaktok, John, Nukkapiak, and
+Kajulik, with their wives, came to see us on board. They are the winter
+inhabitants of this bay. John was baptized in infancy at Okkak, but
+afterwards left the settlement, and not only associates with the heathen
+Esquimaux, but has even been guilty of murder. All of them, however,
+come occasionally to Okkak. They had two tents about four miles from our
+landing place.
+
+22d. The contrary wind forbidding our departure, Brother Kohlmeister,
+accompanied by Jonathan, Jonas, and Thukkekina, walked across the
+country to the N.W. bay, to return their visit. When they saw them
+coming at a distance, they fired their pieces, to direct them to the
+tents, and came joyfully to meet the Missionary and his party. Nothing
+could exceed the cordiality with which they received them. A kettle was
+immediately put on the fire to cook salmon-trout, and all were invited
+to partake, which was the more readily accepted, as the length of the
+walk had created an appetite, the keenness of which overcame all
+squeamishness. To do these good people justice, their kettle was rather
+cleaner than usual, the dogs having licked it well, and the fish were
+fresh and well dressed. To honour the Missionary, a box was placed for
+him to sit upon, and the fish were served up to each upon a flat stone
+instead of a plate. After dinner, Brother Kohlmeister, in acknowledgment
+for their civility, gave to each of the women two needles, and a small
+portion of tobacco to each man, with which they were highly delighted.
+
+All of them being seated, a very lively and unreserved conversation took
+place concerning the only way of salvation, through Jesus Christ, and
+the necessity of conversion. With John and his mother Mary, Brother
+Kohlmeister spoke very seriously, and represented to them the danger of
+their state, as apostates from the faith; but they seem blinded by
+Satan, and determined to persist in their heathenish life. The Esquimaux
+now offered to convey the party across the bay in their skin-boat, which
+was accepted. Almost all of them accompanied the boat, and met with a
+very friendly reception from our boat's company. In the evening, after
+some hymns had been sung by our people, Jonas addressed them and the
+heathen Esquimaux in a short, nervous discourse, on the blessedness of
+being reconciled unto God.
+
+Kummaktorvik bay runs N.E. and S.W. and is defended by some islands from
+the sea. It is about four or five miles long, and surrounded by high
+mountains, with some pleasant plains at their foot, covered with
+verdure. It's distance from Nachvak is about twelve miles. This chain of
+mountains, as will be hereafter mentioned, may be seen from
+Kangertlualuksoak, in Ungava Bay, which is a collateral proof, that the
+neck of land, terminated to the N. by Cape Chudleigh, is of no great
+width. Both the Nain and Okkak Esquimaux frequently penetrate far enough
+inland to find the rivers taking a westerly direction, consequently
+towards the Ungava country. They even now and then have reached the
+woods skirting the estuaries of George and South rivers.
+
+23d. We set sail at sun-rise, but the wind being too high to suffer us
+to proceed with safety, we again anchored in a commodious harbour in
+_Amitok_ island. Our people were here busily employed in repairing the
+damaged rigging and sails. Towards evening Jonas caught a seal, to the
+great gratification of our party. It was dressed immediately, and we
+joined them in their repast with a good appetite.
+
+The _Netsek_ is the only species of seal which remains during the winter
+under the ice. They form in it large caverns, in which they bring forth
+their young, two at a time, in March. More than one cavern belongs to
+one seal, that he may, if disturbed in the first, take shelter in the
+second. No other kind of seal is caught in winter by the Esquimaux.
+
+24th. Brother Kmoch rose at two, and went on shore to examine the island
+more minutely. The morning was beautiful, and the sun rose with great
+splendour. _Amitok_ lies N.W. from Kummaktorvik, is of an oblong shape,
+and stretches out pretty far towards the sea. The hills are of moderate
+height, the land is in many places flat, but in general destitute of
+grass. On the other side are some ruins of Greenland houses.
+
+The Esquimaux have a tradition, that the Greenlanders came originally
+from Canada, and settled on the outermost islands of this coast, but
+never penetrated into the country, before they were driven eastward to
+Greenland. This report gains some credit, from the state in which the
+abovementioned ruins are found. They consist in remains of walls and
+graves, with a low stone enclosure round the tomb, covered with a slab
+of the same material. They have been discovered on islands near Nain,
+and though sparingly, all along the whole eastern coast, but we saw none
+in Ungava bay. The rocks on Amitok contain large masses of a crumbly,
+semi-transparent garnet, of a reddish hue. (From some specimens sent
+out, it rather appears to be a rose red quartz, or beryllite).
+
+As it appeared as if we should be detained here, Brother Kmoch had made
+a fire, and was leisurely cooking a savoury mess of birds for breakfast,
+when Jonathan returned from the hills, with intelligence that the wind
+was abating in violence, and he therefore would proceed. The tent was
+struck, and all hurried on board: yet we had long to combat both an
+unfavourable wind and a strong current, which compelled us to double the
+East point of the island, and seek shelter among some small islands,
+steering for _Niakungu_ point. From hence we got the first sight of
+_Tikkerarsuk_, (the Esquimaux name for a low point stretching from the
+continent into the sea), of the island _Aulatzevik_, and the high
+promontory of _Kakkeviak_. The whole country to the west of _Niakungu_
+is called _Serliarutsit_. It fell calm as we doubled the point, and we
+took to our oars, and came to an anchor in an open bay, south of
+Tikkerarsuk.
+
+25th. At 6 P.M. we got under weigh with a fine S.E. wind, and made for
+the island of _Aulatzevik_, which is about the same size as an island of
+the same name, near Kiglapeyd. The passage between the island and the
+main is too shallow for an European boat like ours. The wind rising we
+sailed towards Kakkeviak at a great rate. To the right lay a chain of
+small islands called by the Esquimaux Pikkiulits, (the habitation of
+young eider-ducks). Having nearly doubled _Kakkeviak_ cape, we perceived
+two tents on shore, which occasioned loud rejoicings on board. They
+belonged to _Kumiganna_ of _Saeglek_, with his party, who being bound to
+Killinek, had promised to accompany us thither. The wind was very high,
+and the Cape encircled with numerous visible and invisible rocks, but
+there was a clear passage to the shore, keeping outside of the breakers.
+But whether from the violence of the wind, or from the eagerness with
+which our trusty captain wished soon to join his countrymen, he steered
+right through the midst of them, when suddenly the boat struck with
+great violence upon a sunken rock. The shock was so great, that all on
+board were thrown down, and every thing tumbled about. Poor Agnes,
+Jonas's wife, got a severe wound in her head. We immediately took in all
+our sails, and after hard labour, succeeded in pushing the boat off the
+rock. On examination we found that all was safe, and thanked God, with
+hearts filled with humble acknowledgments of His mercy, for preserving
+us from danger and death. The boat had struck in such a manner, that the
+keel, which was new and strong, being constructed of one solid piece of
+timber, sustained the whole shock. Had she taken the rock with her
+bottom, she would most likely have bilged, or upset, and it is a great
+question, whether our lives, but particularly the lives of the little
+children, could have been saved, the sea running very high. The
+skin-boat was thrown right over the rocks on shore, by the violence of
+the surf.
+
+Kumiganna soon came off in his kayak, and advised us to steer for the
+land right before us, where he thought we should find _Uttakiyok_; nor
+was there any safe anchorage in this place. We therefore took a young
+Esquimaux on board as pilot, and steered between the main land and the
+islands, for _Oppernavik_, twenty English miles off. Having left the
+skin-boat to follow us, we cut swiftly through the water, and soon
+reached the place of our destination.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+  _Arrival at Oppernavik. Account of Uttakiyok. His perseverance
+  in waiting for the arrival of the Missionaries. Islands and
+  bays between Kakkeviak and Killinek. Danger in the ice at
+  Ammitok. Want of fuel supplied by robbing old graves._
+
+
+When we arrived at Oppernavik, we found _Uttakiyok_, with his two wives
+and youngest brother, waiting to receive us. He and his family are from
+the Ungava bay, and had been upon the watch in this place during the
+whole spring. They welcomed us with shouts of joy, and firing of their
+pieces, and we had indeed the greatest reason to thank God, that he had
+sent us this man, to conduct us on our way to an unknown country, and
+through unfrequented seas.
+
+For this service Uttakiyok was eminently qualified, and without such a
+steady, faithful guide, we should have been wandering in the most
+painful and dangerous uncertainty in the desert regions to the West of
+Cape Chudleigh, where, on a coast of 100 miles in length, we did not
+meet with a single inhabitant. He was so anxiously intent upon meeting
+us, that he had erected signals on all the heights surrounding his tent,
+to prevent our missing him. Among his countrymen he is much respected,
+on account of his superior sense, and skill in all Esquimaux arts, and
+possesses great influence among them.
+
+_Uttakiyok_ was one of the two Esquimaux, from whom, in the year 1800,
+we received the first distinct information respecting the Ungava country
+and its inhabitants, by which the desire, excited both at home and here
+in Labrador, to visit the northern Esquimaux, was greatly strengthened,
+and led to a resolution, if possible, to take early steps to accomplish
+this object, (See page 3).
+
+Two years ago, he had been on a trading voyage to Okkak, from Killinek,
+where he then dwelt, and intended to return, in the summer following, to
+Ungava, his native country, but an illness, which befel his son,
+detained him. This intelligence was received at Okkak during last
+winter, when we sent him word, that as we purposed paying his countrymen
+a visit, we wished him to wait for us, that he might conduct us through
+the straits of Killinek. But having heard nothing further concerning
+him, we remained in uncertainty respecting his intentions. We were the
+more thankful to God, who had disposed the heart of this man cheerfully
+to accept of the commission, and wait to be our guide, an office which
+he performed with a degree of faithfulness and disinterested kindness,
+which claims our admiration and gratitude.
+
+While we were here waiting for a favourable opportunity to pass the
+straits, which were yet filled with ice, he behaved in the kindest
+manner to us and our Esquimaux. Though a heathen, he regularly attended
+our morning and evening worship, and declared to Jonathan, that he also
+intended to be converted to Jesus, and if we would form a settlement in
+his country, would come and live with us, and was sure, that many of his
+countrymen would do the same.
+
+Around his tent, a considerable extent of rock was covered with seal's
+flesh, and in the hollows were pools of oil. Ten bags of blubber were
+standing ready for sale; and with a view to shew him our good-will,
+Brother Kohlmeister bartered with him for three of them, which were hid
+under the stones, to take them with us, if practicable, on our return.
+
+26th. We put up our three tents; Uttakiyok's people had three more. Wind
+N.W. We were now near the entrance into the Ikkerasak, (or straits),
+which separate the island of Killinek and two or three other large
+islands from the continent. They stretch to the N. to the distance of
+about 12 or 15 English miles, the outer one forming Cape Chudleigh. To
+the N.W. of the cape lie some other small islands, called by the
+Esquimaux _Tutsaets_, and N.N.E. of these, the great island
+_Resolution_, called _Igloarsuk_, on which, as we were informed, many
+Esquimaux reside. The Tutsaets were discernible from this place, but not
+the latter, which however, as the Esquimaux say, may be seen from the
+Tutsaets. We guessed at its situation, from the clouds hanging over it
+in the North quarter. The weather was, as might be expected on the
+northern coast of America, foggy, rainy, and cold, and our small stove,
+which we brought into the tent, was of great use to us during our stay
+in this place.
+
+27th. Rain and wind violent, and prevented our proceeding. We caught
+some _Pitsiolaks_, (awks), and a brace of young puffins, which, with the
+addition of some salt meat, made excellent broth.
+
+28th. The weather was fair, but the wind still blowing hard at N.W.
+Brother Kmoch went to Uttakiyok's tent, and sitting down with him at the
+point of Oppernavik, and looking down the coast as far as Kakkeviak, got
+him to name all the bays, points, and islands, from Kakkeviak to
+Oppernavik, of which he made minutes. The distance between the two
+points or headlands may be guessed at, by the time of sailing with a
+strong leading wind, namely three hours and a half. Coming up from
+Kakkeviak, to the E. lie three islands, _Kikkertorsoak_, _Imilialuk_,
+rather less in view, and _Nessetservik_. Having passed these, there
+follows a chain of small, naked islands, not very high, stretching
+towards Killinek. To the W. near Kakkeviak lies _Uglek_; then a bay,
+_Nulluk_, and farther to the left another bay, _Tellek_, (right arm).
+The country along these bays is called _Attanarsuk_. Now follow the bay
+_Ikkorliarsuk_, the lower point of _Tikkerarsuk_, the bay _Annivagtok_,
+and _Kakkeviak_, a high promontory, (not to be confounded with the other
+Kakkeviak, where we struck on the rock. This promontory is only about
+four miles from Oppernavik to the S.E.). Then follow two small bays,
+_Anniovariktok_ and _Sangmiyok_, then the promontory _Ukkuliakartok_,
+(meaning a headland between two bays), and the bay _Tunnusuksoak_. Next,
+the last point on the continent, forming the south entrance to the
+Ikkerasak. The abovementioned chain of barren islands is called by the
+Esquimaux _Naviarutsit_, and besides them some low rocks, _Nuvurutsit_.
+The island of Killinek is about nine miles long, and five broad, high,
+and forming the north side of the straits. Another Ikkerasak, (or
+strait), divides it from an island called Kikkertorsoak, (a common name
+for an island), of considerable height, but not so long as _Killinek_:
+one, or perhaps more islands follow, narrowing E. and W. and forming
+Cape Chudleigh.
+
+To-day there was much ice both in the strait and at sea. We went to the
+nearest island, where Brother Kohlmeister took an observation, and found
+our situation to be 60 deg. 16'.
+
+30th. It blew a hard gale from the N.E., rained hard, and as the ice now
+began to enter our harbour, we were busily engaged in keeping it off the
+boat.
+
+31st. Imagining to-day that the straits would be free from ice, we
+resolved to attempt to pass them, and set sail. But it soon became
+evident, that there was still plenty of ice in the neighbourhood, and
+the wind setting to the N.E. with fogs, we were obliged to return.
+Suspecting also that the easterly wind would again drive the ice into
+our former harbour at Oppernavik, we ran into a short pass, between that
+and a small island called Ammitok, where we anchored under shelter of
+the island. The sequel proved, that we had for once acted with sound
+judgment and foresight, for our former anchoring-ground was soon filled
+with ice; and during the night large flakes entered even into our
+present place of refuge.
+
+_August_ 1st. At day break we found ourselves completely surrounded by
+floating ice, a strong N.W. wind driving the large shoals from the W.
+side of the little pass in which we lay, with much force towards us,
+insomuch that our boat was in the greatest danger of being crushed to
+pieces by them. We were all day long hard at work with poles,
+boat-hooks, and hatchets, to ward off the larger shoals, but when the
+tide fell, they hung upon our cables and anchors, of which we had three
+out, closing in also on all sides of the boat, so that we were every
+moment in fearful expectation of her being carried away, and our anchors
+lost, which would have reduced us to the most distressing situation.
+Indeed we all cried to the Lord to help us in this dangerous situation,
+and not to suffer us to perish here, but by His almighty aid, to save us
+and our boat. With great and unremitting exertions we had laboured all
+day, from the morning early, till seven in the evening, when the Lord
+heard our prayers, and sent relief. We now succeeded in working the boat
+out of the ice, the rising of the tide having opened a passage through
+it, just as we were almost exhausted with fatigue. It also became quite
+calm, and we felt as if we had passed from death to life.
+
+Having anchored again on the opposite side of the little pass or strait,
+we gave thanks to God, for the deliverance we had experienced through
+His mercy, in which our Esquimaux, young and old, most fervently joined.
+
+During our stay at Oppernavik, our whole stock of fire-wood was
+expended, and we were obliged to purchase of our companions, what they
+had to spare. We likewise robbed some old Esquimaux graves of the wooden
+utensils, which it is the superstitious practice of the heathen to lay
+beside the corpses of their owners, with old tent-poles, &c. and thus
+obtained fuel sufficient for our cookery.
+
+Wood will not decay by mere exposure to the air in Labrador, but wastes
+away gradually; and after forty or more years, the wood found at the
+graves is still fit for use.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+  _Departure from Oppernavik. Pass the Ikkerasak of Killinek.
+  Whirlpools. The coast takes a southerly direction. Meeting with
+  Esquimaux from the Ungava country, who had never seen an
+  European. Anchor at Omanek. High tides. Drift-wood. Double Cape
+  Uibvaksoak. Distant view of Akpatok._
+
+
+August 2d.--Having made all needful preparations for the voyage, a
+gentle but favourable wind, and occasional rowing, brought us, about
+nine in the morning, to the entrance of the much dreaded Ikkerasak. The
+weather was pleasant and warm, not a flake of ice was to be seen, and
+all our fear and anxiety had subsided. Our minds were attuned to praise
+and thanksgiving for the providential preservation we had experienced
+yesterday. We performed our morning devotions on deck, and all joined in
+a joyful hallelujah to God our Saviour, which was sweetly repeated by
+echoes among the mountains and precipices on either side. The
+scripture-text appointed in the Church of the United Brethren for this
+day being read, it seemed as if addressed particularly to us, separated
+as we felt ourselves, in these lonely regions, from the rest of the
+inhabitants of the earth: "_See now that I, even I, am He, and there is
+no God with me: I kill, and I make alive; I wound, and I heal._" Deut.
+32, 39. We rejoiced, that we were in the hands of a gracious and
+merciful God and Father, who would not forsake us, but deal with us
+according to his wonted mercy and favour.
+
+The Ikkerasak, (or strait), is about ten miles in length; the land on
+each side high and rocky, and in some places precipitous, but there
+appeared no rocks in the strait itself. The water is deep and clear. Its
+mouth is wide, and soon after entering, a bay opens to the left, which
+by an inlet only just wide enough to admit a boat, communicates with a
+lagoon of considerable magnitude, in which lies an island on its western
+bank. Beyond this bay, the passage narrows and consequently the stream,
+always setting from N. to S. grows more rapid. Here the mountains on
+both sides rise to a great height. Having proceeded for two miles in a
+narrow channel, the strait opens again, but afterwards contracts to
+about 1000 yards across; immediately beyond which, the left coast turns
+to the south. As the tide ebbs regularly with the current from N. to S.
+along the whole coast of Labrador, the current through the strait is
+most violent during its fall, and less, when resisted by its influx on
+rising.
+
+We were taught to expect much danger in passing certain eddies or
+whirlpools in the narrow parts of the straits, and were therefore
+continually upon the look-out for them. When we passed the first narrow
+channel, at 12 P.M. it being low water, no whirlpool was perceptible.
+Having sailed on for little more than half an hour, with wind and tide
+in our favour, we reached the second. Here, indeed, we discovered a
+whirlpool, but of no great magnitude at this state of the tide. Near the
+north-shore the water was, indeed, whirled round in the manner of a
+boiling cauldron of ten or twelve feet diameter, with considerable noise
+and much foam; but we passed without the smallest inconvenience, within
+thirty or forty feet of the outer circle. Our skin-boat, however, which
+we had in tow, with a man in it, was seized by the vortex, and received
+a rapid twist; but as the towing-rope did not break, she was immediately
+rescued from danger by the swiftness of our course, and the affair
+afforded us more diversion than anxiety. The motion of the water in
+these eddies is so great, that they never freeze in the severest winter.
+The ice being drawn towards them with great force, the largest shoals
+are carried under water, and thrown up again, broken into numerous
+fragments. The Ikkerasak is at that season utterly impassable for boats.
+The Killinek people inhabit an island to the right, after leaving the
+strait.
+
+When we quitted the Ikkerasak, and entered the ocean on the western side
+of Cape Chudleigh, it seemed as if we were transported to a new world.
+Hitherto the coast to our left had always taken a northerly direction.
+It now turned to the S.S.W. and is low, with gently sloping hills, the
+sea being full of small islands, abounding in sea-fowl.
+
+To the N. and N.W. we saw the open sea in Hudson's Straits, which,
+compared to the turbulent Atlantic, seemed calm and peaceful. We sailed
+briskly amidst the islands, and overtook the inhabitants of Saeglek,
+whom we had seen at Kakkeviak, where they had got the start of us. The
+wind being favourable, we did not hail them, but kept on our course. We
+now saw with pleasure the Ungava country to the South before us, but had
+first to pass the low point of _Uivarsuk_, the bay of _Arvavik_, in
+which the people from Saeglek had their summer stations, and the
+mountain _Omanek_, of moderate height, and surrounded by many small
+islets, called by the Esquimaux _Erngavinget_, (bowels). We now
+discovered three skin-boats full of people standing towards us from the
+shore. They were inhabitants of Ungava, and welcomed our approach with
+loud shouts of joy and firing their pieces, which was answered by our
+party. They followed us to Omanek, a round island rising like a loaf
+among the rest, where they pitched their tents on shore.
+
+Some of them had formerly dwelt in different places north of Okkak, and
+were known to the Missionaries in former times, the rest were perfect
+strangers. They declared their intention of coming over to the North of
+Okkak, to remain some time in that country, for the sake of trade. It
+has been mentioned, that some of the Ungava people have come to Okkak,
+and carry on a trade between their countrymen and that place. They are a
+kind of middle men, bring fox and bear-skins, and exchange them for
+European goods. These they carry back, and sell at a very advanced price
+in the Ungava country. They spend two years on such a trading voyage.
+
+Brother Kohlmeister visited the people in their tents. They were about
+fifty in number, men, women, and children. He informed them, that
+nothing could induce the Missionaries to come into this country, but
+love to the poor heathen, and an ardent desire to make them acquainted
+with their Creator and Redeemer, that through Him they might attain to
+happiness in time and eternity. Some seemed to listen with great
+attention, but the greater part understood nothing of what was said.
+This, of course, did not surprise us, as most of them were quite
+ignorant heathen, who had never before seen an European. They, however,
+raised a shout of joy, when we informed them, that we would come and
+visit them in their own country. Many were not satisfied with viewing
+us on every side with marks of great astonishment, but came close up to
+us, and pawed us all over. At taking leave we presented them with a few
+trifles, which excited among them the greatest pleasure and
+thankfulness.
+
+We recommend these heathen to the mercy of God, and pray, that the day
+may soon dawn, when the light of the saving gospel of Jesus may shine
+into their hearts.
+
+3d. Several of them came on board, once more to see us, and, in their
+way, to express their regard and gratitude. They also got some useful
+articles from our people, in exchange for their goods. We now set sail,
+passed a point called _Oglarvik_, and the bay _Takpangayok_, and arrived
+at _Tuktusiovik_, (a place where reindeer are seen), where we cast
+anchor for the night. Already at Omanek we had discovered a great
+difference between the rise and fall of the tides there and about
+Killinek. In the latter place it rose to four fathoms, but here still
+higher. The country looked pleasant, with many berry-bearing plants and
+bushes. There was, likewise, plenty of drift-wood all along the coast;
+not the large Greenland timber, but small trees and roots, evidently
+carried out of the great rivers of the Ungava by the ice. We had, of
+course, fire-wood enough, without robbing the graves of their
+superstitious furniture. Our Esquimaux pitched their tent on shore, and
+we supped with them on a mess of seal's flesh and eider-ducks. The
+musquitoes were extremely troublesome during our repast, after which we
+retired to sleep on board the boat.
+
+4th. Wind fair. We passed numerous low rocks; a point, by name unknown
+to Uttakiyok; the bay _Ikpigitok_, two miles broad, and the cape called
+_Uibvaksoak_, the northern boundary of the great bay or gulf of
+_Abloriak_. This cape is surrounded by many bare and sunken rocks, which
+caused us to stand out pretty far to the westward. While we were off the
+point, we descried, at a very great distance to the N.W. a large island,
+called by the Esquimaux _Akpatok_. They say, that it encloses the whole
+bay or gulf towards the sea, and consists of high land: also, that it is
+connected with the western continent at low water by an isthmus. The
+north coast of this island appears to be the line laid down in maps and
+charts as the coast of America, to the south of Hudson's Straits. But
+the district of Ungava is separated from the island by a large inland
+bay, extending southward to the 58 deg. N.L. North of Akpatok, the
+Esquimaux speak of islands well peopled by their countrymen, who have
+never seen Europeans.
+
+Having safely doubled the point or cape of _Uibvaksoak_, we came to an
+anchor near a small island to the south, where we spent the night.
+
+5th. Calm weather, and proceeded gently. About 9 A.M. the wind turned
+against us, and we ran into a small bay, about five miles from our
+former anchoring-place. Here we found the _Andromeda tetragona_ growing
+in tolerable quantity, on the banks of a lagoon of fresh water. The face
+of the country was unpleasant, with many steep rocks. On a precipice
+behind our tent we perceived nests of birds of prey. The naked rocks had
+singular shapes, and presented to the imagination the ruins of a
+destroyed town. In the vallies we saw many small lagoons, but little
+grass, and the excrements of geese. It was about full moon, and the tide
+rising here five or six fathom, occasioned the most strange alterations
+in the prospect towards the sea, which, being smooth and clear of rocks
+at high water, exhibited, after its fall, an archipelago of rugged
+islands and black flats.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+  _Chain of black mountains. The Dragon's dwelling. Changes
+  occasioned by rise and fall of the tides, and dangers attending
+  them. Uttakiyok's superstitious customs. Singular effect of the
+  tide in the bay of Ittimnekoktok. Arrive at Kangertlualuksoak
+  bay and river. Its situation. Transactions there._
+
+
+August 6th.--We crossed the bay _Abloriak_, which is large and wide,
+with many small islands and rocks towards the sea, and high black
+mountains inland, called _Torngaets_. Uttakiyok, who was always very
+eager to make us attentive to every object and its name, shewed us here
+a wide and deep cavern, in shape like the gable end of an house,
+situated at the top of a precipice, in a black mountain, of a very
+horrid and dark appearance. This, he informed us, was the dwelling place
+of Torngak, the evil spirit. The scenery was, indeed, extremely wild and
+terrible, and the beforementioned prospect of the rocks and islands at
+low water gave to the whole country a most singularly gloomy character.
+Nor is this change, occasioned by the tide in the state of the sea,
+merely in appearance terrific, it is so in reality: for we never durst
+cast anchor in less than eight or nine fathoms water, lest at ebb-tide
+we should find ourselves aground, or even high and dry.
+
+The cavern just spoken of, connected with the chain of black mountains
+in which it is situated, we called the Dragon's dwelling, but had no
+time to examine the place, though it did not appear inaccessible.
+Whether Uttakiyok would have ventured to accompany us into it, is
+another question, for he was, with all his good sense, strongly attached
+to the superstitious notions and ceremonies of his countrymen. Thus, on
+passing dangerous places he always hung the claw of a raven to his
+breast, and carried the blown paunch of a seal upon a tent-pole fixed to
+one side of his boat. The latter is a common practice among the northern
+Esquimaux, and probably considered by them all as a very efficient
+charm.
+
+We passed _Sioralik_, and many small and flat rocky islands: the bay
+_Issorkitok_, (a grassy place), a nameless headland; and the larger bay
+_Nappartolik_, (a woody country). The wood is said to commence at the
+interior point of this bay, and to continue throughout the whole of the
+Ungava country, which, as we afterwards discovered, extends to a
+considerable distance to the southward. Then follows _Tunnuyalik_, a
+point, or perhaps an island, on which lies a huge white stone, twenty or
+thirty feet high, by which it is distinguished from other similar
+headlands. A chain of low, flat islands, runs out into the sea to a
+considerable distance, and appearing at a distance as continued land,
+they are mistaken for a cape. Farther on is the bay _Ittimnekoktok_,
+where it grew dark before we found a suitable anchorage. The wind was
+high, and some of our company went on shore in the skin-boat, in order
+to pitch their tent, and spend the night.
+
+7th. On rising, to our great surprise, we found ourselves left by the
+tide in a shallow pool of water, surrounded by rocky hills; nor could we
+at all discover the situation of our skin-boat, till after the water had
+begun to rise, and raised us above the banks of our watery dungeon,
+when, with great astonishment, not having been able to find it on the
+surface of the sea, and accidentally directing our eyes upwards, we saw
+it perched upon the top of a considerable eminence, and apparently on
+shore. We then landed, and ascending a rising ground, beheld with some
+terror, the wonderful changes occasioned by the tides. Our course was
+visible to the extent of two or three English miles, but the sea had
+left it, and we were obliged to remain in this dismal place, till about
+noon, before the water had risen sufficiently to carry us out. We now
+began to entertain fears, lest we might not always be able to find
+proper harbours, so as to avoid being left high and dry at low water;
+for having anchored in nine fathoms last night, we were left in one and
+a half this morning. Uttakiyok and Thukkekina were with us on shore. The
+eminence on which we stood was overgrown with vaccinia and other plants,
+and we saw among them marks of its being visited by hares. Near the
+summit was a spot, covered with red sand, which stained one's fingers,
+and among it were fragments of a substance resembling cast iron. We
+seemed here to stand on a peninsula connected by an isthmus with another
+island, or with the continent; but probably at high water it may be a
+separate island.
+
+As soon as the tide would permit, we set out, and proceeded towards a
+cape called _Kattaktok_, surrounded by small islands. Between the cape
+and our anchoring place, we passed, on the left, the following objects;
+_Keglo_, a broad deep bay; _Katarusialik_, a headland, probably of the
+continent; _Ukkasiksalik_, (meaning a place where soap stone is found),
+a peninsula; and to the right of the latter place, an island,
+_Kikkertarsoak_, which lies at the entrance of the _Great Bay_, or
+estuary of the great river _Kangertlualuksoak_. We sailed with a strong,
+but favourable wind, with some rain, between the peninsula and the
+island; and not trusting to the depth of the water at ebb-tide, sent two
+kayaks forward to sound. They soon brought us into a good harbour, where
+we cast anchor about half past five P.M.
+
+_Kangertlualuksoak_ river was the spot to which we had principally
+directed our views. It lies about 140 miles S.S.W. of Cape Chudleigh. By
+an observation at its mouth its latitude appeared to be 58 deg. 57'. But we
+had no means of finding the longitude. At its entrance the bay runs
+rather S.S.E. for about ten or twelve English miles, then turns due S.E.
+for six or eight more, and after that S.W. At the second turn towards
+the S.E. there is the greatest quantity of wood, chiefly Larch, but of
+moderate size. We particularly noticed a fine slope facing the south,
+which appeared the most pleasant part of the bay, to which a vessel
+might approach and anchor with convenience, there being from 24 to 30
+fathoms water. We also imagined that the entrance from the sea would be
+free from obstructions, as no islands are seen in that direction.
+Uttakiyok likewise declared, that there was no bar or sunken rocks near
+the mouth of the bay.
+
+We found no inhabitants on our arrival, but on the 13th, a whole company
+of people from Killinek joined us.
+
+Our transactions in the bay of _Kangertlualuksoak_, from the 7th, are
+here noticed more in detail.
+
+_August_ 8th. We landed, and went in search of our people, who had spent
+the night in tents on shore. Okkiksuk accompanied us to the top of a
+hill, overlooking the bay _Ittimnekoktok_, where we had anchored the day
+before. We saw it quite dry, and full of large fragments of rock.
+Turning towards the land, we discovered some wood at a distance. The
+weather being calm and warm, the musquitoes were excessively
+troublesome. The vallies here are overgrown with verdure, and the hills
+pretty well clothed with moss, and berry-bearing plants; but we could
+not continue our walk, on account of the musquitoes, which persecuted us
+unmercifully, and drove us back to our tents. All our men were out, two
+on that side on which we had landed, and the others having crossed the
+bay in their kayaks, were employed in hunting reindeer. Jonathan only
+remained at home. In the afternoon he accompanied us in the small boat,
+to a hill, situated to the South of our station, at about two miles
+distant, where we landed, and went up the country, but found nothing
+much worth notice. We observed, that round the headland near us, the
+water was very rough, with eddies and whirlpools, occasioned by the
+rising of the high tides. On returning to our little boat, we found it
+aground. We therefore gathered some drift-wood, of which there was
+plenty, and made a good fire, at which we sat down and regaled ourselves
+with some biscuit and beer. Having pushed the boat into the water, we
+set out, but owing to the violence of the current had hard work to get
+to the great boat, and did not arrive till dark. Jonas saluted us from
+on board, by firing off his piece in token of success, and we found that
+he had got two, and his companion three reindeer, and a small black
+bear. The carcases were left at the tents, where part was cooked, and a
+mess brought to us on board, which proved an agreeable repast after our
+fatigue. Jonas and his family spent the night on board, the rest of the
+Esquimaux in their tents on shore.
+
+9th. Jonas having found a good harbour on the other side of the bay, and
+the current being here very strong, we sailed across and anchored there.
+The strand was even, and full of smooth rocks, above high water mark.
+The bottom of the bay is mud, and a slimy substance, covering all the
+stones and pebbles, left by the tide, makes walking very troublesome.
+
+The land is not high, but pleasant, covered with moss, with many small
+ponds, and marks of being frequented by reindeer.
+
+10th. We went farther up the bay in the skin-boat, with Jonathan,
+Uttakiyok, Thukkekina, Paul, David, and Okkiksuk. At a short distance
+from the place where we had landed yesterday, we came to a fine green
+terrace, overgrown with low shrubs and bushes, which delighted us much.
+From hence, a woody valley, extending to the left, seemed to invite us
+to take that course into the country, but we would not waste our time by
+examining it. On sailing farther up the bay, and turning round the
+abovementioned terrace, we came to a small inlet, dry at low water, on
+the left shore. Its banks were pleasantly covered with low bushes,
+interspersed with higher trees, and the place seemed to us very suitable
+for a settlement. From hence we perceived, at a short distance, on the
+opposite coast, a cape or headland, over which the tops of trees made
+their appearance. We sailed towards it, and found behind it a tract
+covered with low wood, chiefly larch and pine: on landing we saw the
+tracks of rein-deer, which had just left the spot. Jonathan, in an
+instant, ran like a young man for his gun, and with it into the wood. We
+followed him for two or three miles, but saw nothing but the track of
+the deer. The country inland seems in general level, with some low
+hills, and many ponds; without wood, but overgrown with rein-deer moss.
+No success attended our huntsman, and in the evening we met again in the
+boat. Brother Kmoch had kept up with Jonathan, and saw, among the
+bushes, the same kind of large partridge, or American wild pheasant,
+which is found about Okkak, but seems only to live in woods. It was a
+hen, with a covey of young birds, one of which which he caught,
+examined, and let go again, nor would he take or shoot the hen, out of
+compassion to the young brood.
+
+Brother Kohlmeister had meanwhile gone farther up the bay, and thought
+he had discovered the entrance of the river, but no fresh water
+appearing, we must still have been a great way off its influx into the
+bay.
+
+We now lighted a fire, boiled coffee, and cooked a dish of reindeer
+venison. The weather was warm, and the night fine and clear, but frosty.
+Having brought our travelling-beds with us on shore, (see page 34), we
+crept into them, and spent the night at the fire-side, the Esquimaux
+lying down anywhere about us. In the morning, the whole country was
+covered with hoar-frost, and the straw we had lain upon was frozen fast
+to the ground.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+  _Further transactions in Kangertlualuksoak Bay. The Esquimaux
+  women frightened by reports of Indians. Ceremony of taking
+  possession of this new-explored country, as belonging to the
+  King of England, and of naming the river George river. Leave
+  the bay and proceed to Arvarvik. Whales caught by the Esquimaux
+  in the shallows. Storm at Kernertut._
+
+
+August 11th.--We rose by break of day, and after breakfast, sailed
+across the bay, and landed at the second small inlet, with an intention
+of penetrating into the country, but the returning warmth of the weather
+by day, and the myriads of musquitoes we had to contend with, rendered
+us unable to execute our purpose.
+
+The Missionaries and Jonathan ascended a hill, from which a great tract
+of country might be overlooked. It was full of wood, as far as the eye
+could reach. Near the inlet some places seemed boggy, or covered with
+grass. From hence a valley stretched into the country, with a small lake
+in it, about two or three miles distant. Berries were every where in
+abundance. The summits of the hills had no wood upon them, but much
+reindeer-moss.
+
+On our return, being about a mile from our landing-place, we saw our
+skin-boat in the middle of the bay, and fired a gun as a signal for it
+to come to us. The Esquimaux had five rein-deer in the boat, which
+Uttakiyok had perceived on the opposite bank. He had followed them in
+his kayak, driven them into the water, and killed them there. When hard
+pressed, reindeer soon take to the water, and swim so well, that a
+four-oared boat can scarcely come up with them, but an Esquimaux, in his
+kayak will overtake them. They therefore, if possible, drive them into
+the water, being then sure of their game.
+
+After dining on part of the venison, we returned to the great boat. On
+the passage, we thought we perceived at a considerable distance a black
+bear, and Uttakiyok, elated with his recent success, hoped to gain new
+laurels. He entered his kayak and proceeded as cautiously as possible
+along the shore, towards the spot, landed, climbed the hill, so as not
+to be observed, but when he had got just within gun-shot, perceived,
+that his bear was a black stone. This adventure furnished the company
+with merriment for the remainder of the voyage to the boat, which we
+reached about six P.M.
+
+When we got on board the boat, we found that all the women had taken
+refuge in it, thinking that they had seen Indians onshore. The men
+therefore immediately landed, to take care of the forsaken tents. This
+was no doubt a false alarm, for we never discovered any traces of them
+during our stay. To the south of Hopedale the Indians and Esquimaux
+sometimes meet, but as the Hopedale Esquimaux seek to cultivate their
+friendship, quarrels and bloodshed seldom occur. In Ungava, however,
+though they often exchange tokens of friendship, they are apt to give
+way to their national jealousies; and provocations being aggravated,
+their meetings now and then terminate in murder. The Esquimaux are much
+afraid of the Indians, who are a more nimble and active race.
+
+12th. Having finished reconnoitring the neighbourhood, and gathered all
+the information concerning it, which our means would permit, and
+likewise fixed upon the green slope or terrace above described, as the
+most suitable place for a settlement, on account of the abundance of
+wood in its neighbourhood, we made preparations to proceed. Uttakiyok,
+who had spent more than one winter in the Ungava country, assured us,
+that there was here an ample supply of provisions, both in summer and
+winter, which Jonathan also credited, from his own observation. The
+former likewise expressed himself convinced, that if we would form a
+settlement here, many Esquimaux would come to us from all parts. We
+ourselves were satisfied that Europeans might find the means of
+existence in this place, as it was accessible for ships, and had wood
+and water in plenty. As for Esquimaux, there appeared no want of those
+things upon which they live, the sea abounding with whitefish, seals,
+sea fowl, &c. and the land with reindeer, hares, bears, and other
+animals. The people from Killinek declared their intention of removing
+hither, if we would come and dwell among them, and are even now in the
+habit of visiting this place every summer. Our own company even
+expressed a wish to spend the winter here.
+
+This being the day before our departure, we erected, on two opposite
+hills, at the entrance of the bay, high marks of stones, and on the
+declivity of a hill to the right, a board, into which we had cut an
+inscription, thus--
+
+[Illustration: In front,
+Georgius III. Rex.
+Societas
+Unitatis Fratrum.]
+
+[Illustration: At the back.
+Benjamin Kohlmeister,
+George Kmoch,
+Aug. 7, 1811.
+The day of our arrival.]
+
+We raised and fixed this tablet with some solemnity, in presence of
+Uttakiyok and his family, as representatives of the people of Ungava,
+and of our own company, and hoisted the British flag alongside of it,
+while another was displayed at the same time in the boat. We explained
+the cause of this ceremony to all present, to the following effect--
+
+"That we, on this day, raised this sign, in the name of our king, George
+III. the great monarch of all these territories, in testimony of our
+having explored it, and made choice of it, in case we or our Brethren
+should think proper to settle here. To which we called upon all present
+to bear witness." We then proclaimed the name of the Kangertlualuksoak
+to be henceforth _George River_, upon which every man fired his piece
+three times, the vollies being answered from the boat.
+
+The texts of scripture appointed for this day were then read, and we
+remarked how encouraging they were, as relating to the purpose, for
+which we visited these unknown regions:
+
+_From the rising of the sun, even to the going down of the same, my name
+shall be great among the Gentiles, saith the Lord of Hosts!_ Mal. 11, 1.
+
+_At the name of Jesus every knee shall bow, of things in heaven, and
+things in earth, and things under the earth; and every tongue shall
+confess, that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God the Father!_
+Philippians, 2, 10, 11.
+
+After the ceremony was over, we distributed some pease, bread, and beer
+among the Esquimaux, which enabled them to make a splendid feast, and the
+day was spent in the most agreeable manner.
+
+13th. We set sail, about six A.M. with a gentle breeze, which however
+soon fell away entirely, and obliged us to take to our oars. Near the
+mouth of the bay, we met several kayaks, coming towards us. They were
+Esquimaux from Killinek, who expressed regret at not having sooner heard
+of our being here; some came on board, and traded with our people. We
+presented them with a little tobacco, for which they were very thankful.
+
+In order to get well out of the bay, we first steered North, and then
+passed to the S.W. between a peninsula _Nauyat_, lying to the left of
+the entrance, and seven small islands and rocks on the right, towards
+the island of _Arvarvik_, about six or seven miles distant, where we
+were obliged to cast anchor in an exposed situation, the wind having
+become contrary. There was a strong swell during the night, which
+violently agitated our boat.
+
+_Arvarvik_ is about five miles in circumference. It is covered with the
+bones of whales, which the Esquimaux catch here in their kayaks. The
+coast is surrounded by a great number of small low islands, with deep
+pools between them. Into these the whales stray at high water, and at
+the ebbing of the tide, are prevented finding their way back again. The
+Esquimaux then pursue and kill them with harpoons. In the island are
+ponds of fresh water, and some low hills, overgrown with moss. A great
+number of sea-fowl, and also reindeer, are found upon it.
+
+On the shore we found great quantities of a red jasper, or iron-stone,
+the same which occurs throughout the coast, from _Killinek_ to South
+river, not as a stratum, but in lumps, and generally below high water
+mark.
+
+The Esquimaux who landed on the continent reported, that about two miles
+inland, there was much low wood.
+
+14th. We left our unpleasant anchorage, and returned to a place where
+the skin-boat had lain during the night, as it was sheltered from the
+South wind, which had risen considerably.
+
+15th. Our people went out to hunt reindeer, and returned in the evening
+with two. The wind shifted to the west, and blew with violence. We spent
+again an uneasy night.
+
+16th. Brother Kmoch went on shore and returned with a parcel of stones
+for examination. We now began to feel some anxiety on account of the
+great loss of time we were suffering here by contrary winds.
+
+17th. About eight o'clock we set sail, the wind having come round to the
+S.E. with a cloudy sky. We passed several nameless islands, at the
+distance of about a mile from the shore. In the afternoon, it began to
+rain hard, and after having sailed about twelve miles, we cast anchor
+near a long point of land, called _Kernertut_, by which we were
+sheltered from the wind, which had again turned to the South-west. The
+sky however was clear, and the beginning of the night pleasant, with
+beautiful appearances of the Aurora Borealis. Most of our people, and
+with them Uttakiyok, had gone in the skin-boat higher up the bay, but it
+was too shallow to admit of our following them. Only Jonas and his
+children, and the two boys Okkiksuk and Mammak, were left with us on
+board.
+
+During the night the wind veered round to the N.E. and blew a gale,
+which increased in violence till day-break.
+
+18th. The sea now rose to a tremendous height, such as we had never
+before experienced, and by the change of wind, we were exposed to the
+whole of its fury. The rain fell in torrents. We lay at three anchors,
+and the boat was tossed about terribly, the sea frequently breaking
+quite over her, insomuch that we expected every moment to be swallowed
+up in the abyss. With much difficulty we succeeded in lowering our
+after-mast. Jonathan and the rest of our company on shore, were obliged
+to be passive spectators of the dreadful scene, waiting the event in
+silent anguish. They quitted their tents, and came forward to some
+eminences near the beach, where, by lifting up their hands, and other
+gestures, they expressed terror, bordering on despair. Frequently the
+boat was hid from their view by the waves, which ran mountains high.
+They expected every moment that we should break loose from our anchors,
+and the boat be driven on the rocks. The length of our cables was here
+of the greatest advantage to us. About noon, the rope by which the small
+boat was fastened, broke. She was immediately carried up the bay, and
+thrown, by the violence of the surf, on the top of a rock, where she
+stuck fast, keel upwards. It was impossible to render us any assistance,
+till the tide turned, when the raging of the sea, and the wind, began to
+abate. As soon as it was practicable, Jonathan and the other men came to
+us in the skin-boat. He seemed quite overcome with joy, and, not able to
+utter a word, held out his hand, and shed tears of gratitude that he met
+us again alive, for he had given us up for lost.
+
+We now endeavoured to bring the great boat closer to the shore, landed,
+pitched our tent, and gave thanks to God for the merciful deliverance we
+had just experienced. Indeed all our people most fervently joined in
+praise to Him for the preservation of our lives. A warm dinner was soon
+prepared, by which we were much refreshed.
+
+As soon as the tide had ebbed sufficiently for it, our people went to
+the rock, on which the small boat lay, and got her into the water. To
+our great surprize we found, that she had received no material injury.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+  _Doubts expressed by Jonathan and the other Esquimaux on the
+  expediency of continuing the voyage. Consultations. Resolve to
+  proceed. Thunder-storm at Pitsiolak. Account of Indians.
+  Esquimaux cookery and hunting feasts. Arrival in the river
+  Koksoak._
+
+
+Jonathan and Jonas now became more and more anxious about our situation.
+They represented to us, that, if we attempted to proceed farther, we
+might probably be compelled to remain here the whole winter, as the
+stormy season was fast approaching. They added, that to _them_, it would
+be of little consequence, but that they were concerned on _our_ account.
+
+Though we had not said any thing as yet that might tend to shake the
+confidence of our party, yet we felt no small degree of perplexity
+concerning present appearances. During the six days since we left
+George's River, we had made little more than fourteen or fifteen miles,
+and were at least, as far as we could judge, seventy or eighty from the
+river _Koksoak_, which we had fixed upon as the final object of the
+voyage, being the outermost western boundary of the Ungava country.
+Insurmountable difficulties seemed now to present themselves, owing
+partly to contrary winds and cold weather, and partly to loss of time,
+for we had been already two months on the voyage, and had not yet
+obtained our aim: so that our return might be unseasonably late, if we
+proceeded. We could not possibly make up our minds to spend the winter
+here, as we had not a sufficient supply of provisions, and knew what
+distress it would occasion to our Brethren at Okkak.
+
+We felt quite at a loss what to do in this dilemma, and our path seemed
+enveloped in obscurity. We remembered, that "_to the upright there
+ariseth a light in the darkness_," (Ps. 112, 4): that is, to them who
+fear and trust in the Lord, and sincerely desire to know and do His
+will, He will reveal it. In His name we had entered upon this voyage,
+the only ultimate object of which was, the conversion of a benighted,
+neglected nation, in one of the remotest corners of the earth. We were,
+therefore, sure that He would not forsake us, nor leave us in
+uncertainty as to His will concerning us, but that He, "_whose eyes run
+to and fro throughout the whole earth, to shew Himself strong in the
+behalf of them whose heart is perfect towards Him_," (2 Chron. 16, 9.)
+was, even in this desolate region, present with us, and would hear and
+answer our prayers. Many comfortable texts of scripture occurred to our
+minds on this occasion, filling us with an extraordinary degree of faith
+and confidence in Him, particularly such as, "_He will be very gracious
+unto thee at the voice of thy cry; when He shall hear it, He will answer
+thee_," Isa. 30, 19. Also, Dan. 10, 19; Jer. 16, 21; Isa. 43, 2, &c. The
+mercies, also, which we had already experienced, excited within us a
+sense of the deepest gratitude and most firm trust; and we therefore
+told our people, that we indeed participated in their concern, would
+take the subject into serious consideration, and acquaint them with our
+determination on the morrow.
+
+19th. In the morning we met in our tent, where we were safe from the
+intrusion of the Esquimaux, to confer together upon this most important
+subject. We weighed all the circumstances connected with it, maturely
+and impartially, as in the presence of God, and, not being able to come
+to any decision, where reasons for and against the question seemed to
+hold such an even balance, we determined to commit our case to Him, who
+has promised, that "_if two of His people shall agree on earth, as
+touching any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them_,"
+(Matth. 18, 19.) and, kneeling down, entreated Him to hear our prayers
+and supplications in this our distressed and embarrassing situation, and
+to make known to us His will concerning our future proceedings, whether
+we should persevere in fulfilling the whole aim of our voyage, or,
+prevented by circumstances, give up a part, and return home from this
+place.
+
+The peace of God which filled our hearts on this memorable occasion, and
+the strong conviction wrought in us both, that we should persevere, in
+His name, to fulfil the whole of our commission, relying without fear on
+His help and preservation, no words can describe; but those who believe
+in the fulfilment of the gracious promises of Jesus, given to His poor
+followers and disciples, will understand us, when we declare, that we
+were assured, that it was the will of God our Saviour, that we should
+not now return and leave our work unfinished, but proceed to the end of
+our proposed voyage. Each of us communicated to his brother the
+conviction of his heart, all fears and doubts vanished, and we were
+filled anew with courage and willingness to act in obedience to it, in
+the strength of the Lord. O that all men knew the comfort and happiness
+of a mind devoted unto, and firmly trusting in God in all things!
+
+When we made known our determination to Jonathan and his son Jonas, and
+told them, that we had maturely considered the subject committed by them
+to us, and that, in answer to our prayers, the Lord had convinced us,
+that, not having obtained the aim of our voyage, we should proceed,
+Jonas, at first, seemed not quite satisfied, but our excellent captain,
+Jonathan, without hesitation replied: "Yes, that is also my conviction!
+We will go whither Jesus directs us. He will bring us safe to our
+journey's end, and safe home again." We were, indeed, glad and thankful
+that the Lord had inclined the heart of this man, who but yesterday
+seemed to be quite dispirited, to take this resolution, for much
+depended upon him, and the rest followed him without difficulty. Indeed
+they all submitted to our determination with a willing mind, and their
+expressions of resignation affected us much.
+
+During the day, the men had been out a-hunting, when Uttakiyok killed
+three reindeer, which occasioned great rejoicing, and helped to make our
+people forget the frightful scenes of yesterday. The country is full of
+black looking rocks, between which reindeer-moss and berries grow in
+plenty. The shore exhibited still many marks of the violence of the
+storm.
+
+20th. We proceeded with a favourable wind at N.E. Our course lay S.W.
+across a broad bay, then, after doubling a point, across another bay of
+about the same breadth, to an island _Allukpaluk_, which we passed on
+the right, and on the left, another island, _Nipkotok_. At a
+considerable distance a-head lay the islands _Pitsiolak_, opposite a
+headland of the continent called _Tuktutok_.
+
+The sky had been from the morning cloudy, the wind became unfavourable
+and violent, and about noon heavy rain came on. Not being well able to
+proceed, on account of the violence of the wind, we cast anchor on the
+west side of _Pitsiolak_, about 2 P.M. but perceiving a thunderstorm
+rising from the western horizon, with very black clouds, threatening to
+drive us on shore if we remained at this anchorage, we weighed as
+quickly as possible, and endeavoured to get to the other side of the
+island.
+
+Meanwhile a most tremendous storm of thunder, lightning, and rain
+overtook us. The claps of thunder followed the flashes without interval,
+and the lightning seemed to strike into the water close to our boat,
+while the wind carried the spray into the air like smoke. Providentially
+we had doubled the northern point before the worst came on, and got to
+an anchor under shelter of the land. The storm passed by swiftly, it
+grew calm, the sun broke out, and the weather became uncommonly fine
+with us, though at a distance we saw the black clouds, and heard the
+hollow murmuring of the thunder for a long time.
+
+We now expected to have a comfortable night's rest, but it grew
+intensely cold, and again began to blow violently from the west. The
+strong current and heavy swell brought us into some danger, and the poor
+people, who were obliged to remain on deck all night, suffered much from
+cold and wet. When the tide was full, about midnight, the island we had
+seen to the west nearly vanished, the greater part being covered with
+water.
+
+21st. In the morning we again saw the skin-boat lying upon a pretty high
+rock, and a tent pitched close to it. The weather was calm, but the wind
+contrary. Our Esquimaux made good use of this respite to refresh
+themselves after the fatigues of the night with a hearty meal and a
+sound nap.
+
+In the afternoon we landed. The island Pitsiolak, which forms two at
+high water, is low and flat, overgrown with Empetrum and Rubus
+Chamoemorus, (_Akpik_-berries). Quantities of driftwood float about the
+shores. The jasper occurred here again. This island may be about four or
+five miles long, and, at low water, is connected with other islands to
+the north. By the help of our glasses we could perceive woods on the
+continent, and the Esquimaux thought they discovered the smoke of Indian
+fires. They are much afraid of meeting these people. Bloody encounters
+occasionally occur between them. The Indians come from the interior, and
+from Hudson's Bay, and are frequently seen near the two principal
+rivers, George river and South river, towards which we were going; but
+we met with none. Brother Kohlmeister rather wished for it, as some of
+them are said to understand English, and he was desirous of endeavouring
+to bring them to a more peaceable disposition towards the Esquimaux, by
+friendly conversation.
+
+22d. We found the skin-boat a great hindrance to us. Without being
+obliged to take that in tow, we might have kept at a greater distance
+from the shore, which would have enabled us to get on more rapidly, and
+with greater safety. On shore we found a great quantity of cubical
+pyrites in a grey matrix. The Esquimaux are attentive to this mineral,
+and have before now brought it to Okkak.
+
+23d. We proceeded at 6 A.M. and steered for the island of _Saeglorsoak_.
+The islands called _Nocharutsit_ lay on our left. They are a group of
+numerous small islands, many of which are overflowed at high water,
+extending W. and E. towards the entrance of South river. Between these
+islands and Akpatok, the sea is said to be clear of rocks, and the water
+of sufficient depth for any ship entering from Hudson's Straits, and
+bound to the Koksoak, or South river; but no ship durst, in our opinion,
+venture to approach the coast of Ungava within twenty or thirty miles.
+
+In the afternoon, the tide turning against us, and the wind
+unfavourable, we were obliged to come to an anchor among the islands. We
+had left the skin-boat behind, with Thukkekina, Uttakiyok's brother
+Annoray, and one of his wives, to whom he had given his baggage in
+charge. The Esquimaux wives are very punctilious, the first always
+maintains the highest dignity, regulates the housekeeping, distributes
+the provisions, and directs everything, as mistress of the family.
+
+Jonas went out in his kayak, and shot a seal. We saw many, and fired at
+them, but got none. Whitefish were likewise seen at a distance.
+Uttakiyok and David were out in their kayaks, and joined us in the
+evening loaded with geese.
+
+On the turn of the tide we proceeded, and at ten P.M. cast anchor among
+the Nocharutsits, under a pretty high island, about three or four miles
+in circumference. All our people remained on board during the night,
+which was calm and pleasant.
+
+24th. David roused us about five o'clock, by firing at a seal, which he
+killed. The women went on shore to cook it with some geese. When they
+returned, we all breakfasted on the contents of their pot.
+
+The Esquimaux want no books of cookery to manage their kitchen affairs.
+The meat is boiled with the blood in it, and the addition of some water.
+When it is sufficiently done, that is, according the Ungava custom, when
+half warm, the women take it out of the pot, and serve it up on a piece
+of stone, if on shore, and on a piece of board, if at sea. Then the
+person, who has caught the seal or game, proclaims with great
+vociferation, that the _men_ may come and sit down to eat. Such exertion
+of voice, however, seems hardly necessary, as the Esquimaux are very
+acute at hearing, when they are invited to dinner. When the men have
+done, the women sit down, having taken good care, beforehand, that their
+share is secured. The Esquimaux customs never permit men and women to
+sit down together at a meal.
+
+It sometimes happens among the heathen Esquimaux, that several having
+had good success, one huntsman's feast is hardly over, before another
+proclaims the invitation to his banquet. This is never suffered to pass
+unnoticed, while the power of cramming down another morsel remains. Thus
+they will continue eating, till they are scarcely able to breathe, and
+then lie down to sleep off the effects of their gluttony. Indeed their
+excessive voraciousness on such occasions produces, especially after
+long fasting, all the symptoms of drunkenness. They forget, under its
+sensual influence, all moderation, and abandon themselves to the most
+disgusting abominations.
+
+In the afternoon we steered W. by N. (wind N.E.), for the cape of
+_Kernerauyak_, at the east side of the entrance of the river _Koksoak_,
+(Sand river). Before we arrived at the cape, we left some islands to the
+South, the largest of which is again called _Kikkertarsoak.
+Saeglorsoak_, is a large flat island, about eight or ten miles long, and
+its neighbourhood very dangerous, on account of many sunken rocks. The
+continent hereabouts is well wooded, and Indians are said to be
+frequently seen in the interior. The mouth of the Koksoak is seven or
+eight English miles broad: its shores steep, but the rocks in general
+low, and covered with moss. The Esquimaux say, that in the middle there
+is water enough for any large ship, though the tides prevent any near
+approach to the land. At sunset we came to an anchor at the mouth of the
+river.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+  _Sail up the river Koksoak. Transactions in that region.
+  Dangerous eddy. Meet Esquimaux. Address to them. Their joy and
+  eagerness to have Missionaries, resident among them. Find a
+  suitable situation for a settlement. Description of the
+  country._
+
+
+August 25th.--This was the joyful day on which at last we saw our hopes
+realized, and the principal aim of our journey obtained. The sun rose
+beautifully, and announced a delightful day. We were obliged to wait
+till seven A.M. for the turn of the tide, before we could proceed up the
+river. The estuary of the _Koksoak_ lies, according to an observation
+taken, in 58 deg. 36' N. latitude, nearly the same as Okkak. To the west
+the country is called by the Esquimaux _Assokak_, the coast turning again
+W.N.W. This river, therefore, seems to be at the most southern point of
+the coast, George's river entering the sea at 58 deg. 52', consequently
+more North.
+
+The Koksoak appeared to us to be about as broad as the Thames at
+Gravesend, or the Elbe near Hamburg, and the whole river, with its
+various windings, much resembles the Thames for twenty-four miles
+upwards. Its depth is sufficient for a ship thus far. Its general
+direction is from the South. We reckoned it to be about 600 or 700 miles
+from Okkak, and Killinek or Cape Chudleigh half way.
+
+Having proceeded five or six miles up the river, we came to a small
+island, which we left on our right.
+
+We saw several sacks of blubber, a sledge, and some other, articles
+lying on the beach, and Jonathan and Brother Kmoch went in the small
+boat to discover the proprietors, but found nobody there, to guard the
+goods.
+
+A little farther on is a point of land running out into nearly the
+middle of the stream. The current sets very rapidly round it, so as to
+form a dangerous eddy. Our boat was seized, and twice turned quite
+round; the small boat was whirled about several times, as she pushed
+through it. The women on board our boat, on seeing this, set up a loud
+scream; but Jonathan only laughed at their fears, and we afterwards saw
+kayaks passing the eddy in perfect safety.
+
+Having doubled the point, we perceived several kayaks approaching. The
+people in them shouted aloud for joy, exclaiming, _Innuit, Innuit_! Men,
+Men! Some guns were also fired in the boat, which were soon answered by
+some fowling-pieces from the shore.
+
+We now saw three tents pitched on the bank, and hoisted our colours,
+when we were incessantly hailed by the inhabitants. There was a general
+cry of _Kuve, Kuve, Kablunaet, Kablunaet!_ Europeans, Europeans! from
+the men in the kayaks, who, by all manner of gesticulations, expressed
+their pleasure, brandishing their pautiks, (oars), and shouting
+continually as they rowed alongside the boat. The women on shore
+answered with loud acclamations.
+
+About one P.M. we cast anchor close to their habitations. Fourteen
+families were here, among whom were some from a distant district, called
+_Eivektok_. These had pitched their tents farther up the river.
+_Arnauyak_ was with them, a man, with whom Brother Kohlmeister had
+become acquainted some years ago, exceedingly regretted, that he had but
+a few days ago left the place, to hunt reindeer on George's river. The
+children expressed their joy by running to and fro on the strand, like
+wild creatures.
+
+At first, the people in the tents appeared rather shy, but after
+accepting of some trifling presents, they became quite communicative,
+and gave us some of their toys in exchange; then walking round us,
+surveyed us narrowly, as if we were a new species of animals. Most of
+them had never before seen an European. Uttakiyok's brother had joined
+them, and already informed them of our arrival, without which they would
+probably have been yet more alarmed at seeing strangers, and hearing the
+report of fire-arms.
+
+They now invited all our people to dine with them, and having heard that
+Brother Kohlmeister would like to taste the flesh of a whitefish, a
+kettle was immediately placed on the fire, and a large piece put in to
+boil. Brother Kmoch meanwhile cooked a savoury soup of birds, and
+reindeer-flesh, more fit for an European stomach. While dinner was
+preparing, Brother Kohlmeister took a walk up the bank of the river, and
+across some hills. As the families belonging to _Eivektok_ had their
+summer dwelling in that neighbourhood, the Esquimaux, on perceiving that
+he had walked in that direction, and fearing that the Eivektok people,
+seeing him alone, might mistake him for an Indian, and shoot at him,
+dispatched two men to bring him back. They missed him, and he returned
+before them. He found our people very pleasantly conversing with the
+heathen concerning the aim of our journey, and the way of salvation.
+Even Uttakiyok was thus engaged, explaining, as well as he could, the
+cause of our living in Labrador: he exclaimed, "let us, my friends, all
+be converted to Jesus." He was heard with peculiar attention, being
+considered as a captain among them. In the evening we sang hymns in
+Jonathan's tent. The people all came and listened with much seriousness.
+
+26th. To-day the Eivektok families came in a skin-boat down the river, to
+see us. They were full of astonishment, but soon took courage, and
+handled us, to discover whether we were made of the same materials with
+themselves. An old man, _Netsiak_, addressed Brother Kohlmeister: "Are
+you Benjamin? I have never seen you with my eyes, but at Eivektok have
+heard your name often mentioned." He seemed to be a sensible man, and a
+captain among his tribe.
+
+We could not help remarking the difference between these Esquimaux and
+their countrymen living on the same coasts with our settlements. The
+former are very poor, and miserably equipped, whereas the latter, by
+their intercourse with us and other Europeans, have acquired many
+conveniences, and are, by barter, well provided with what they want.
+
+27th. We proceeded farther up the river, accompanied by most of the men,
+and some women, in their skin-boat, and arrived at a bay, which, by the
+winding of the stream, appears like a lake, surrounded on all sides with
+gently rising grounds, well planted with wood of moderate size, chiefly
+larch. Behind the wood are some low hills. We named this place _Unity's
+Bay_. There is here a very good place for a Missionary settlement. A
+fine slope extends for about half an English mile, bounded on each
+extremity by a hill, on each of which we erected high signals. The land
+is even and dry. Juniper, currants, and other berries, grow here in
+abundance, and rivulets run out of the wood at a distance of a few
+hundred paces from each other. The slope faces the S.S.E. and we named
+it _Pilgerruh_, (Pilgrim's rest). Brother Kohlmeister made drawings of
+the situation.
+
+From our first arrival we had improved every opportunity of making the
+Esquimaux acquainted with the chief aim of our visit to this country,
+and addressed them both singly and in companies. Nor were Jonathan and
+Jonas remiss in conversing with them about the concerns of their
+immortal souls, declaring to them the love of God our Saviour towards
+them. We once met with Sybilla, Jonathan's wife, seated with a company
+of women, under the shadow of a skin-boat, set on edge, exhorting them,
+with great simplicity and fervour, to hear and believe the gospel.
+
+28th. Brother Kmoch landed with Jonathan, and spent some hours in
+examining the banks of the river. On ascending the first eminence, the
+view of the interior is in general flat, with a few low hills, and ponds
+in some places, full of wild geese. The timber in the woods hereabouts
+is not large: we found none fit for masts. The largest trees were not
+more than eight inches in diameter, and fifteen or twenty feet high.
+They are chiefly larch and pines. In some places we found them burnt or
+withered, and were informed by the Esquimaux, that it was the effect of
+the Indian's fires. Indeed we saw several places where the Indians had
+put up huts, and left sufficient vestiges of their abode. Berries grow
+everywhere, and between the river and the wood, the plain is chiefly
+covered with willows, high grass growing between them, but these and the
+various shrubs are so low, that a man can easily look over them. In all
+directions we saw the tracks of reindeer, and there is every appearance
+of its being a place much frequented by these animals. Deeper in the
+wood, we found great quantities of sorrel and other European plants. The
+woods appeared very thick, and extended as far as the eye could reach,
+often coming down to the edge of the river. The Esquimaux say, that
+higher up, large timber is found. On our return to the skin-boat we
+found ourselves pretty much fatigued, and ready to partake of a supper,
+cooked by the Esquimaux, consisting of ship's biscuit, dried fish, and
+raw whitefish blubber. The Esquimaux prevailed upon Brother Kmoch to
+taste the latter, and he reported, that having once overcome his
+aversion to it, its taste was sweet, like the kernel of a nut, but
+heated his stomach like a hot posset.
+
+29th. Changeable and rainy weather prevented us from going out much.
+
+30th. Our people, and with them the strange Esquimaux, met for public
+worship. Brother Kohlmeister once more explained to them our intention
+in coming thus far to visit them. He addressed them to the following
+effect: "That already, many years ago, many excellent people in the
+country beyond the great ocean, had thought of them with much love, and
+felt desirous that the inhabitants of the Ungava country also might hear
+the comfortable word of God, and be instructed in it: for they had heard
+that the Esquimaux here were heathen, who, through ignorance, served the
+Torngak, or evil spirit, and were led by him into the commission of all
+manner of sin, that they might hereafter be lost, and go to the place of
+eternal darkness and misery. Out of love, therefore," continued the
+missionary, "they have sent us to you, and out of love we have come to
+you, to tell you how you may be saved, and become happy, peaceful
+children of God, being delivered from the fear of death, which is now
+upon you all, and have the prospect of everlasting joy and peace
+hereafter, even by receiving the gospel, and turning to Jesus, who is
+the only Creator and Saviour of all men. He died for _your_ sins, for
+_our_ sins, and for the sins of all mankind, as our surety, suffering
+the punishment we deserved, that _you_, by receiving Him, and believing
+on Him, might be saved, and not go to the place of eternal darkness and
+pain, but to the place of bliss and eternal rest. You cannot yet
+understand these comfortable words of the gospel, but if it is your
+sincere wish to know the truth of them, Jesus will open your ears and
+hearts, to hear and understand them. These my companions were as
+ignorant as you, but they now thank God, that they know Jesus as their
+Saviour, and are assured that through His death they shall inherit
+everlasting life."
+
+During this address all were silent and very attentive. Some exclaimed:
+"O we desire to hear more about it!" Old Netsiak, from Eivektok, said:
+"I am indeed old, but if you come to live here, I will certainly remove
+hither also; and live with you and be converted."
+
+When we put the question to them, whether they were willing, that we
+should come and dwell with them, and instruct them, they all answered
+with a loud and cheerful voice. "_Kaititse tok, Kaititse tok!_ O do come
+soon, and live with us, we will all gladly be converted, and live with
+you." Jonathan and Jonas also bore ample testimony to the truth of what
+we had spoken, and their words seemed to make a deep impression on all
+their countrymen. Uttakiyok was above others eager to express his wish
+that we might soon make a settlement in the Ungava country. Five of the
+fourteen families who mean to reside here next winter, are from
+Eivektok.
+
+Farther inland, the river Koksoak widens considerably, but consequently
+grows more shallow. The country is pleasant, with wood, grassy plains,
+and gentle hills.
+
+31st. Having finished all our observations here, we dropped down the
+stream to the place, where we had discovered the first tents.
+
+In descending, as well as ascending the river, we saw a great number of
+whitefish, and many seals. Reindeer are numerous on both shores, both in
+summer and winter. All the Esquimaux declared, that this was the best
+provision-place in the whole country, and they consequently flock to it
+from all parts every summer, frequently protracting their stay during
+the winter. The greater number of those we found here, purposed spending
+next winter in this neighbourhood. The Esquimaux are prevented from
+making this place their constant residence by their fear of the
+land-Indians, which cause them to quit it sooner than they otherwise
+would wish to do.
+
+We spared no pains to collect all the information we possibly could
+obtain, on every subject relating to this situation, both as to itself,
+and in reference to the possibility of approaching it with a ship, as
+likewise respecting the inhabitants of the Ungava country in general. It
+appeared evident, that the place above described is the most eligible
+for forming a missionary-settlement.
+
+We found it unnecessary to proceed to the Westward, by the account given
+us by our worthy conductor Uttakiyok, whose information hitherto we had
+always found correct, and confidently to be relied on.
+
+He reported: 1. That farther West no wood is to be found on the coast.
+
+2. That besides the two rivers Kangertlualuksoak and Koksoak, they knew
+of no place where a ship might with safety approach the land.
+
+3. That at this time we should probably find no inhabitants, as they had
+all gone into the interior to hunt reindeer.
+
+We therefore now considered the business committed to us to be
+accomplished, and determined to return to Okkak, thankful to God our
+Saviour for the many proofs of His favour, and protection, experienced
+in the execution of our commission.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+_Return to Okkak._
+
+
+September 1st.--At ten A.M. we fell down the river with the ebb-tide,
+and about noon anchored near its mouth. The Esquimaux showed great
+attachment to us, and could hardly resolve to take a final leave. They
+called after us, "Come soon again, we shall always be wishing for you."
+Several of them, and among them our friend Uttakiyok, followed us in
+their kayaks to the mouth of the river.
+
+We erected here, on the promontory Kernerauyak, a board with an
+inscription similar to that put up at George river, but with the day of
+our departure inserted, viz. Sept. 1st, instead of the day of our
+arrival, Aug. 7th. The same solemnities took place as on the former
+occasion. Our faithful pilot Uttakiyok, who had rendered us such
+important and essential services, now took leave of us, as he intends to
+spend the winter in this neighbourhood. He repeated his assurance, that
+if we settled here, he would be the first to join us, and to turn with
+his whole heart to God. Not willing to be any longer incumbered with the
+skin-boat, we added it to other useful articles given to Uttakiyok, as a
+reward for his faithful attention to us. He was very highly gratified,
+and thankful for this species of remuneration.
+
+2d. Left the Koksoak, called by us, _South river_, and steered to the N.
+of _Kernerauyak_ and _Kikkertorsoak_. In the evening we cast anchor in
+an open road, among the _Nachorutsit_ islands, with fine weather.
+
+3d. Set sail at sun-rise, wind and tide in our favour, and proceeded
+rapidly. About noon, however, a fog came on, which obliged us to come to
+an anchor at _Pitsiolak_. When it cleared up, we proceeded, steering
+between _Allukpalak_ and _Nipkotok_, and cast anchor in the open sea,
+near _Kernertut_, where, on our first arrival, we encountered such a
+tremendous storm. The night proved quite calm and fair.
+
+4th. A gentle breeze brought us pleasantly as far as the island
+_Nauyet_, at the mouth of the _Kangertlualuksoak_, where we cast anchor,
+having performed the same voyage in three days, which took us twelve on
+our former passage. The distance may be about 100 English miles.
+
+5th. Landed, and erected a species of landmark, on the highest point of
+_Nauyet_, as a ship entering the river must keep near this island, the
+shore on the other side being very foul. Contrary winds now obliged us
+to enter the bay, and cast anchor in the same place where we had lain on
+the 9th of August.
+
+6th. Storm and rain prevented our proceeding. The Esquimaux went on
+shore, and pitched their tent. Of late they generally spent the night on
+board the boat.
+
+7th. Wind at W. but a heavy swell from the sea prevented our sailing.
+Our men went out to hunt, and Paul returned in the evening with a deer.
+
+8th. Snow had fallen during the night, and the whole country had the
+appearance of the middle of winter. We dropped down with the ebb-tide,
+but were obliged to anchor again near the entrance of the bay. When the
+tide turned we proceeded, and, leaving _Kikkertorsoak_ to the right,
+made for cape _Kattaktok_, where we spent the night at anchor among some
+low islands. The night was clear, and a comet appeared N. by W.
+
+9th. Wind favourable and strong. We set sail at sun-rise, and steered
+for _Uibvaksoak_, and so rapidly did our boat make way through the
+waves, that we arrived there already at four in the afternoon, passing
+swiftly by the Dragon's dwelling, (_Torngets_). A thunder-storm was
+approaching. The wind, which felt quite warm, was in our rear, and
+violent gusts assailed us now and then, which made us shorten sail; yet
+the boat seemed to fly from island to island. We were unable to find a
+safe anchorage till 8 P.M. when it was already dark. We had sailed, in
+fourteen hours, about 100 English miles, and were all completely wet
+with the spray of the sea and frequent showers. Our Esquimaux were
+obliged, in this condition, to lie down either on deck or on shore.
+
+10th. Reached _Omanek_, about 40 or 50 miles sail.
+
+11th. Wind contrary, with much rain. We were confined to our narrow
+cabin, and shut in all day, with a lamp burning.
+
+12th. Clear weather: set sail at noon. In the afternoon we were saluted
+by some shots from _Killinek_ Esquimaux, who were halting not far from
+the Ikkerasak, or straits, at the entrance of which we cast anchor about
+7 P.M.
+
+13th. Though we wished to have some conversation with the _Killinek_
+people, as they cannot often come to Okkak, yet we thought it adviseable
+to lose no time, and, with the ebb-tide, passed through the _Ikkerasak_
+in perfect safety. When, about 1 P.M. the tide turned, we ran into a
+cove on the south side, and at 5 P.M. anchored in the lagoon above
+described, (See page 43), the entrance to which will only admit a boat.
+
+14th. Reached _Oppernavik_, where we first met Uttakiyok.
+
+15th. Set sail with a gentle breeze, which permitted us to have our
+Sunday's service on deck. The wind, however, soon turning against us, we
+were compelled to return to our former anchorage.
+
+16th and 17th. We were unpleasantly detained by wind and rain, and on
+the latter day much snow fell.
+
+18th. Reached _Kikkertarsoak_ about 1 P.M. Our men went out in their
+kayaks, and returned in the evening with three seals. The night was
+fair, with beautiful appearances of the Aurora Borealis.
+
+19th. The morning was calm: some indications of approaching storm made
+us anxious to proceed. We set out early; but a fog coming on, we came
+again to an anchor off a barren island. After staying here two hours,
+hoping for a favourable change, Jonathan proposed to proceed, and
+steered S.W. not knowing rightly where we were. On this occasion, we
+could not help admiring the composure of the Esquimaux. But having last
+night made a hearty meal of the provisions they had acquired, they
+seemed to take things easy, and thought it would all be right in the
+end. So it turned out; for by and by we saw the continent, and kept
+along shore, till we got to the promontory _Kakkeviak_, where, on our
+passage, we had nearly suffered shipwreck. (See page 38). Here we cast
+anchor in a wide shallow bay, and spent a quiet night.
+
+20th. The fog had dispersed, and the wind was favourable, though
+shifting from W. to N.W.N. and N.E. At 7 P.M. we reached _Kumaktorvik_
+and found good anchorage close to the Esquimaux winter-houses; but we
+were disappointed by finding them empty, the people being probably out
+on the reindeer-hunt. There were four houses standing, apparently not
+old, and the traces of eight others, situated on a low point of land,
+well covered with grass, and surrounded by high mountains.
+
+21st. Wind N.W. set sail by break of day; reached _Nennoktok_ about
+noon, and steered across _Sangmiyok_ bay, for the northern promontory in
+_Nachvak_ bay. Sangmiyok bay is full of breakers, and the sea running
+pretty high, they appeared very distinctly. The wind dying away in the
+afternoon, we got no farther than the steep rocks under which we had
+spent the night of July the 18th, where we came to an anchor. A heavy
+swell from the sea, and violent gusts of wind assailing us in all
+directions from the mountains gave us much uneasiness; but, by the
+protecting care of God, we suffered no harm.
+
+22d. It blew hard from the N.W. and prevented our running into Nachvak
+bay. Our situation being highly dangerous, and the wind favouring our
+proceeding, we determined to pass by Nachvak. But having sailed across
+the bay, our captain found it impossible to proceed, and thought proper
+to come to an anchor. The truth was, that he had left some articles here
+in a cove, which he wished to secure. We therefore went on shore, and
+found many fragments of the bones of whales, whence we inferred that
+whales are sometimes cast on shore in this place.
+
+23d. A heavy storm came on from the N.W. To-day we caught the first
+cod-fish, which proved a very acceptable change of diet for us and our
+people.
+
+24th. The morning was calm. Wind E. left the cove and steered for
+Nachvak, and came, _accidentally_, to the very place where Jonathan's
+goods were deposited. Not perceiving any Esquimaux on shore, Jonathan
+and Thukkekina went up the bay in their kayaks in search of them.
+Meanwhile _we_ landed, and on the declivity of a hill found a great
+quantity of green soapstone. In the evening Jonathan and Thukkekina
+returned with ten other Equimaux, who rejoiced to see us again.
+
+25th. Brother Kohlmeister was engaged all day with the Esquimaux.
+Brother Kmoch went up the mountain, and brought some fine specimens of
+steatite.
+
+26th. Wind strong at N.W. we set sail; but the wind failing, we could
+not reach _Saeglek_, as proposed, but spent the night in the open sea.
+It passed, however, without any unpleasant occurrences.
+
+27th. The want of wind prevented our getting to-day as far as the
+Saeglek islands. Having passed through a very narrow Ikkerasak, with
+hardly sufficient depth of water for so large a boat, we cast anchor
+near our former station at _Kikkertarsoak_.
+
+28th. Wind cold and changeable, and towards evening stormy.
+
+29th. Set sail about 6 A.M. with a strong wind at W. and in the evening
+had reached _Kangertluksoak_ islands.
+
+30th. It blew hard, with snow, and we were obliged to spend the day shut
+up in our small cabin by lamp-light. The land was covered with snow. We
+were detained here very unpleasantly for three days, by the violence of
+the wind and weather.
+
+_October_ 3d. We steered for the promontory of _Kaumayok_; but the wind
+dying away, and at length turning to the South, we could not gain any
+safe harbour, and were obliged to tack about all night in the open sea.
+The weather, however, was mild, and we had the advantage of moon-light.
+
+4th. At 7 A.M. we succeeded in passing the Northern Ikkerasak near cape
+_Mugford_ with the tide, and the wind becoming fair, soon brought us
+among the Okkak islands. About noon we doubled cape _Uivak_, and
+perceived Esquimaux on shore, who ran up the hills, shouted for joy, and
+gave us by signs to understand, that the ship (the brig Jemima, sent
+annually with provisions to the settlements) was still at Okkak.
+
+We cannot describe the inexpressible pleasure and gratitude to God our
+Saviour which we felt, when we again beheld the neighbourhood of Okkak,
+after an absence of fifteen weeks. As soon as the captain descried our
+boat approaching, he hoisted his colours, and fired some guns to give
+notice of our arrival. As we were obliged to tack, to gain the entrance
+to the harbour, he came to meet us in the ship's boat, and about one
+o'clock we landed. The Missionaries and the Esquimaux met us with tears
+of joy and thankfulness, when we all joined in praise to God, who had so
+wonderfully kept His protecting hand over us during this perilous
+voyage, and granted us to return home in safety.
+
+Our voyage lasted from the 24th of June to the 4th of October, and we
+calculated it to be a distance of from 1200 to 1300 miles.
+
+BENJAMIN GOTTLIEB KOHLMEISTER.
+
+GEORGE KMOCH.
+
+[Illustration: _The Northern Extremity of_ LABRADOR with UNGAVA BAY
+Explored by the MISSIONARIES _of the Unitas Fratrum_ in 1811.]
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE FROM OKKAK, ON
+THE COAST OF LABRADOR, TO UNGAVA BAY, WESTWARD OF CAPE CHUDLEIGH***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 15436.txt or 15436.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/5/4/3/15436
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/15436.zip b/15436.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e24332
--- /dev/null
+++ b/15436.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b25b96a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #15436 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/15436)